ELMARK Has been a registered trademark for Europe since the year of 2000 and is part of the international company
ELMARK HOLDING SC. Our company is licensed for the manufacture of the full range of professional low-voltage electrical
equipment.
The Headquarters of ELMARK HOLDING AD are situated in Varna, Bulgaria. There is our logistics center which
coordinates our activities in Europe and worldwide.
As a member-company of our holding, ELMARK INDUSTRIES SC is controlling the production, while ELMARK GROUP
BULGARIA LTD, ELMARK GRUP SRL-Romania, ELMARK GROUP DOO – Serbia, ELMARK GROUP DOO – Croatia, manage
our trade activities in the respective countries.
Our plant in Europe is situated in Bulgaria on an area of 10 000 sq.m. In its warehouse we keep on hand large quantities of
all products, presented in the technical catalogue. Right from here we distribute the goods for Europe and worldwide. There is and
adjacent modern warehouse building, covering 5000 sq.m., which enables us to keep large stocks to better meet the demands of
our multiple clients. The management and the quality control of the products we produce are guaranteed by the ISO 9001:2000
certificates, complete Test for certificates for CE marking in accordance with Directive 73/23 EEC and ROHS (Restriction of
hazardous Substances) certificates which guarantee the absence of any substances hazardous to the people and the
environment.
The full three - year warranty period is an additional proof of the quality of the ELMARK products. It is further accompanied
by a special international insurance, which guarantees the coverage of damages which may occur as a result from an action or
inaction of our products.
ELMARK HOLDING AD is represented by distributing companies in Greece, Cyprus, Hungary, Macedonia, Bosnia and
Herzegovina, Montenegro, Sri Lanka, Israel and Jordan. We are near to finalize our contract negotiations with distributors from
Kuwait.
Our successful trade policy is due to the high quality of the ELMARK product range and the successful balance of supply
and demand of electrical equipment on competitive prices. As a result, ELMARK HOLDING SC has been a trustworthy and desired
partner on the European and world market for eight years.
CONTENTS
2
www.elmarkgroup.eu
CERTIFICATES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
А1
А1
А1
А1
A1
А1
А1
А1
А2
А2
А2
А3
А3
А3
А4
А5
А6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Miniature circuit breakers C45, C60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C40N - SIGMA design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) С60N - OMEGA design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C100L - SIGMA design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C100M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C60DC series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) DP1N (1P + N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Auxiliary devices for circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Switch disconnectors ISS 63…100A series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Isolating switches ISS2 125…800A series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Manual switching to reserve series EQ 2M from 125 to 800А . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DS1 series from 40 to 800A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
High capacity circuit breakers DS1 to 1600A – electronic type (MCCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Auxiliary devices for high capacity circuit breakers DS1 type (MCCB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DS2 series 63…1250A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DW1 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Dual power change-over switch EQ1 series (ATS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
B1
B2
B3
B4
INDIRECT PROTECTION DEVICES
Residual current devices JЕL1/2 SIGMA/OMEGA design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Combined circuit breakers with residual current device JЕL5 (RCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Combined circuit breaker with electronic residual current device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Surge arresters SPD type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
CONTACTORS
Low voltage contactors LT 1 - D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Low voltage contactors LT 1 - H K/D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Low voltage contactors LT 1 - F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Low voltage contactors with direct current coil LP 1-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
AC contactor for switching on of capacitors CJ19-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Reverse contactors LT 4-Dxx. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Auxiliary contact blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Module contactors K series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
D1
D2
D3
CAPACITY COEFFICIENT COMPENSATION
Complex compensating devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Capacitor batteries and cosφ regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Filters for harmonics and metal boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Е1
E2
Е3
Е4
E5
Е6
Е7
Е7
Е8
Е9
DEVICES FOR CONTROL AND PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL MOTORS
Thermal relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Thermomagnetic automatic breaker TM 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Auxiliary devices for thermomagnetic automatic breaker TM 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Starters for direct start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
“Star/delta” starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Reverse starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
ELM 1000 frequency inverters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
ELM2000 frequency inverters with no-sensor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Auxiliary equipment for frequency inverters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
ELM 2500 soft starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
TIMERS, RELAYS AND DISPLAYING DEVICES
Programmable timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Digital counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Industrial Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Devices for temperature measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Current measurement transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Displaying measurement devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
CONTENTS
3
www.elmarkgroup.eu
G11
H1
H2
H3
H4
ELEMENTS FOR AUTOMATION, MONITORING AND CONTROL
Limit switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Proximity sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Capacitive sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Photoelectrical sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Float switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Rotary switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Buttons and LED indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Buttons and LED indicators for DIN-rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Devices for telpher control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Warning lights and towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICES AND ISOLATING SWITCHES
Security sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Bases for high power safety devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Fuse links for high power safety devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Isolating switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Switch disconnector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
INDUSTRIAL PLUGS AND SOCKETS
Industrial plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Static industrial plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Static industrial contacts for exposed wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Movable industrial contacts for exposed wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Industrial built in contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Distribution boxes with industrial contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
J1
I2
J3
J4
J5
PLASTIC BOXES AND METAL CABINETS FOR DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
Plastic distribution boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Metal distribution boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Module plastic distribution boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Cable support systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Moisture-proof junction boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
K1
K2
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY AND GENERATORS
Uninterruptible power supply systems UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G5
G6
G7
G8
G9
G10
M1
М2
М3
М4
М5
М6
М7
М8
М9
М10
INSTRUMENTS
Manual meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Hydraulic crimping instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Hydraulic crimping instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Mechanical cutting instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Hand instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
CONSUMATIVES
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Voltage transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Auxiliary devices for circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Non-insulated butt terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Non-insulated terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Insulated terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Consumatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Thermal shrinkable tubes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Terminal blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Multiplugs and cable reels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
ELECTRICAL SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
"RHYME” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
"SPLENDOR" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
"BASIC" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
"LIFE STYLE" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
"HAKAN" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
Certificates of the trade companies – Bulgaria, Romania, Serbia
4
www.elmarkgroup.eu
ISO certificates of ELMARK INDUSTRIES SC
5
www.elmarkgroup.eu
ROHS certificates
6
www.elmarkgroup.eu
LVD certificates for compliance with Directive 2006/95/EC (ex-73/23/EEC) “Low Voltage Directives”
Issued by the Center for Testing and European Certification Ltd.
7
www.elmarkgroup.eu
An EU Notified Body, registered by NANDO
(New Approach Notified and Designated Organization) № 1871, http://ec.europa.eu/enterprise/newapproach/nando
Certificates presenting ELMARK products for Bosnia and Herzegovina
8
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Certificates presenting ELMARK products for Serbia
9
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Certificates presenting ELMARK products for Croatia
10
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Certificate for international insurance in Alliance IRIND
11
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Circuit breakers
Miniature circuit breakers C45, CL60-SIGMA/OMEGA design
12
www.elmarkgroup.eu
TERMINAL
NON-FLAMMABLE COVER
JUMP KNUCKLE
HANDLE
A1
LOCK KNACKLE
MOVABLE CONTACT
OMEGA design
SIGMA design
ARC CHAMBER
STATIC CONTACT
MAXIMUM CURRENT RELEASE
AUXILIARY CONTACT (accessory)
UNDER VOLTAGE RELEASE (accessory)
SHUNT RELEASE (accessory)
10
11
12
Characteristics
Circuit breakers are automatically-operated electrical switches, designed to protect electrical circuits
from damage caused by overload or short circuit. They can also be used as devices for commutation
and control of electrical circuits. They differ in the following characteristics:
* Operating voltage: 230, 400V
* Number of poles: 1, 2, 3, 4
* Breaking curve:
- curve B – breaks between 3 and 5 In, used for low voltage short circuit currents (long circuits and
generators)
- curve C – breaks between 5 and 10 In, used for protection of main power supply cables and
conventional consumers
- curve D – breaks between 10 and 20 In, used for protection of industrial consumers with high
initial current flow (electric motors)
* Breaking capacity: 4.5, 6, 10kA
Circuit breakers
13
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C40N - SIGMA design
Type designation:
С4xN constructive series
number of poles (1;3)
C x rated current
breaking curve С
Documents corresponding
to the product:
Standard EN60898-1
EN 60947-2
72
45
35
50
81
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Functions:
- protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuits of the outer circuit
- it can be used as a device for commutation and control of electrical circuits
- in combination with auxiliary devices it allows remote control, commutation or indication of the protected circuit
- for mounting in housing and industrial buildings
- for mounting at a distance from the transformer post from 150 to 850 m
- allows protection of consumers generating short circuit currents up to 6000 A
Technical data:
* Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz
* Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898-1: 6000A
* Rated breaking capacity Ics= 75% Icu
* Isolating voltage:≥2000V
* Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥4000
* Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥20000
* Class of current limiting:3
* IP code: IP>20
* Breaking curve:
B curve – the overload and short-circuit protection is activated at 3-5 ln. Used for protection of big length cables and
power generators.
C – the maximum current release breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect main power supply cables and
conventional consumers
* Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal with composition 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235 – A
* Plastic box – not keeping the burning material nylon PA66, UV rays wear resistance
* Box permitivity strength: >18MV/m
* Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960°C / 3s
* Maximum current release containing:
- copper coil - composition: pure copper T2 type
- resistance: from 0.6 to 180mΩ
- welding effort: <150 000 N/mm2
- bimetal plate – composition: 5J158 to TB180 depending on the current
- thickness: 0.6mm (up to 40A) and 0.8mm (up to 63A)
- magnetic core – composition: coldly draw-plated metal wire (1Gr18Ni9)
- thickness: 1.15 to 2.24μm
- drawing effort: from 200 to 400N/mm2
- contact head of the movable contact – composition: silver graphite CAg(5)
- dimension 3x3x0.8 (up to 40A) and 4x4x0.8 (up to 63A)
- static contact – composition: pure copper T2Y2
- composition of the contact head: silver graphite CAg(5)
* Power supply (conducting)
- power supply busbar 1P63, 3P63
- rigid conductors up to 25 mm2
- flexible conductors up to 16 mm2
* Tightening moment:1.33Nm
Mounting:
* vertical
* DIN-rail
* for mounting in housing or industrial environment without serious
interference
* ambient temperature: -5°C to + 40°C±2° C
Type
Rated current
In (A)
Breaking capacity
(kA)
Recommended
sections of the
mounting
conductors (mm2)
Catalogue number
Curve C
Catalogue number
Curve B
Package / Box
(pcs)
C41N / 2A
C41N / 4A
C41N / 6A
C41N / 10A
C41N / 16A
C41N / 20A
C41N / 25A
C41N / 32A
C41N / 40A
C41N / 50A
C41N / 63A
2
4
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
2.5
2.5
4.0
6.0
10.0
10.0
16.0
41460
41461
41451
41452
41453
41454
41455
41456
41457
41458
41459
41460B
41461B
41451B
41452B
41453B
41454B
41455B
41456B
41457B
41458B
41459B
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
A1
Circuit breakers
14
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C40N - SIGMA design
www.elmarkgroup.eu
A1
Type
Rated current
In (A)
Breaking capacity
(kA)
C42N / 6A
C42N / 10A
C42N / 16A
C42N / 20A
C42N / 25A
C42N / 32A
C42N / 40A
C42N / 50A
C42N / 63A
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
Type
Rated current
In (A)
Breaking capacity
(kA)
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
Rated current
In (A)
Breaking capacity
(kA)
C43N / 6A
C43N / 10A
C43N / 16A
C43N / 20A
C43N / 25A
C43N / 32A
C43N / 40A
C43N / 50A
C43N / 63A
Type
C44N / 6A
C44N / 10A
C44N / 16A
C44N / 20A
C44N / 25A
C44N / 32A
C44N / 40A
C44N / 50A
C44N / 63A
C40 curve B
t(s)
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
Recommended
sections of the Catalogue number Catalogue number Package / Box
mounting
Curve C
Curve B
(pcs)
conductors (mm2)
1.0
1.5
2.5
2.5
4.0
6.0
10.0
10.0
16.0
41470
41471
41472
41473
41474
41475
41476
41477
41478
41470B
41471B
41472B
41473B
41474B
41475B
41476B
41477B
41478B
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
Recommended
sections of the Catalogue number Catalogue number Package / Box
mounting
Curve C
Curve B
(pcs)
conductors (mm2)
1.0
1.5
2.5
2.5
4.0
6.0
10.0
10.0
16.0
41541
41542
41543
41544
41545
41546
41547
41548
41549
41541B
41542B
41543B
41544B
41545B
41546B
41547B
41548B
41549B
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
Recommended
sections of the Catalogue number Catalogue number Package / Box
mounting
Curve C
Curve B
(pcs)
conductors (mm2)
1.0
1.5
2.5
2.5
4.0
6.0
10.0
10.0
16.0
C40 curve C
t(s)
41480C
41481C
41482C
41483C
41484C
41485C
41486C
41487C
41488C
41480B
41481B
41482B
41483B
41484B
41485B
41486B
41487B
41488B
3 / 60
3 / 60
3 / 60
3 / 60
3 / 60
3 / 60
3 / 60
3 / 60
3 / 60
Circuit breakers
15
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) С60N - OMEGA design
Type designation:
С6xN constructive series
number of poles (1;2;3;4)
C x rated current
breaking curve С
Documents corresponding
to the product:
Standard EN60898-1
72
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Functions:
- protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuits of the outer circuit
- it can be used as a device for commutation and control of electrical circuits
- in combination with auxiliary devices it allows remote control, commutation or indication of the protected circuit
- for mounting in industrial buildings with high contamination level of the electric system
- for mounting at a distance from the transformer post from 150 to 850 m
- allows protection of consumers generating short circuit currents up to 6000 A
Technical data:
* Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz
* Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898-1: 6000A
* Rated breaking capacity Ics= 75% Icu
* Isolating voltage:≥2000V
* Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥8000
* Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥50000
* Class of current limiting:3
* IP code: IP>20
* Breaking curve:
B – the maximum current release breaks between 3 and 5 In; used to protect long circuits and generators
C – the maximum current release breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect main power supply cables and
conventional consumers
* Joining terminal: Combined screw clamp made of 1.5 cold extruded Q235-A material with additional coating
* Plastic box – not keeping the burning material nylon PA66, UV rays wear resistance
* Status indicator
* Box permitivity strength: >18MV/m
* Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960°C / 3s
* Heat resistance of internal non-electrical components: 850°С / 10 s
* Maximum current release containing:
- copper coil - composition: pure copper T2 type
- resistance: from 0.6 to 180mΩ
- welding effort: <150 000 N/mm2
- bimetal plate – composition: 5J158 to TB180 depending on the current
- thickness: 0.6mm (up to 40A) and 0.8mm (up to 63A)
- magnetic core – composition: coldly draw-plated metal wire (1Gr18Ni9)
- thickness: 1.15 to 2.24μm
- drawing effort: from 200 to 400N/mm2
- contact head of the movable contact – composition: silver graphite CAg(5)
- dimension 3x3x0.8 (up to 40A) and 4x4x0.8 (up to 63A)
- static contact – composition: pure copper T2Y2
- composition of the contact head: silver graphite CAg(5)
45
35
81
50
* Power supply (conducting)
- power supply busbar 1P63, 3P63
- rigid conductors up to 25 mm2
- flexible conductors up to 16 mm2
* Tightening moment:1.33Nm
Mounting:
* vertical
* DIN-rail
* for mounting in housing or industrial environment without serious
interference
* ambient temperature: -5°C to + 40°C±2° C
Type
Rated current
In A
Breaking capacity
(kA)
Recommended
sections of the
mounting
conductors (mm2)
C61N / 1A
C61N / 2A
C61N / 4A
C61N / 6A
C61N / 10A
C61N / 16A
C61N / 20A
C61N / 25A
C61N / 32A
C61N / 40A
C61N / 50A
C61N / 63A
1
2
4
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
2.5
2.5
4.0
6.0
10.0
10.0
16.0
Catalogue number
Curve C
41100N
41102N
41104N
41106N
41110N
41116N
41120N
41125N
41132N
41140N
41150N
41163N
Catalogue number
Curve B
Package/Box
(pcs)
41501N
41502N
41504N
41506N
41510N
41516N
41520N
41525N
41532N
41540N
41550N
41563N
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
A1
Circuit breakers
16
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) С60N - OMEGA design
www.elmarkgroup.eu
A1
Type
Rated current
In (A)
Breaking capacity
(kA)
C62N / 2А
C62N / 4A
C62N / 6A
C62N / 10A
C62N / 16A
C62N / 20A
C62N / 25A
C62N / 32A
C62N / 40A
C62N / 50A
C62N / 63A
2
4
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Type
Rated current
In (A)
Breaking capacity
(kA)
C63N/2A
C63N/4A
C63N / 6A
C63N / 10A
C63N / 16A
C63N / 20A
C63N / 25A
C63N / 32A
C63N / 40A
C63N / 50A
C63N / 63A
2
4
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Type
Rated current
In (A)
Breaking capacity
(kA)
C64N / 2A
C64N / 4A
C64N / 6A
C64N / 10A
C64N / 16A
C64N / 20A
C64N / 25A
C64N / 32A
C64N / 40A
C64N / 50A
C64N / 63A
2
4
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Recommended
sections of the Catalogue number Catalogue number Package / Box
mounting
Curve C
Curve B
(pcs)
conductors (mm2)
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
2.5
2.5
4.0
6.0
10.0
10.0
16.0
41202N
41204N
41206N
41210N
41216N
41220N
41225N
41232N
41240N
41250N
41263N
41602N
41604N
41606N
41610N
41616N
41620N
41625N
41632N
41640N
41650N
41663N
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
Recommended
sections of the Catalogue number Catalogue number Package / Box
mounting
Curve C
Curve B
(pcs)
conductors (mm2)
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
2.5
2.5
4.0
6.0
10.0
10.0
16.0
41302N
41304N
41306N
41310N
41316N
41320N
41325N
41332N
41340N
41350N
41363N
41702N
41704N
41706N
41710N
41716N
41720N
41725N
41732N
41740N
41750N
41763N
Recommended
sections of the Catalogue number Catalogue number Package / Box
mounting
Curve C
Curve B
(pcs)
conductors (mm2)
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
2.5
2.5
4.0
6.0
10.0
10.0
16.0
41402N
41404N
41406N
41410N
41416N
41420N
41425N
41432N
41440N
41450N
41463N
3 / 60
3 / 60
3 / 60
3 / 60
3 / 60
3 / 60
3 / 60
3 / 60
3 / 60
3 / 60
3 / 60
41802N
41804N
41806N
41810N
41816N
41820N
41825N
41832N
41840N
41850N
41863N
C60 curve B
1. Thermal release
4 / 80
4 / 80
4 / 80
4 / 80
4 / 80
4 / 80
4 / 80
4 / 80
4 / 80
4 / 80
4 / 80
C60 curve C
1. Thermal release
2. Electromagnetic release
2. Electromagnetic release
Circuit breakers
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C100L - SIGMA design
Type designation:
С100L constructive series;
number of poles (1;3)
C x rated current
breaking curve С
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN60898-1
EN 60947-2
17
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Functions:
- protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuits of the outer circuit
- it can be used as a device for commutation and control of electrical circuits
- in combination with auxiliary devices it allows remote control, commutation or indication of the protected circuit
Technical data:
* Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz
* Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898-1: 10000A
* Rated breaking capacity Ics= 75% Icu
* Isolating volatage:≥2000V, 1 min at impulse wave 1.2/50µs
* Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥4000
* Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥20000
* Class of current limiting:3
* IP code: IP>20
* Breaking curve: C
* Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal with composition 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235 – A
* Plastic box – not keeping the burning material nylon PA66, UV rays wear resistance
* Box permitivity strength: >18MV/m
* Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960°C / 3s
* Power supply (conducting)
- power supply busbar
- rigid conductors up to 25 mm2
- flexible conductors up to 35 mm2
* Tightening moment:1.33Nm
Mounting:
* vertical
* DIN-rail
* possibility for labeling
* for mounting in industrial environment
* ambient temperature: -5°C to + 40°C±2° C
Type
Rated current
In A
Breaking capacity
(kA)
C101L/6A
6
10
C101L/10A
10
10
C101L/16A
16
10
C101L/20A
20
10
C101L/25A
25
10
C101L/32A
32
C101L/40A
40
C101L/50A
Recommended
sections of the
mounting
conductors (mm2)
Catalogue number
Curve C
Package / Box
(pcs)
1.0
41101
12 / 240
1.5
41103
12 / 240
2.5
41105
12 / 240
2.5
41107
12 / 240
4.0
41108
12 / 240
10
6.0
41109
12 / 240
10
10.0
41111
12 / 240
50
10
10.0
41112
12 / 240
C101L/63A
63
10
16.0
41113
12 / 240
Type
Rated current
In A
Breaking capacity
(kA)
Recommended
sections of the
mounting
conductors (mm2)
Catalogue number
Curve C
Package / Box
(pcs)
C103L/6A
6
10
1.0
41301
4 / 80
C103L/10A
10
10
1.5
41303
4 / 80
C103L/16A
16
10
2.5
41305
4 / 80
C103L/20A
20
10
2.5
41307
4 / 80
C103L/25A
25
10
4.0
41308
4 / 80
C103L/32A
32
10
6.0
41309
4 / 80
C103L/40A
40
10
10.0
41311
4 / 80
C103L/50A
50
10
10.0
41312
4 / 80
C103L/63A
63
10
16.0
41313
4 / 80
A1
Circuit breakers
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C100M
18
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Type designation:
С100М constructive series;
number of poles (1;2;3;4)
D x rated current
breaking curve С; D
A1
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN60898-1
EN 60947-2
Functions:
- protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuits of the outer circuit
- it can be used as a device for commutation and control of electrical circuits
- in combination with auxiliary devices it allows remote control, commutation or indication of the protected circuit
Technical data:
* Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz
* Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898-1: 10000A
* Rated breaking capacity Ics= 75% Icu
* Isolating volatage:≥2000V
* Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥4000
* Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥20000
* Class of current limiting:3
* IP code: IP>20
* Breaking curve: C,D
* Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal with composition 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235 – A
* Plastic box – not keeping the burning material nylon PA66, UV rays wear resistance
* Box permitivity strength: >18MV/m
* Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960°C / 3s
* Maximum current release containing:
- copper coil - composition: pure copper T2 type
- resistance: from 148 to 230mΩ
- welding effort: <400 N/mm2
- bimetal plate – composition: TB180/0.5
- thickness: 0.8mm
- magnetic core – composition: coldly draw-plated metal wire (1Gr18Ni9)
- thickness: 1.15 to 2.24μm
- drawing effort: 20N/mm2
- contact head of the movable contact – composition: silver graphite CAg(5)
- dimension 6x6x1
- static contact – composition: pure copper T2Y2
- composition of the contact head: silver graphite CAg(5)
* Power supply (conducting)
- power supply busbar
- rigid conductors up to 50 mm2
- flexible conductors up to 35 mm2
* Tightening moment:1.33Nm
Mounting:
* vertical
* DIN-rail
* possibility for labeling
* for mounting in industrial environment
* ambient temperature: -5°C to + 40°C±2° C
Poles
1P
Rated current
(A)
Breaking capacity
(kA)
Catalogue number
Curve C
Catalogue number
Curve D
Package / Box
(pcs)
80
10
41180
41180D
9 / 180
100
10
41190
41190D
9 / 180
125
10
41195
41190D
9 / 180
Circuit breakers
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB)C100M
19
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Poles
Rated current
(A)
Breaking capacity Catalogue number Catalogue number Package / Box
(kA)
Curve C
Curve D
(pcs)
2P
80
10
41280
41281
6 / 120
100
10
41290
41291
6 / 120
A1
Poles
Rated current
(A)
3P
Poles
Breaking capacity Catalogue number Catalogue number Package / Box
(kA)
Curve C
Curve D
(pcs)
80
10
41380
41381
4 / 60
100
10
41390
41391
4 / 60
Rated current
(A)
4P
Breaking capacity Catalogue number Catalogue number Package / Box
(kA)
Curve C
Curve D
(pcs)
80
10
41480
41481
3 / 60
100
10
41490
41491
3 / 60
(C Type)
(D Type)
t(s)
t(s)
1000
1000
5000
5000
2000
Thermal release
2000
1000
1000
500
500
200
200
100
100
50
50
20
20
Electromagnetic
release
10
5
2
Thermal release
10
5
Electromagnetic
release
2
1
1
0.5
0.5
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.05
0.05
0.02
0.02
0.01
0.01
0.005
0.005
0.002
0.002
0.001
0.001
0.5
1
2
3 4 5
7 10
20 30
50 70
100
200
i/in
0.5
1
2
3 4 5
7 10
20 30
50 70
100
200
i/in
20
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Circuit breakers
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C60DC series
Type designation
A1
Functions:
- for lowering constant current voltaic arc and use of the breaker at constant current consumer protection
С6xDC constructive series
- protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuit of the outer circuit at alternating current and constant
number of poles (1;2;3;4)
current power supply circuits
Cx
rated current
- for commutation and control of electrical circuits
breaking curve С
- in combination with auxiliary alternating current devices for remote control, commutation or indication of the
protected circuit
Documents corresponding to
- for mounting in industrial buildings
the product:
- for protection of consumers generating short circuit currents to 6000 A at alternating current power supply
Standard EN60898-1
Technical data:
EN 60898-2
* Rated voltage: 240V; AC/DC
* Breaking capacity (cycle O -CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898- 1: 6000A
* Rated breaking capacity Ics=75% Icu
* Insulating voltage: ≥2000V
* Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥4000
* Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥20000
* Class of current limiting: 3
* IP code: IP>20
* Breaking curve: C – the maximum current release breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect power supply cables
and conventional consumers
* Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal with composition 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235 – A
* Plastic box – not keeping the burning material nylon PA66, UV rays wear resistance
* Box permitivity strength: >18MV/m
* Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960°C / 3s
* Maximum current release containing:
- copper coil - composition: pure copper T2 type
- resistance: from 0.6 to 180mΩ
- welding effort: <150 000 N/mm2
- bimetal plate – composition: 5J158 to TB180 according to the current
- thickness: 0.6mm (up to 40A) and 0.8mm (up to 63A)
- magnetic core – composition: coldly draw-plated metal wire (1Gr18Ni9)
- thickness: 1.15 to 2.24μm
- drawing effort: from 200 to 400N/mm2
- contact head of the movable contact – composition: silver graphite CAg(5)
- dimension 3x3x0.8 (up to 40A) and 4x4x0.8 (up to 63A)
- static contact – composition: pure copper T2Y2
- composition of the contact head: silver graphite CAg(5)
- metal magnetic plate for lowering the constant current arc
* Conducting:
- power supply busbar 1P63
- rigid conductors up to 25 mm2
- flexible conductors up to 16 mm2
* Tightening moment: 1.33Nm
Mounting
* vertical
* DIN-rail
* for mounting in housing or industrial environment without serious current interference
* Ambient temperature: -5°C to + 40°C±2° C
Circuit breakers
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C60DC series
21
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Breaking capacity
(kA)
Rated current
In (A)
Recommended
sections of the
mounting
conductors (mm2)
Catalogue number
Curve C
Package/Box
(pcs)
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
1
2
4
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
2.5
2.5
4.0
6.0
10.0
10.0
16.0
41164
41165
41166
41167
41168
41169
41170
41171
41172
41173
41174
41175
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
Type
Breaking capacity
(kA)
Rated current
In (A)
Recommended
sections of the
mounting
conductors (mm2)
Catalogue number
Curve C
Package/Box
(pcs)
62DC / 2A
62DC / 4A
62DC / 6A
62DC / 10A
62DC / 16A
62DC / 20A
62DC / 25A
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
2
4
6
10
16
20
25
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
2.5
2.5
4.0
41176
41177
41178
41179
41181
41182
41183
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
6 / 120
Type
61DC / 1A
61DC / 2A
61DC / 4A
61DC / 6A
61DC / 10A
61DC / 16A
61DC / 20A
61DC / 25A
61DC / 32A
61DC / 40A
61DC / 50A
61DC / 63A
36
45
78
18
72
65
49
5
A1
Circuit breakers
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) DP1N (1P + N)
22
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Functions:
- protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuit of the outer circuit
- it can be used as a device for commutation and control of electrical circuits
- it breaks simultaneously the lead and the neutral conductor as the heat protection is only at the lead conductor
Technical data:
* Rated voltage: 230V; 50/60Hz
* Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898-1: 4500 A
* Rated breaking capacity Ics = 50% Icu
* Insulating voltage: ≥2000V
* IP code: IP>20
* Breaking curve: C – the maximum current release breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect main power supply
cables and conventional consumers
Connecting:
* Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal
* Power supply (conducting):
- power supply busbar DP1N
- flexible or rigid conductor
* Mounting: on DIN-rail
A1
Circuit breakers DP1N (1P+N) - SIGMA design
Rated current
Breaking capacity
(kA)
Recommended
sections of the
mounting
conductors (mm2)
Catalogue number
Curve C
Package / Box
(pcs)
DP1N / 6
6
4.5
1.0
41006
12 / 240
DP1N / 10
10
4.5
1.5
41010
12 / 240
DP1N / 16
16
4.5
2.5
41016
12 / 240
DP1N / 20
20
4.5
2.5
41020
12 / 240
DP1N / 25
25
4.5
4.0
41025
12 / 240
DP1N / 32
32
4.5
6.0
41032
12 / 240
Type
72
45
35
81
50
Circuit breakers
Auxiliary devices for circuit breakers
Type designation:
МN - constructive series
number of poles - 1
Documents corresponding
to the product:
Standard EN60898-1
23
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Combined voltage circuit-breaker МN2
Functions:
- when the voltage is reduced below 170V operation is initiated and the automatic switch is turned off
- when the voltage is increased above 270V operation is initiated and the automatic switch is turned off
- allows manual turning on of the switch after powering is restored
- indication of the position of the device
Technical characteristics:
* Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz
* Insulation voltage: ≥2000V
* Protection ratio: IP>20
Connection method:
* Double connector: flat (tunnel) screw connector
* Feeding (conducting):
- flexible conductors up to 1.5mm2
* Tightening moment of the screw: 1.33Nm
Mounting:
* vertical, by means of two pins attached to the rivets of the circuit-breaker, while the operating mechanism is
connected to the switching off mechanism of the circuit breaker after the sealing lid is demounted
Type
Type designation:
МX - constructive series
number of poles - 1
Documents corresponding
to the product:
Standard EN60898-1
Type designation:
OF – constructive series
number of poles – 1
Documents corresponding
to the product:
Standard EN60898-1
Rated
voltage
Type
breaker
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
(pcs)
ELMARK MN 2 60
230V
С60;CL60N
41909
12 / 240
ELMARK MN 2 40
230V
C40;C100L
41919
12 / 240
Shunt release MX (independent release)
Functions:
- remote circuit breaker switching off at voltage feed
- allows manual switching on of the breaker at voltage recovery
- indication of the device's location
Technical data:
* Rated voltage: 230V; 50/60Hz
* Isolating voltage: ≥2000V
* IP code: IP>20
Connecting:
* Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal
* Power supply (conducting):
- flexible conductors up to 1.5mm2
* Tightening moment: 1.33Nm
* The power supply of the release is accomplished at the outlet of the breaker
Mounting:
* vertical, clamps with two pins to the breaker's rivets and the executive mechanism is joined up to the switching
mechanism of the breaker after dismounting the seal cover
Type
Rated
voltage
Type
breaker
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
(pcs)
ELMARK MX 60
230V
ELMARK MX 40
230V
С60;CL60N
41902
12 / 240
C40;C100L
41912
12 / 240
Auxiliary contact OF
Functions:
-at circuit breaker switching off it sends a signal to the control or signalization system
-indication of the location of the auxiliary contact and the breaker
Technical data:
* Rated voltage: 230V
* Isolating voltage: ≥2000V
* Ingress protecting rating: IP>20
Connecting:
* Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal
* Power supply (conducting): - flexible conductors up to 1.5mm2
Mounting:
* vertical, clamps with two pins to breaker's rivets, and the executive mechanism is joined up to the switching
mechanism of the breaker after dismounting the seal cover
Type
Rated
voltage
Type
breaker
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
(pcs)
ELMARK OF 60
230V
С60;CL60N
41901
12 / 240
ELMARK OF 40
230V
C40;C100L
41911
12 / 240
ELMARK SD 40
230V
C40;C100L
41910
12 / 240
ELMARK SD100
230V
C100M
41909
12 / 240
A1
Circuit breakers
Switch disconnectors ISS 63…100A series
24
www.elmarkgroup.eu
A2
Standard EN 60947-3 и
IEC947-3
Functions:
- switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits
- breaking of electrical circuits
- can be used as a main breaker
Technical data:
* Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz
* Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal
* Connecting: power supply busbar, rigid or flexible conductors
* Tightening moment: 1.33Nm
* Isolating voltage: ≥500V
* Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥10000
* Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥20000
* IP code: IP>20
* Mounting: DIN-rail
* Plastic material of UV rays
* Ambient temperature: -20°C + 55°C
Poles
1P
40 -100А
Poles
2P
Poles
3P
Poles
4P
Rated current
(A)
Recommended
sections of the
mounting
conductors (mm2)
40
10
63
80
100
Rated current
(A)
Catalogue number
Package / Box
(pcs)
41914
12 / 240
16
41911
12 / 240
25
41912
12 / 240
35
41913
12 / 240
Recommended
sections of the
mounting
conductors (mm2)
Catalogue number
Package / Box
(pcs)
40
10
41924
6 / 120
63
16
41921
6 / 120
80
25
41922
6 / 120
100
35
41923
6 / 120
Rated current
(A)
Recommended
sections of the
mounting
conductors (mm2)
Catalogue number
Package / Box
(pcs)
40
10
41934
4 / 80
63
16
41931
4 / 80
80
25
41932
4 / 80
100
35
41933
4 / 80
Rated current
(A)
Recommended
sections of the
mounting
conductors (mm2)
Catalogue number
Package / Box
(pcs)
40
10
41944
3 / 60
63
16
41941
3 / 60
80
25
41942
3 / 60
100
35
41943
3 / 60
Circuit breakers
Isolating switches ISS2 125…800A series
Documentation corresponding
to the product:
Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-3 and IEC 60947-6
25
www.elmarkgroup.eu
The series three- and four-pole load isolating switch ISS2 xxx are produced for mounting in main electrical boards for
disconnection of the circuits, switching on of generators because of the fact they are not affected by the frequency
variations. High mechanical strength and resistance to circulation. Simple and secure management. There is a possibility
for the products to be produced with an window for visible disconnection.
Functions:
- switching on and off of electrical circuits under load
- disconnection of electrical circuits
- used as main circuit-breaker
- resistant to high voltages, to short circuits in the protected circuit
- it has no protective function
A2
Technical features:
* Rated voltage: not higher than 660V; 50/60Hz
* Double connector: screw connection
* Connection: solid or flexible conductors
* Insulation voltage: ≥1000V
* Resistance to impulse voltage: 8000V
* Electrical endurance (number of cycles): ≥5 000
* Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): ≥10 000
* Protection ratio: IP>20
* Mounting method: to a surface by means of bolts
* Plastic resistant to UV raysPlastic resistant to UV rays
* Ambient temperature: -20°÷40ºС
Dimensions
Type
A
B
С
D
E
J
J1
K
R
S
T
Y
ISS2-125/3 140 135 125
27
73
120 120
65
20
25
3.5
25
ISS2-125/4 170 135 125
27
73
150 150
65
20
25
3.5
25
ISS2-160/3 140 135 125
27
73
120 120
65
20
25
3.5
25
ISS2-160/4 170 135 125
27
73
150 150
65
20
25
3.5
25
ISS2-250/3 180 170 138
35
86
160 160
90
25
30
3.5
25
ISS2-250/4 230 170 138
35
86
210 210
90
25
30
3.5
25
ISS2-400/3 230 240 165
50
110 210 210 140
32
40
5
37
ISS2-400/4 295 240 165
50
110 275 275 140
32
40
5
37
ISS2-630/3 230 260 165
50
110 210 210 140
40
50
6
37
ISS2-630/4 295 260 165
50
110 275 275 140
40
50
6
37
ISS2-800/3 378 312 240
50
140 353 353 175
60
56
8
48
ISS2-800/4 498 312 240
50
140 473 473 175
60
56
8
48
Rated current
In(A)
Maximum
breaking
capacity
Icu(A)
Tightening
moment
(Nm)
Catalogue
number
three-pole
ISS2-125in
125
1250
6.5
41951
41961
1 / 12
ISS2-125out
125
1250
6.5
41952
41962
1 / 12
ISS2-160in
160
1250
6.5
41953
41963
1 / 12
ISS2-160out
160
1250
6.5
41954
41964
1 / 12
Type
Catalogue
number
four-pole
Box / carton
(pcs)
ISS2-250in
250
2000
10
41955
41965
1/6
ISS2-250out
250
2000
10
41956
41966
1/6
ISS2-400in
400
3200
14.5
41957
41967
1/2
ISS2-630in
630
4000
14.5
41958
41968
1/2
ISS2-800in
800
1000
27
41959
41969
1/2
Note: ISS2-xxx in – load circuit-breaker for mounting in the interior of a board
ISS2 -xxx out – load circuit-breaker with an extended lever for mounting on the front panel of the board
Circuit breakers
Manual switching to reserve series EQ 2M from 125 to 800А
26
www.elmarkgroup.eu
A2
Documentation corresponding
to the product:
Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-3 and IEC 60947-6
The series three- and four-pole load isolating switch EQ 2 M xxx are produced for mounting in main electrical boards for
disconnection of the circuits, manual switching between two power supplies or switching ON of generators because of the
fact they are not affected by the frequency variations. High mechanical strength and resistance to circulation. Simple and
secure management. There is a possibility for the products to be produced with an window for visible disconnection.
Functions:
- switching on and off of low voltage electrical circuits under load
- disconnection of the electrical circuit from one of the power supplies, while providing immediately switching to the other
- used as main switch
- resistant to high voltages, to short circuits in the protected circuit
- it has no protective function
Technical characteristics:
* Rated voltage: not higher than 660V; 50/60Hz
* Double connector: screw connection
* Connection: hard or flexible conductors
* Insulation voltage: ≥1000V
* Resistance to impulse voltage: 8000V
* Electrical endurance (number of cycles): ≥5 000
* Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): ≥10 000
* Protection ratio: IP>20
* Mounting method: to a surface by means of bolts
* Plastic resistant to UV rays
* Ambient temperature: -20°÷40ºС
* Option for moving the handle on the front panel of the board
* Small size
* Indication which of the two supplies is operating
Dimensions
Type
A
B
С
ЕQ2M-160/3 270 135 212
Y
J
J1
K
R
S
T
Y
Y1
89 150 120
65
95
20
25
3.5
55
25
EQ2M-160/4 300 135 212 104 150 150
65
95
20
25
3.5
55
25
ЕQ2M-250/3 307 170 260 110 180 160
65 115
25
30
3.5
70
25
EQ2M-250/4 357 170 260 135 180 210
65 115
25
30
3.5
70
25
ЕQ2M-400/3 372 240 297 150 236 210
77 180
32
40
5
83
37
EQ2M-400/4 432 240 297 180 236 275
77 180
32
40
5
83
37
ЕQ2M-630/3 372 240 297 150 236 210
77 180
40
50
6
83
37
EQ2M-630/4 432 240 297 180 236 275
77 180
40
50
6
83
37
ЕQ2M-800/3 372 240 297 150 236 210
77 180
60
56
8
83
48
EQ2M-800/4 432 240 297 180 236 275
77 180
60
56
8
83
48
Maximum
breaking
capacity
Icu(A)
Tightening
moment
(Nm)
Catalogue
number
three-pole
ЕQ2M-160
160
1250
6.5
44641
44641P
1/4
ЕQ2M-250
250
2000
10
44642
44642P
1/2
ЕQ2M-400
400
3200
14.5
44643
44643P
1/2
ЕQ2M-630
630
4000
14.5
44644
44644P
1/2
ЕQ2M-800
800
1000
27
44645
44645P
1/2
T
C
E
Rated current
In(A)
Type
Y1
E
D
Catalogue
number
four-pole
Box / carton
(pcs)
Circuit breakers
High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DS1 series from 40 to 800A
27
www.elmarkgroup.eu
A3
13
14
13
15
16
COVER
TERMINAL PLASTIC PLATE
TERMINALS
CONTACTS WITH BIMETAL PLATES
NON-FLAMABLE BASE
THERMAL SYSTEM WITH MOVABLE CONTACTS
STATIC CONTACTS
UNDER VOLTAGE RELEASE - UVR (accessory)
PART FROM THE COVER
13
REMOTE CONTROL – electrical (accessory)
SCREWS FOR TERMINALS
14
AUXILIARY CONTACT (accessory)
ARC CHAMBERS
15
SHUNT RELEASE (accessory)
ELEMENT FOR ADJUSTMENT
16
REMOTE CONTROL – manual (accessory)
Circuit breakers
High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DS1 series from 40 to 800A
28
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Functions:
- switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits
- breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful consumers
- can be used as a main breaker in housing or industrial distributing installations
- endures high currents of short circuit in the protected circuit
- remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics
- control: manual
- possibility for auxiliary devices mounting for automation
Technical data:
* Rated operating voltage: 690V; 50/60Hz
* Isolating voltage: 2000V
* Surge voltage wear resistance: ≥8000V
* Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal for the breakers up to 160A and
a bolt connection for the breakers from 250A to 1600A
* Connecting:
- rigid or flexible conductors
- front conductors joining
- possibility for mounting to lengthening terminal
* Plastic elements
- not keeping the burning material nylon PA66
- box permitivity strength: >16MV/m
* Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960°C
* Static contacts – alloy: pure copper T2Y2
- contact head: silver graphite CAg(5)
- thickness: depends on the current
* Tightening moment: 1.33Nm
* Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10000
* Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥20000
* IP code: IP>20
* Mounting:
- joining with bolts
- mounting position: vertical
* Plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable
* Test button
* Ambient temperature: -20°÷55ºС
Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-2
A3
H
H1
e
L1
L2
L
B
d
A
W1
W
Overall dimensions (mm)
Type
W
L
H
DS1-125
76.2
120
70
DS1-160
90
120
70
DS1-250
105
170
104
DS1-400
140
257
DS1-630
210
DS1-800
DS1-1600
Installation dimensions (mm)
A
B
W1
90
25
100
50
93
30
100
60
238
143.5
35
139
70
210
6
104
316
144
44
214
87.5
285
6
11
275
104
310
172
70
230
140
280
6
11
210
275
104
347
172
70
230
140
307
6
16
210
410
140
410
210
70
300
140
350
10
12
Type
L1
Rated current
In (A)
H1
Operating
breaking
capacity
(kA) Ics
400V
690V
Maximum
breaking
capacity (кА)Icu
L2
Жd
Жe
4
5
Thermal
current
adjustment (A)
Section of the
conductor
(mm2)
Catalogue
number
8.5
Package / Box
(pcs)
DS1-125
40
16
25
10
fixed
16
44040
1 / 20
DS1-125
50
16
25
10
fixed
16
44050
1 / 20
DS1-125
63
16
25
10
fixed
25
44063
1 / 20
DS1-125
80
16
25
10
fixed
25
44080
1 / 20
DS1-125
100
16
25
10
fixed
35
44090
1 / 20
DS1-125
125
16
25
10
fixed
50
44125
1 / 20
Circuit breakers
High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DS1 series from 40 to 800A
Type
Rated current
In (A)
Operating
breaking
capacity
(kA) Ics
DS1 - 160
DS1 - 160
DS1 - 160
DS1 - 160
DS1 - 160
63
80
100
125
160
22
22
22
22
22
29
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Maximum
breaking
capacity (кА)Icu
400V
690V
35
35
35
35
35
15
15
15
15
15
Thermal
current
adjustment (A)
Section of the
conductor
(mm2)
Catalogue
number
Package / Box
(pcs)
44 - 63
56 - 80
70 - 100
88 - 125
112 - 160
25
25
50
50
70
44163
44164
44165
44166
44160
1 / 16
1 / 16
1 / 16
1 / 16
1 / 16
A3
Type
Rated current
In (A)
Operating
breaking
capacity
(kA) Ics
DS1 - 250
DS1 - 250
200
250
35
35
Type
Rated current
In (A)
Operating
breaking
capacity
(kA) Ics
DS 1 - 400
DS 1 - 400
315
400
50
50
Type
Rated current
In (A)
Operating
breaking
capacity
(kA) Ics
DS1 - 630
DS1 - 630
500
630
65
65
Type
Rated current
In (A)
Operating
breaking
capacity
(kA) Ics
DS1 - 800
800
75
Maximum
breaking
capacity (кА)Icu
400V
690V
50
50
15
15
Maximum
breaking
capacity (кА)Icu
400V
690V
65
65
25
25
Maximum
breaking
capacity (кА)Icu
400V
690V
75
75
25
25
Maximum
breaking
capacity (кА)Icu
400V
690V
85
30
Thermal
current
adjustment (A)
Section of the
conductor
(mm2)
Catalogue
number
Package / Box
(pcs)
140 - 200
175 - 250
120
120
44200
44250
1/6
1/6
Thermal
current
adjustment (A)
Section of the
conductor
(mm2)
Catalogue
number
Package / Box
(pcs)
fixed
fixed
240
240
44315
44401
1/3
1/3
Thermal
current
adjustment (A)
Section of the
conductor
(mm2)
Catalogue
number
Package / Box
(pcs)
fixed
fixed
2 x 185
2 x 185
44500
44630
1/2
1/2
Thermal
current
adjustment (A)
Section of the
conductor
(mm2)
Catalogue
number
Package / Box
(pcs)
fixed
2 x 240
44800
1/2
Circuit breakers
High capacity circuit breakers DS1 to 1600A – electronic type (MCCB)
30
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-2
A3
Functions:
- switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits
- breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful consumers
- can be used as a main breaker in housing or industrial distributing installations
- endures high currents of short circuit in the protected circuit
- remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics
- control: manual
- possibilities for electrical module parameters adjustment through direct modules (combination of keys) thus providing
accurate protection from overload and short circuit
- simultaneous protection of the three phases
- possibility for auxiliary devices mounting for automation
- contactor for TT test 15V DC
Technical data:
* Rated operating voltage: 690V; 50/60Hz
* Isolating voltage: 2000V
* Surge voltage wear resistance: ≥8000V
* Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal
* Connecting:
- rigid or flexible conductors
- front conductors joining
- possibility for mounting to lengthening terminal
* Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10000
* Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥20000
* IP code: IP>20
* Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960°C
* Mounting:
- joining with bolts
- mounting position: vertical
* Plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable
* Test button
* Ambient temperature: -20°÷55ºС
L
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
0.95
1
A
B
C
D
3S
6S
12S
18S
I
OFF
1.5
2
4
6
8
10
l1
xln
TEST
15V dc
In=~630A
l3
L
t
o+
o-
Xl1
t1
I
t1
l=6l1
I1
I
I3
Protecting functions:
Function L – step adjustment for protection against overload. Adjustment of the operating current I1=0.4+1xIn with discreet
coefficients as the value can be 0.4; 0.5; 0.6; 0.7; 0.8; 0.9; 0.95 and 1
Time delay adjustment t1 of the protection against overload – step adjustment with four values A-3s; B-6s; C-12s; D-18s
when current is I=6I1. The diagram of the current curves is presented on fig.1
Adjustment of the transitory protection current against short circuit I3=X x I1 where X can take discreet value OFF; 1.5; 2;
4; 6; 8; 10
Type
DS1-400Е
DS1-630Е
DS1-800Е
DS1-1250Е
DS1-1250Е
DS1-1600Е
Rated current
In (A)
400
630
800
1000
1250
1600
Operating
breaking
capacity
(kA) Ics
400V
690V
50
65
65
75
75
75
65
75
75
85
85
85
25
25
30
50
50
50
Maximum
breaking
capacity (кА)Icu
Fig.1
Thermal
current
adjustment (A)
Section of the
conductor
(mm2)
Catalogue
number
160 - 400
252 - 630
320 - 800
400 - 1000
500 - 1250
640 - 1600
240
2x185
2x240
2x240
2x240
2x240
44940
44963
44980
44999
44925
44960
Package / Box
(pcs)
1/3
1/2
1/2
1/1
1/1
1/1
Circuit breakers
Auxiliary devices for high capacity circuit breakers DS1 type (MCCB)
31
www.elmarkgroup.eu
According to the way of mounting the auxiliary devices can be divided into two groups:
- internal devices – accessories for whose mounting it is necessary to dismount the cover of the breakers and fix
them in specially designed jacks
- external devices – they are mounted right on the top cover of the breaker
INTERNAL DEVICES
Auxiliary contact (OF)
The device changes its condition conformably to the breaker's condition; it has a NO and a NC contactor.
Technical data:
- for breakers up to 160A operating current through the auxiliary contact: 3A
- for breakers from 250 to 800A operating current through the auxiliary contact: 6A
- available joining conductors
- labeling of the cables
Mounting:
Mounted in a special jack after cover dismounting
Note:
The breakers are offered with mounted accessory
Documentation corresponding Connecting:
to the product:
Connected with the operative system through the provided conductors
Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-2
Type of the
Catalogue
Type of the
Catalogue
Type of the
A3
breaker
number
breaker
number
breaker
Catalogue
number
DS1 125/40+OF
DS1 125/50+OF
DS1 125/63+OF
DS1 125/80+OF
DS1 125/100+OF
DS1 125/125+OF
44301
44302
44303
44304
44305
44306
DS1 160/160+OF
DS1 250/200+OF
DS1 250/250+OF
DS1 400/400+OF
DS1 630/500+OF
DS1 630/630+OF
44307
44308
44309
44310
44311
44312
DS1 800/800+OF
DS1 1600/1000+OF
DS1 1600/1250+OF
DS1 1600/1600+OF
44313
44314
44451
44316
Shunt release (MX)
The device is used for remote control of breakers as at voltage signal it starts operating and switches off the breaker to
which it is mounted
Technical data:
- rated operating voltage: 230/400V 50/60Hz
- electromagnetic coil 100VA for breakers up to 400A
- electromagnetic coil 150VA for breakers 630-800A
- available joining conductors
Mounting:
Mounted in a special jack after cover dismounting
Note:
The breakers are offered with mounted accessory
Connecting :
Connected with the operative system through the provided conductors
Type of the
breaker
Operating
voltage (V))
Catalogue
number
DS1 125/40+MX
DS1 125/40+MX
DS1 125/40+MX+OF
DS1 125/40+MX+OF
DS1 125/50+MX
DS1 125/50+MX
DS1 125/50+MX+OF
DS1 125/50+MX+OF
DS1 125/63+MX
DS1 125/63+MX
DS1 125/63+MX+OF
DS1 125/63+MX+OF
DS1 125/80+MX
DS1 125/80+MX
DS1 125/80+MX+OF
DS1 125/80+MX+OF
DS1 125/100+MX
DS1 125/100+MX
DS1 125/100+MX+OF
DS1 125/100+MX+OF
DS1 125/125+MX
DS1 125/125+MX
DS1 125/125+MX+OF
DS1 125/125+MX+OF
DS1 160/100+MX
DS1 160/100+MX
DS1 160/100+MX+OF
DS1 160/100+MX+OF
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
44317
44318
44319
44320
44321
44322
44323
44324
44326
44327
44328
44330
44331
44332
44334
44335
44336
44337
44338
44339
44340
44341
44342
44343
44463
44464
44465
44466
Type of the
breaker
DS1 160/160+MX
DS1 160/160+MX
DS1 160/160+MX+OF
DS1 160/160+MX+OF
DS1 250/200+MX
DS1 250/200+MX
DS1 250/200+MX+OF
DS1 250/200+MX+OF
DS1 250/250+MX
DS1 250/250+MX
DS1 250/250+MX+OF
DS1 250/250+MX+OF
DS1 400/315+MX
DS1 400/315+MX
DS1 400/315+MX+OF
DS1 400/315+MX+OF
DS1 400/400+MX
DS1 400/400+MX
DS1 400/400+MX+OF
DS1 400/400+MX+OF
DS1 630/500+MX
DS1 630/500+MX
DS1 630/500+MX+OF
DS1 630/500+MX+OF
DS1 630/630+MX
DS1 630/630+MX
DS1 630/630+MX+OF
DS1 630/630+MX+OF
Operating
voltage (V)
Catalogue
number
Type of the
breaker
Operating
voltage (V)
Catalogue
number
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
44333
44344
44345
44346
44347
44348
44349
44350
44351
44352
44353
44354
44467
44468
44469
44470
44355
44356
44357
44358
44359
44360
44361
44362
44363
44364
44365
44366
DS1 800/800+MX
DS1 800/800+MX
DS1 800/800+MX+OF
DS1 800/800+MX+OF
DS1 1250/1000+MX
DS1 1250/1000+MX
DS1 1250/1000+MX+OF
DS1 1250/1000+MX+OF
DS1 1250/1250+MX
DS1 1250/1250+MX
DS1 1250/1250+MX+OF
DS1 1250/1250+MX+OF
DS1 1600/1600+MX
DS1 1600/1600+MX
DS1 1600/1600+MX+OF
DS1 1600/1600+MX+OF
DS1 400/3300+MX
DS1 400/3300+MX
DS1 400/3300+MX+OF
DS1 400/3300+MX+OF
DS1 630/3300+MX
DS1 630/3300+MX
DS1 630/3300+MX+OF
DS1 630/3300+MX+OF
DS1 800/3300+MX
DS1 800/3300+MX
DS1 800/3300+MX+OF
DS1 800/3300+MX+OF
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
44367
44368
44369
44370
44371
44372
44373
44374
44375
44376
44377
44378
44379
44380
44381
44382
44451
44452
44453
44454
44455
44456
44457
44458
44459
44460
44461
44462
Circuit breakers
Auxiliary devices for high capacity circuit breakers DS1 type (MCCB)
32
www.elmarkgroup.eu
A3 DS1 - 250-800
DS1 - 125-160
Under voltage release (MN)
The device switches off and/or does not allow the switching on of the breaker to which it is mounted at power breakdown
or voltage decrease under certain limits
Technical data:
- operating voltage: 230/400V 50Hz
- electromagnetic coil 6VA for breakers up to 400A
- electromagnetic coil 10VA for breakers 630-800A
- available joining conductors
- switches off at voltage decrease under 75% of the operating
Mounting:
Mounted in a special jack after cover dismounting
Note: The breakers are offered with mounted accessory
Connecting:
Connected with the operative system through the provided conductors
Type of the
breaker
Operating
voltage (V)
Catalogue
number
Type of the
breaker
Operating
voltage (V)
Catalogue
number
Ds1 125/40+MN
DS1 125/40+MN
DS1 125/40+MN+OF
DS1 125/40+MN+OF
DS1 125/50+MN
DS1 125/50+MN
DS1 125/50+MN+OF
DS1 125/50+MN+OF
DS1 125/63+MN
DS1 125/63+MN
DS1 125/63+MN+OF
DS1 125/63+MN+OF
DS1 125/80+MN
DS1 125/80+MN
DS1 125/80+MN+OF
DS1 125/80+MN+OF
DS1 125/100+MN
DS1 125/100+MN
DS1 125/100+MN+OF
DS1 125/100+MN+OF
DS1 125/125+MN
DS1 125/125+MN
DS1 125/125+MN+OF
DS1 125/125+MN+OF
DS1 160/100+MN
DS1 160/100+MN
DS1 160/100+MN+OF
DS1 160/100+MN+OF
DS1 160/160+MN
DS1 160/160+MN
DS1 160/160+MN+OF
DS1 160/160+MN+OF
DS1 250/200+MN
DS1 250/200+MN
DS1 250/200+MN+OF
DS1 250/200+MN+OF
DS1 250/250+MN
DS1 250/250+MN
DS1 250/250+MN+OF
DS1 250/250+MN+OF
DS1 400/315+MN
DS1 400/315+MN
DS1 400/315+MN+OF
DS1 400/315+MN+OF
DS1 400/400+MN
DS1 400/400+MN
DS1 400/400+MN+OF
DS1 400/400+MN+OF
DS1 630/500+MN
DS1 630/500+MN
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
44383
44384
44385
44386
44387
44388
44389
44390
44391
44392
44393
44394
44395
44396
44397
44398
44399
44402
44405
44406
44407
44408
44409
44410
44475
44476
44477
44478
44411
44412
44413
44414
44415
44416
44417
44418
44419
44420
44421
44422
44479
44480
44481
44482
44423
44424
44425
44426
44427
44428
DS1 630/500+MN+OF
DS1 630/500+MN+OF
DS1 630/630+MN
DS1 630/630+MN
DS1 630/630+MN+OF
DS1 630/630+MN+OF
DS1 800/800+MN
DS1 800/800+MN
DS1 800/800+MN+OF
DS1 800/800+MN+OF
DS1 1250/1000+MN
DS1 1250/1000+MN
DS1 1250/1000+MN+OF
DS1 1250/1000+MN+OF
DS1 1250/1250+MN
DS1 1250/1250+MN
DS1 1250/1250+MN+OF
DS1 1250/1250+MN+OF
DS1 1600/1600+MN
DS1 1600/1600+MN
DS1 1600/1600+MN+OF
DS1 1600/1600+MN+OF
DS1 400/3300+MN
DS1 400/3300+MN
DS1 400/3300+MN+OF
DS1 400/3300+MN+OF
DS1 630/3300+MN
DS1 630/3300+MN
DS1 630/3300+MN+OF
DS1 630/3300+MN+OF
DS1 800/3300+MN
DS1 800/3300+MN
DS1 800/3300+MN+OF
DS1 800/3300+MN+OF
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
44429
44430
44431
44432
44433
44434
44435
44436
44437
44438
44439
44440
44441
44442
44443
44444
44445
44446
44447
44448
44449
44450
44483
44484
44485
44486
44487
44488
44489
44490
44491
44492
44493
44494
Circuit breakers
Auxiliary devices for high capacity circuit breakers DS1 type (MCCB)
33
www.elmarkgroup.eu
EXTERNAL DEVICES
Remote control (manual)
Description:
The device switches off/on the breaker to which manual operative rotary mechanism is mounted
- two operating positions of the executive mechanism fixed at 90°C
Mounting:
The base is mounted with bolts right on the cover (scheme 1 mounting), and the handle is mounted at the door of the
distribution box, using an extension axis it is joined to the base
Table with the dimensions for manual remote control
Type of the
breaker
HDC DS 1
HDC DS 1
HDC DS 1
HDC DS 1
HDC DS 1
HDC DS 1
scheme 1
DS1 - 125-160
DS1 - 250-1600
scheme 2
125A
160A
250A
400A
630A
800A
Dimensions (mm)
A
B
C
Dmin
Dmax
25
30
35
45
70
70
50
50
70
107
119
119
50
50
70
107
119
119
65
65
80
85
110
110
115
115
130
105
110
110
Type of the
breaker
Type
Catalogue
number
Package
(pcs)
DS1 125A
DS1 160A
DS1 250A
DS1 400A
DS1 630A
DS1 800A
ELMARK HDC
ELMARK HDC
ELMARK HDC
ELMARK HDC
ELMARK HDC
ELMARK HDC
44967
44968
44969
44970
44971
44972
1
1
1
1
1
1
Device for remote control (electrical)
Description:
The device switches off/on the breaker to which it is mounted, at electrical signal it allows control from a great distance
Technical data:
- operating voltage of the executive mechanism: 230/400V 50/60Hz
- two operating positions of the executive mechanism fixed at 90°C
- two types of executive mechanism:
* magnetic operation for breakers DS1 up to 160A
* motor operation for breakers DS1 from 250 to 800A
Mounting:
The base is mounted with bolts right on the cover (scheme 1 and 2), and buttons on/off are fixed at the door of the
distribution box and at the remote control device
Type of the
breaker
Operating
voltage
Type
Catalogue
number
Package
(pcs)
DS1 125
DS1 160
DS1 250
DS1 400
DS1 630
DS1 800
DS1 125
DS1 160
DS1 250
DS1 400
DS1 630
DS1 800
DS1 1600
DS1 1600
400V
400V
400V
400V
400V
400V
230V
230V
230V
230V
230V
230V
230V
400V
ELMARK ADC
ELMARK ADC
ELMARK ADC
ELMARK ADC
ELMARK ADC
ELMARK ADC
ELMARK ADC
ELMARK ADC
ELMARK ADC
ELMARK ADC
ELMARK ADC
ELMARK ADC
ELMARK ADC
ELMARK ADC
44907
44908
44909
44910
44911
44911
44912
44913
44914
44915
44916
44916
44924
44926
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Table with the dimensions for remote control
Type of the
breaker
scheme 3
АDC DS 1 125
ADC DS 1 160
ADC DS 1 250
ADC DS 1 400
ADC DS 1 630
ADC DS 1 800
Dimensions (mm)
A
А1
B1
B2
H
103.5
103.5
139
226
226
226
110
110
-
30
35
132
132
132
132
90
90
-
92
92
105
132
132
132
A3
Circuit breakers
High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DS2 series 63…1250A
34
www.elmarkgroup.eu
d
Overall dimensions (mm)
Type of the breaker
W
H
H1
142
70
77
91
155
61
73
106
165
80
90
L
DS2-63
W
A4
H
H1
L
76
DS2-100
DS2-225
DS2-400
148
256
95
110
DS2-500
180
270
103
115
DS2-630
180
270
103
115
DS2-800
210
115
95
275
Documentation corresponding
to the product:
Standard EN 60947-1
Functions:
EN 60947-2
- no auxiliaries available for this type of MCCB
- switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits
.
- breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful consumers
- can be used as a main breaker in housing or industrial distributing installations
- endures high currents of short circuit in the protected circuit
- remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics
- control: manual
Technical data:
* Rated operating voltage: 400V; 50/60Hz
* Isolating voltage: 690V
* Surge voltage wear resistance: ≥6000V
* Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal
* Connecting:
- rigid or flexible conductors
- front conductors joining
- possibility for mounting to lengthening terminal
* Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥6000
* Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10000
* IP code: IP>20
* Mounting:
- joining with bolts
- mounting position: vertical
* Plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable
* Test button
* Ambient temperature: -20°÷55ºС
DS2-1250
Type
DS2 - 63
210
Rated current
In (A)
63
Max.
breaking
capacity (kA) Icu
18
200
137
330(460)
Operating
breaking
capacity (кА)Ics
Operating
breaking
capacity (mm2)
Protection from
overload
Catalogue
number
12
16
fixed
44006
Package / Box
(pcs)
1 / 12
Type
Rated current
In (A)
Max.
breaking
capacity (kA) Icu
Operating
breaking
capacity (кА)Ics
Operating
breaking
capacity (mm2)
Protection from
overload
Catalogue
number
Package / Box
(pcs)
DS2 - 100
100
22
15
35
fixed
44010
1 /12
Circuit breakers
High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DS2 series 63…1250A
Type
DS2 - 225
35
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Rated current
In (A)
Max.
breaking
capacity (kA) Icu
Operating
breaking
capacity (кА)Ics
Operating
breaking
capacity (mm2)
Protection from
overload
Catalogue
number
Package / Box
(pcs)
225
35
25
70
fixed
44022
1 / 12
A4
Type
DS2 - 400
Type
DS2 - 630
DS2 - 630
Type
DS2 - 800
Type
DS2 - 1250
DS2 - 1250
Rated current
In (A)
400
Rated current
In (A)
500
630
Rated current
In (A)
800
Rated current
In (A)
1000
1250
Max.
breaking
capacity (kA) Icu
Operating
breaking
capacity (кА)Ics
42
35
Max.
breaking
capacity (kA) Icu
Operating
breaking
capacity (кА)Ics
50
50
Max.
breaking
capacity (kA) Icu
65
Max.
breaking
capacity (kA) Icu
85
85
42
42
Operating
breaking
capacity (кА)Ics
48
Operating
breaking
capacity (кА)Ics
65
65
Operating
breaking
capacity (mm2)
180
Operating
breaking
capacity (mm2)
240
240
Operating
breaking
capacity (mm2)
240
Operating
breaking
capacity (mm2)
240
240
Protection from
overload
Catalogue
number
Package / Box
(pcs)
fixed
44004
1 / 12
Protection from
overload
Catalogue
number
Package / Box
(pcs)
fixed
fixed
44005
44036
1/2
1/2
Protection from
overload
Catalogue
number
Package / Box
(pcs)
fixed
44008
1/1
Protection from
overload
Catalogue
number
Package / Box
(pcs)
fixed
fixed
44000
44502
1/1
1/1
Circuit breakers
36
High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DW1 series
www.elmarkgroup.eu
A5
Standard EN 60947-1; EN 60947-2; IEC 947-2
Center of the
installation
opening
Center of the
installation
opening
Side special level , wiring terminal
The DW1 series is an intelligent type circuit breaker used to control and protect low
voltage electrical distribution network. Possibility to set the parameters of the circuit
protection, built in under voltage release, remote control, earth protection and load
monitoring.
Functions:
- switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits
- breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful consumers
- used as a main breaker in housing or industrial distributing installations
- endures high currents of short circuit in the protected circuit
- remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics
- motor control
- mounted auxiliary devices for automation - under voltage release, earth
protection, intelligent controlling block with a possibility for a choice of the protected
function
Technical data:
* Rated operating voltage: 690V; 50/60Hz
* Isolating voltage: 2000V
* Surge voltage wear resistance: ≥8000V
* Joining terminal: bolt connection with 4 bolts to the power supply rail
* Connecting:
- copper rails
- busway connection – at the back
* Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥500
* Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥9000
* IP code: IP54
* Mounting:
- clamping with bolts
- mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum 5°
* Plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable
* Test button
* Ambient temperature: -10°C + 45°C
* Installation altitude: up to 2000m
Basic protective functions:
* Overload protection with long time delay
* Short circuit protection with short time delay, time inversion limit
* Short circuit protection with short time delay, time fixed limit
* Instantaneous short circuit protection
* Earth protection function
* Full stability function
* “Overload alarm” function
* Test function
* Auto diagnostics function
A commutation type of breakers with RS 485 connection for duplex transmission of all
function parameters, adjustment and data can also be produced at client's order and
delivery terms agreement.
Starndart
level
Installation openings
Center of the
installation
opening
Instalation
base
Outside dimensions
A
H
W
B
L
L1
H1
H2
H3
W1/W2
L5
L6
L7
W3-W5
Ø
DW1 2000A
DW1 3200A
340
402
362
150
373
290
52
112
20
95
17
40
82
60
12
352
432
435
175
507
448
92
112
30
115
17
40
82
100
12
Circuit breakers
37
High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DW1 series
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Connecting scheme
Main
circuit
Emergency
breaking
Intelligent controller
7
SB1
9
25
Electrical
closing
J21
SB2
Closed
Fault
3 5
Electrical
breaking
27
Break
Accumulated
energy
SB3
29
Auxiliary switches
31 33 35
36 38 39 41 42 44 45 47 XT
A5
Q
3(or4)
6(or8)
F
X
M
0
0
Main loop
power
supply
SA
Control
power supply
DF
Process
unit
(+)
Operating
power supply
(-)
1 2
4
6
8
26
28
30
32
34
37
40
43
46
AC380V/220V
DC power supply module
U1(+)
U2(-)
DC220V¡ 110V
Тип
Номинален ток
In (A)
Номинално
напрежение
Un (V)
Изключвателна
възможност (кА)
Електрическа
износоустойчивост
(брой цикли)
Механична
износоустойчивост
(брой цикли)
Каталожен
номер
Ед.опаковка /
кашон
(бр.)
DW1 - 2000
2000
690
80
500
9500
44209
1/1
DW1 - 3200
2500
3200
690
690
100
100
500
500
9500
9500
44255
44329
1/1
1/1
Circuit breakers
Dual power change-over switch EQ1 series (ATS)
38
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-2; EN 60947-6-1
A6
The system for dual power change-over switch EQ1 is designed to provide continuous power supply and two electrical
sources automatic switch in case of failure or deviation from the set parameters.
The system for dual power change-over switch consists of two high capacity circuit breakers mounted on a metal frame
connected with common operating mechanism and controlled by a command device that controls the system parameters'
correspondence.
Functions:
* Switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits at main power supply discrepancy
* Switching to dual power change-over at power supply phase lack
* Breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful consumers
* Used as a main breaker in housing or industrial distributing installations supplied with a generator or a second power
supply source (hospitals, post offices, military sites, control rooms)
* Remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics
* Control: motor
* Controls the following circuit parameters:
- presence of the three phases
- the phase voltage to be in the set limits
- overload
- short circuit at the outlet
Technical data:
* Rated operating voltage: 690V; 50/60Hz
* Surge voltage wear resistance: ≥6000V
* Joining terminal: bolt connection with 4 bolts to the power supply rail
* Connecting:
- copper rails
- flexible or rigid conductors
* Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥60000
* Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥10000
* IP code: IP21
* Mounting:
- clamping with bolts
- mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum 5°
* Plastic material of the breakers of UV rays and non-flammable
* Ambient temperature: -10°C + 45°C
* Installation altitude: up to 2000m
Basic functions of the control device:
* Overload protection
* Instantaneous short circuit protection
* Under phase protection
* Undervoltage protection
* Possibility for setting the change-over time between the two sources – min 3s
* Possibility for automatic switch-over to the main power supply source after restoring its parameters
The system for dual power change-over switch is offered in two types:
- with display (control device) mounted on the mounting plate (integrated type)
- with separated control display
Dimensions for ABP Eq1
Dimensions (mm)
Type of
the breaker
main
power
supply
inner type
EQ1 - 100
EQ1 - 225
EQ1 - 400
EQ1 - 630
moved type
EQ1 - 100
EQ1 - 225
EQ1 - 400
EQ1 - 630
alternative
power
supply
А
В
С
D
H
480
480
620
660
240
240
300
300
450
450
590
630
210
210
270
270
140
140
235
240
420
420
570
610
230
230
300
300
390
390
540
580
200
200
270
270
145
145
235
240
Section of the
Electrical
power supply
wear resistance
2
conductor (mm ) (number of cycles)
Type
Rated current
In (A)
Max.
breaking
capacity (kA) Icu
EQ1 - 100
EQ1 - 225
EQ1 - 400
EQ1 - 630
100
225
400
630
22
35
42
50
15
25
35
42
35
70
180
240
6000
6000
6000
6000
44100
44225
44043
44633
1/1
1/1
1/1
1/1
EQ1 - 100*
EQ1 - 225*
EQ1 - 400*
EQ1 - 630*
100
225
400
630
22
35
42
50
15
25
35
42
35
70
180
240
6000
6000
6000
6000
44101
44226
44404
44634
1/1
1/1
1/1
1/1
Operating
breaking
capacity (кА) Ics
Note: *Dual power change-over switch with separated control display
Catalogue
number
Package / Box
(pcs)
Indirect protection devices
Residual current devices JЕL1/2 SIGMA/OMEGA design
39
www.elmarkgroup.eu
COVER
TERMINALS
NON-FLAMABLE BASE
CONTACT
TEST BUTTON
SECONDARY WINDING OF TT
PRIMARY WINDING
SUMMING CURRENT TRANSFORMER (TT) WITH TOROID
OMEGA design
SIGMA design
ELECTROMAGNETIC RELAY
BREAKING (RELEASE) UNIT
B1
Indirect protection devices
Residual current devices JЕL1/JEL2 (RCD)
40
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Standard EN 61008-1
EN 61008-2; EN 60947-1
B1
N
1
1
3
5
T
N
T
N
2
2
4
35
N
6
70
72
45
35
81
50
Fig.1
The residual current device works with no extra power supply to the operating mechanism. It compares the magnitude of
the currents through the neutral and phase conductors. The conductors are coiled on toroid and together with the
secondary winding form a measurement transformer. The power conductors are coiled in such a way that the magnetic
fields generated at electrical current flow through them are mutually neutralized. At failure in the insulation of some of the
conductors or at presence of a person under voltage, the system is misbalanced and the magnetic fields can not be
neutralized. This residual field generates in the secondary current winding, called current leakage. The device breaks
when the value of this current exceeds the limit value of the residual current breaker.
Functions:
- switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at insulation damage of the conductors to the consumers
- switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at presence of a person under voltage
- used to protect not only particular consumers/circuits, but also the whole panel
remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics
- control: manual switching on and automatic switching off at exit failure
Technical data:
* Rated operating voltage: 230/400V; 50/60 Hz
* Rated current: according to the table
* Responsiveness: 30; 100; 300; 500mA
* Time delay until break: <0.1s at I ∆ n and <0.04s at 2I ∆ n
* Surge voltage wear resistance: ≥2000V
* Short circuit current wear resistance: 6000A
* Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal made of 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235A
* Type of the plastic:
- material: self-extinguishing nylon PA66
- permitivity strength: >18MV/m
* Contact head: silver graphite CAg(5)
* Static contact: pure copper T2Y2 type
* Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥5000
* Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10000
* IP code: IP>20
* Indication for operating (switched on) position
* Plastic material of the breakers of UV rays and non-flammable
* Ambient temperature: -10°C + 45°C
* Installation altitude: up to 2000m
Connecting:
- power supply busbar (only for bipolar)
- flexible or rigid conductors with corresponding section
Mounting:
- on DIN-rail
- mounting position: vertical
The residual current device is mounted in the distribution box, and after the device the neutral conductor and the earthing
conductor must not be connected together. In order to work accurately, the device must have three- or five-conductor grid
with separate protective conductor (PE) (e.g. earthing system TN-S or TT with three or five conductors). The corpus of the
consumer depending on the grid type must be connected either to the protective conductor or be earthed. (Fig.1)
Connecting scheme
consumer
JЕL1 2P
R
S
T
JЕL1 4P
consumer
PE
N
Indirect protection devices
Residual current devices JЕL1/JEL2 (RCD)
41
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Residual current devices JЕL1 - OMEGA design, 6kA
Number
of poles
Type
Catalogue number
Leakage current I D
n(mA)
Rated current
In (A)
Package / Box
( pcs)
30
100
300
500
2
JEL 1
10.0
40210
40212
40213
40214
1 / 60
2
JEL 1
16.0
40216
40217
40218
40219
1 / 60
2
JEL 1
20.0
40292
40293
40294
40295
1 / 60
2
JEL 1
25.0
40221
40222
40223
40224
1 / 60
2
JEL 1
32.0
40231
40232
40233
40234
1 / 60
2
JEL 1
40.0
40241
40242
40243
40244
1 / 60
2
JEL 1
63.0
40261
40262
40263
40264
1 / 60
2
JEL 1
80.0
40281
40282
40283
40284
1 / 60
2
JEL 1
100.0
40291
40296
40297
40298
1 / 60
Number
of poles
Type
Rated current
In (A)
30
100
300
500
4
JEL 1
10.0
40410
40412
40413
40414
1 / 30
4
JEL 1
16.0
40416
40417
40418
40419
1 / 30
4
JEL 1
20.0
40492
40493
40494
40495
1 / 30
4
JEL 1
25.0
40421
40422
40423
40424
1 / 30
4
JEL 1
32.0
40431
40432
40433
40434
1 / 30
4
JEL 1
40.0
40441
40442
40443
40444
1 / 30
4
JEL 1
63.0
40461
40462
40463
40464
1 / 30
4
JEL 1
80.0
40481
40482
40483
40484
1 / 30
4
JEL 1
100.0
40491
40496
40497
40498
1 / 30
Catalogue number
Leakage current I D
n(mA)
Package / Box
( pcs)
Residual current devices JЕL2 - SIGMA design, 6kA
Number
of poles
Type
Catalogue number
Leakage current I D
n(mA)
Rated current
In (A)
30
100
Package / Box
( pcs)
300
500
2
JEL 2
10.0
40210S
40212S
40213S
40214S
1 / 60
2
JEL 2
16.0
40216S
40217S
40218S
40219S
1 / 60
2
JEL 2
20.0
40292S
40293S
40294S
40295S
1 / 60
2
JEL 2
25.0
40221S
40222S
40223S
40224S
1 / 60
2
JEL 2
32.0
40231S
40232S
40233S
40234S
1 / 60
2
JEL 2
40.0
40241S
40242S
40243S
40244S
1 / 60
2
JEL 2
63.0
40261S
40262S
40263S
40264S
1 / 60
2
JEL 2
80.0
40281S
40282S
40283S
40284S
1 / 60
2
JEL 2
100.0
40291S
40296S
40297S
40298S
1 / 60
Number
of poles
Type
Rated current
In (A)
Catalogue number
Leakage current I D
n(mA)
30
100
Package / Box
( pcs)
300
500
4
JEL 2
10.0
40410S
40412S
40413S
40414S
1 / 30
4
JEL 2
16.0
40416S
40417S
40418S
40419S
1 / 30
4
JEL 2
20.0
40492S
40493S
40494S
40495S
1 / 30
4
JEL 2
25.0
40421S
40422S
40423S
40424S
1 / 30
4
JEL 2
32.0
40431S
40432S
40433S
40434S
1 / 30
4
JEL 2
40.0
40441S
40442S
40443S
40444S
1 / 30
4
JEL 2
63.0
40461S
40462S
40463S
40464S
1 / 30
4
JEL 2
80.0
40481S
40482S
40483S
40484S
1 / 30
4
JEL 2
100.0
40491S
40496S
40497S
40498S
1 / 30
B1
Indirect protection devices
Combined circuit breakers with residual current device JЕL5 (RCD)
42
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Standard EN60 898-1;
EN 61 008-1; EN 61008-2;
EN 60947-1
B2
Description of the operating system:
It is a combination of automatic circuit breaker and residual current electromagnetic device. It combines the properties of
the two elements. The circuit breaker reacts at short circuit or overload in the protected circuit, and the electromagnetic
residual current device - at failure in the conductors’ insulation. It compares the magnitude of the currents through the
neutral and phase conductors. The conductors are coiled on toroid and together with the secondary winding form a
measurement transformer. The power conductors are coiled in such a way that the magnetic fields generated at electrical
current flow through them are mutually neutralized. At failure in the insulation of some of the conductors or at presence of
a person under voltage, the system is misbalanced and the magnetic fields can not be neutralized. This residual magnetic
field generates in the secondary current winding, called current leakage. When the value of this current exceeds the limit
value of the residual current breaker the device breaks and the residual current device switches off from the power supply
grid. The device operates without any extra power supply to the electromagnetic residual current and is not influenced by
voltage varying or decreasing.
Functions:
- switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at short circuit or overload
- switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at insulation damage of the conductors to the consumers
- switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at presence of a person under voltage
- used to protect not only particular consumers/circuits, but also the whole panel
- remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics
- control: manual switching on and automatic switching off at failure in the insulation after the breaker
Technical data:
* Rated operating voltage: 230V 50 Hz
* Circuit breaker rated current: according to the table
* Residual current responsiveness: 30; 100; 300; 500mA
* Time delay until break:
- of the residual current device: <0.1s at I ∆ n and <0.04s at 2I ∆ n
- of the circuit breaker: <0.1s
* Circuit breaker breaking curve: C
* Surge voltage wear resistance:≥2000V
* Breaking capacity: 6000A
* Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal made of 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235A
* Type of the plastic:
- material: self-extinguishing nylon PA66
- dielectrical strength: >18MV/m
* Contact head: silver graphite CAg(5)
* Static contact: pure copper T2Y2 type
* Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥≥5000
* Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥≥10000
* IP code: IP>20
* Indication for operating (switched on) position
* Breakers plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable
* Ambient temperature: -10C
ْ + 45Cْ
* Installation altitude: up to 2000m
Connecting:
- flexible or rigid conductors with corresponding section
Mounting:
- on DIN-rail
- mounting position: vertical
The residual current device is mounted in the distribution box, and after the device the neutral conductor and the earthing
conductor must not be connected together. In order to work accurately, the device must have three- or five-conductor grid
with separate operating neutral conductor (N) and separate protecting conductor (PE) (e.g. earthing system TN-S or TT
with three or five conductors).
Combined electromagnetic residual current device and circuit breaker 1P 6kA
Type
designation
Number of
poles of
the residual
current
device/circuit
breaker
Breaking
capacity
(kA)
Sections of
the mounting
conductors
(mm2)
Rated current
(A)
JEL5
JEL5
JEL5
JEL5
JEL5
2
2
2
2
2
6
6
6
6
6
1.5
2.5
4.0
6.0
10.0
10
16
25
32
40
Catalogue number
Leakage
current
IΔ n (30mА)
40010
40016
40025
40032
40040
Leakage
Leakage
Leakage
current
current
current
IΔ n (100mА) IΔ n (300mА) IΔ n (500mА)
40011
40017
40021
40031
40041
40013
40018
40023
40033
40043
40015
40019
40026
40035
40045
Package
/ Box
(pcs)
7 / 140
7 / 140
7 / 140
7 / 140
7 / 140
Indirect protection devices
Combined circuit breaker with electronic residual current device
www.elmarkgroup.eu
3P
Description of the operating system:
It is a combination of automatic circuit breaker and residual current electromagnetic device. It combines part of the
properties of the two elements. The circuit breaker reacts at short circuit in the protected circuit, and the electromagnetic
residual current device - at failure in the conductors’ insulation. It compares the rate of the currents through the conductors
in an electronic comparator. The residual current device operates normally at voltage feed. The voltage is needed for the
comparator’s energizing – a semi-conductor element with constantly set leakage current rate. This rate is compared with
the actual rate. When the margin of the comparison is neutral, the residual current device does not operate, but at failure
in the protected circuit insulation when it exceeds the set margin it operates and switches off the protection.
For the normal operation of the residual current device, the power supplying circuit voltage must be over 170V and there
must be no time variation.
Functions:
- switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at short circuit or overload
B3
- switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at insulation damage of the conductors to the consumers
- switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at presence of a person under voltage
- used to protect not only particular consumers/circuits, but also the whole panel
- remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics
- control: manual switching on and automatic switching off at exit failure
Technical data:
* Rated operating voltage: 230/400V 50 Hz
* Circuit breaker rated current: according to the table
* Residual current responsiveness: 30; 100; 300; 500mA
* Time delay until break:
- of the residual current device: <0.1s at I ∆ n and <0.04s at 2I ∆ n
- of the circuit breaker: <0.1s
* Circuit breaker breaking curve: C
* Surge voltage wear resistance:≥2000V
* Breaking capacity: 4500A; 6000А
* Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal
* Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥≥500
* Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥≥2000
* IP code: IP>20
* Indication for operating (switched on) position
Connecting:
- power supply busbar (for two- or three polar)
- flexible or rigid conductors with corresponding section
Mounting:
- on DIN-rail
- mounting position: vertical
* Breakers plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable
* Ambient temperature: -10C
ْ + 45Cْ
3P+N
* Installation altitude: up to 2000m
88
95
115.5
95
Standard
EN60 898-1 EN 61 009-1
EN 61009-2 EN 60947-1
L
H
45
35
50
h
43
Geometrical dimensions
JEL3 JEL4
L(mm)
H(mm)
h(mm)
18
72
80
35
72
80
The residual current device is mounted in the distribution box, and after the device the neutral conductor and the earthing
conductor must not be connected together. In order to work accurately, the device must have separate conductors for
operational neutral conductor (N) and protective conductor (e.g. earthing system TN-S or TT with three or five conductors).
Combined electronic residual current device with circuit breaker 1P, 6кА
Type
designation
JEL 4 C10
JEL 4 C16
JEL 4 C20
JEL 4 C25
JEL 4 C32
JEL 4 C40
Number of
poles of
the residual
current
device/circuit
breaker
2
2
2
2
2
2
Breaking
capacity
(kA)
6
6
6
6
6
6
Sections of
the mounting
conductors
(mm2)
1.5
2.5
4.0
4.0
10.0
16.0
Rated
current
(A)
10
16
20
25
32
40
Leakage
current
IΔ n (30mА)
40211E
40215E
40225E
40240E
40265E
40274E
Cat. number
Package
/Box
Leakage
Leakage
Leakage
(pcs)
current
current
current
IΔ n (100mА) IΔ n (300mА) IΔ n (500mА)
40207E
40245E
40229E
40204E
40260E
40270E
40208E
40235E
40230E
40246E
40236E
40273E
40209E
40237E
40238E
40268E
40269E
40275E
5 / 100
5 / 100
5 / 100
5 / 100
5 / 100
5 / 100
Indirect protection devices
Combined circuit breaker with electronic residual current device
44
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Combined circuit breakers with electronic residual current device for Domestic Use Type JEL 3
Specially designed for domestic consumers. RCBO is based on DP1N and reacts to cable insulation leakages, current
overloads and output short circuits.
Technical Specifications:
Rated voltage: 230 V; 50 Hz
Rated Current: See the table below
Sensitivity: 30; 100 mA
Break time: <0.1s
Short circuit capacity: 4500A
Installation: direct DIN rail mounting
B3
Type
designation
JEL 3 C10
JEL 3 C16
JEL 3 C25
JEL 3 C32
Number of
poles of
the residual
current
device/circuit
breaker
Breaking
capacity
(kA)
2
2
2
2
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
Sections of
the mounting
conductors
(mm2)
1.5
2.5
4.0
10.0
Rated
current
(A)
10
16
25
32
Leakage
current
IΔ n (30mА)
40110E
40116E
40125E
40132E
Catalogue number
Leakage
Leakage
Leakage
current
current
current
IΔ n (100mА) IΔ n (300mА) IΔ n (500mА)
Package
/Box
(pcs)
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
12 / 240
40111E
40115E
40126E
40133E
Combined electronic residual current device 3P and circuit breakers 3P with breaking capacity of 4.5 kA.
Compares the leakage current between the phases.
Type
designation
JEL 6
JEL 6
JEL 6
JEL 6
JEL 6
C10
C16
C25
C40
C50
Number of
poles of
the residual
current
device/circuit
breaker
Breaking
capacity
(kA)
3
3
3
3
3
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
Sections of
the mounting
conductors
(mm2)
1.5
2.5
4.0
10.0
16.0
Rated
current
(A)
10
16
25
40
50
Leakage
current
IΔ n (30mА)
40310
40316
40325
40340
40363
Catalogue number
Leakage
Leakage
Leakage
current
current
current
IΔ n (100mА) IΔ n (300mА) IΔ n (500mА)
40311
40317
40321
40341
40361
40313
40318
40323
40343
40336
40314
40319
40324
40344
40365
Package
/Box
(pcs)
3 / 60
3 / 60
3 / 60
3 / 60
3 / 60
Combined electronic residual current device 3P+N and circuit breakers 4P with breaking capacity of 4.5 kA.
Compares the leakage current between the phases and earth or neutral.
Type
designation
JEL 6
JEL 6
JEL 6
JEL 6
JEL 6
C10
C16
C25
C40
C50
Number of
poles of
the residual
current
device/circuit
breaker
Breaking
capacity
(kA)
4
4
4
4
4
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
Sections of
the mounting
conductors
(mm2)
1.5
2.5
4.0
10.0
16.0
Rated
current
(A)
10
16
25
40
50
Leakage
current
IΔ n (30mА)
40411
40415
40425
40440
40465
Catalogue number
Leakage
Leakage
Leakage
current
current
current
IΔ n (100mА) IΔ n (300mА) IΔ n (500mА)
40407
40445
40420
40404
40401
40408
40439
40428
40447
40436
40409
40438
40429
40446
40469
Package
/Box
(pcs)
2 / 40
2 / 40
2 / 40
2 / 40
2 / 40
Indirect protection devices
Surge arresters SPD type
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard
EN61 643-1 EN 61 643-1
The breakers are in accordance
with the directives of EC “Low
voltage directives (LVD) no.
73/23 EEC” and
“Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directives (EMC)
no. 89/336 EEC”.
45
www.elmarkgroup.eu
The surge arrestor consists of a semi-conductor valve element that opens at certain conditions. At normal conditions of
the system, the surge arrestor has infinitely high resistance between the protected conductors and earthing circuit. At
voltage increase due to atmospheric nature or system failure, the valve element opens and leads the excessive voltage to
the grounded circuit.
After reversion of the normal voltage the valve element closes. The arrestor can endure high momentary overloading.
Functions:
- protection of heavy-loaded electrical circuits from overload
- used to protect not only particular consumers/circuits, but also the whole panel
- remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics
- control: automatic switching off at exit failure and recovery after eliminating the danger
Technical data:
* Rated operating voltage Uc: - the operating voltage of the surge arrester 275/440V; 50Hz
* Surge voltage Up: the voltage created in surge arrester terminals at rated discharge current running: according to the
tables
B4
* Rated discharge current In – the rated value of discharge current with a sinusoid 8/20µs, which can be repeatedly
led to the ground: according to the tables
* Full discharge current Imax – the peak value of the discharge current with a sinusoid 8/20µs, which the surge
arrester can bear once: according to the table
* Constant operating current: up to 800μA for 1P, 2P and 3P; up to 600μA for 1P + N, 3P + N
* Indication for damaged surge arrester
* Offered in types: 1P; 1P + N; 3P; 3P + N
Connecting:
* flexible or rigid conductors with corresponding section
Mounting:
* on DIN-rail
* mounting position: vertical
- * mounting in the distribution box on the front or right before the breaker according to the attached schemes
* Breakers plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable
* Ambient temperature: -10C
ْ + 45Cْ
* Installation altitude: up to 2000m
Three phase protection TN-C system
consumer
Monophase protection TT system
consumer
Three phase protection TN-S system
consumer
Three phase protection IT system
consumer
The surge arrester selection is made according to the overload risk level or atmosphere activity, named B, C or D
(from high to low risk level).
The company offers the following models of arresters:
Model SPD – Bxxxx – for systems with exceptionally high risk level. Mounted mainly in the beginning of the installation or
in the main panel.
Model SPD – Cxxxx – for systems with high or average risk level. Mounted in the beginning of the installation or before
the breaker.
Model SPD – Dxxxx – for systems with low risk level. Suitable for secondary protection of consumers in combination with
SPD – Bxxxx/SPD – Cxxxx
Indirect protection devices
46
Surge arresters SPD type
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Type of the arrester
Uc (V)
Up (kV)
Catalogue number
Package / Box
( pcs)
SPD-D5/1p
5
10
275
1.2
64101
17 / 170
SPD-C10/1p
10
20
275
1.2
64102
17 / 170
SPD-C20/1p
20
40
275
1.8
64103
17 / 170
SPD-B40/1p
40
60
275
2
64104
17 / 170
In (kA)
Imax (kA)
Uc (V)
Up (kV)
Catalogue number
Package / Box
( pcs)
Type of the arrester
SPD-D5/1pN
5
10
275
1.2
64201
8 / 80
SPD-C10/1pN
10
20
275
1.2
64202
8 / 80
SPD-C20/1pN
20
40
275
1.8
64203
8 / 80
SPD-B40/1pN
40
60
275
2
64204
8 / 80
Type of the arrester
In (kA)
Imax (kA)
Uc (V)
Up (kV)
Catalogue number
Package / Box
( pcs)
5 / 50
SPD-D5/3p
5
10
440
1.2
64301
SPD-C10/3p
10
20
440
1.2
64302
5 / 50
SPD-C20/3p
20
40
440
1.8
64303
5 / 50
SPD-B40/3p
40
60
440
2
64304
5 / 50
In (kA)
Imax (kA)
Uc (V)
Up (kV)
Catalogue number
Package / Box
( pcs)
Type of the arrester
Up
Imax (kA)
TNC
SPD-D5/3pN
5
10
440
1.2
64401
4 / 40
SPD-C10/3pN
10
20
440
1.2
64402
4 / 40
SPD-C20/3pN
20
40
440
1.8
64403
4 / 40
SPD-B40/3pN
40
60
440
2
64404
4 / 40
MAIN
DISTRIBUTION
PANEL
MACHINE
PANEL
THREE PHASE
CONSUMER
B4
In (kA)
L1
L2
L3
N+PE
3xC61N-C63
3xC61N-C40
SPD-B40/3p
SPD-C20/3p
3xC61N-C40
SPD-C10/3p
THREE PHASE
CONSUMER
TNS
C61N-C25
L1
L2
SPD-D5/1p
L3
N
MONO PHASE
CONSUMER
PE
4xC61N-C40
SPD-C10/3pN
B
2xC61N-C25
SPD-D5/1pN
C
D
Tt
MONO PHASE
CONSUMER
Contactors
Low voltage contactors LT 1 - D
47
BASE
STATIC MAGNETIC CORE
COIL
REVERSE SPRING
MOVABLE MAGNETIC CORE
MOVABLE CONTACTS
LID
STATIC CONTACTS
AUXILIARY CONTACT
SCREWS
TERMINAL PROTECTION CAPS
C1
Contactors
48
Low voltage contactors LT 1 - D
www.elmarkgroup.eu
LT 1 D contactors are alternating current contactors for control of circuits and consumers operating in class AC3. It is
suitable for consumers with rated current up to 95A. The contactors are offered in a type with 1 NO contact for operating
circuit making and the models over 40A also have 1NC operating contactor.
Functions:
- switching on/off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at controlling signal to the coil
- making of control systems
- used as an operating element in process control panels
- remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics
- reliable separation of power contactors
- secured cover of the movable part of the contactor
Technical data:
* Operation class: AC 3
* Rated operating voltage of power contactors: up to 690V; 50/60Hz
* Composition of the power contact surfaces: unalloyed copper with coating 80% AgSnO
* Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V
* Rated voltage of the coil: from 12 to 400V AC
* Coil material: pure copper type QA-1
* Magnetic core material: alloy steel type 360
* Moveable part material: Bakelite
* Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15 Uc
* Joining terminal: screw terminal
* Connecting:
- flexible conductors with or without cable terminal
- rigid conductors
* Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥1000000
* Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10000000
* Number of cycles per hour: 1200 UP TO 32A; 600 for 40-95A
* Pole leaking power: up to 13W
* Mounting:
- on DIN-rail or
- with bolts to the surface
- mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5°
* Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material)
* Ambient temperature: -10C
ْ + 60ْ C
* Altitude: up to 2000m
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60 947-4-1
The breakers are in accordance
C1 with the directives of EC “Low
voltage directives (LVD) no.
73/23 EEC” and
“Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directives (EMC)
no. 89/336 EEC”.
ô
a
C
b
B
Type
A
LT1-D 09~32
LT1-D 40~95
b
B
C
A
a
LT-D
09~12
LT1
D18
LT1
D25
LT1
D32
LT1-D
40~65
LT1-D
80~95
Type
a
b
34/35
50/60
4.5
34/35
50/60
4.5
40
48
4.5
40
48
4.5
40
100/110
6.5
40
100/110
6.5
LT-D
09~12
LT1
D18
LT1
D25
LT1
D32
LT1-D
40~65
LT1-D
80~95
А
B
C
47
70
82
47
70
87
57
80
95
57
80
100
77
126
116
87
126
127
Contactors
49
Low voltage contactors LT 1 – D
Type
number
LT1 - D0910
1NO
220V 380V
660V
230V 400V 415V 440V 690V
4
Type
number
4
4
5.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
7.5
Type
number
5.5
5.5
7.5
220V 380V
660V
230V 400V 415V 440V 690V
7.5
Type
number
9
9
10
220V 380V
660V
230V 400V 415V 440V 690V
Type
number
7.5
9
9
10
220V 380V
660V
230V 400V 415V 440V 690V
11
11
open
7
60
closed
open
7
60
closed
open
7
60
closed
open
7
60
closed
open
7
60
Coil capacity
(VA)
Rated
capacity (kW)
5.5
closed
Coil capacity
(VA)
Rated
capacity (kW)
4
60
Coil capacity
(VA)
Rated
capacity (kW)
4
7
Coil capacity
(VA)
220V 380V
660V
230V 400V 415V 440V 690V
5.5
open
Coil capacity
(VA)
Rated
capacity (kW)
3
LT1 - D2510
1NO
4
closed
Coil capacity
(VA)
220V 380V
660V
230V 400V 415V 440V 690V
Type
number
LT1 - D1801
1NC
5.5
Rated
capacity (kW)
3
LT1 - D1810
1NO
4
220V 380V
660V
230V 400V 415V 440V 690V
Type
number
LT1 - D1201
1NC
4
Rated
capacity (kW)
2.2
LT1 - D1210
1NO
Coil capacity
(VA)
Rated
capacity (kW)
2.2
LT1 - D0901
1NC
www.elmarkgroup.eu
11
15
closed
7.5
Rated current
Tightening
in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)
9А
1.7
Rated current
Tightening
in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)
9А
1.7
Rated current
Tightening
in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)
12 А
1.7
Rated current
Tightening
in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)
12 А
1.7
Rated current
Tightening
in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)
18 А
1.7
Rated current
Tightening
in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)
18 А
1.7
Rated current
Tightening
in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)
Section of the
power supply
conductor
4
Section of the
power supply
conductor
4
Section of the
power supply
conductor
4
Section of the
power supply
conductor
4
Section of the
power supply
conductor
6
Section of the
power supply
conductor
6
Section of the
power supply
conductor
open
90
25 А
2.5
6
Coil
voltage (V)
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
230
400
12
24
36
48
110
23091
23092
23093
23094
23095
23096
23097
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
Coil
voltage (V)
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
230
400
12
24
36
48
110
23273
23270
23271
23272
23277
23278
23279
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
Coil
voltage (V)
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
230
400
12
24
36
48
110
23121
23122
23123
23124
23125
23126
23127
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
Coil
voltage (V)
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
230
400
12
24
36
48
110
23274
23280
23281
23282
23283
23284
23285
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
Coil
voltage (V)
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
230
400
12
24
36
48
110
23181
23182
23183
23184
23185
23186
23187
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
Coil
voltage (V)
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
230
400
12
24
36
48
110
23275
23286
23287
23288
23289
23290
23291
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
Coil
voltage (V)
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
230
400
12
24
36
48
110
23251
23252
23253
23254
23255
23256
23257
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
C1
Contactors
50
Low voltage contactors LT 1 – D
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Type
number
LT1 - D2501
1NC
220V 380V
660V
230V 400V 415V 440V 690V
5.5
11
Type
number
C1
LT1 - D3210
1NO
15
15
18.5
18.5
22
22
30
Type
number
25
25
33
220V 380V
660V
230V 400V 415V 440V 690V
30
Type
number
37
37
37
220V 380V
660V
230V 400V 415V 440V 690V
37
Type
number
45
45
45
220V 380V
660V
230V 400V 415V 440V 690V
45
45
90
closed
open
20
200
closed
open
20
200
closed
open
20
200
closed
open
20
200
Coil capacity
(VA)
Rated
capacity (kW)
25
7.5
45
45
Section of the
power supply
conductor
25 А
2.5
Rated current
Tightening
in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)
6
Section of the
power supply
conductor
open
Coil capacity
(VA)
Rated
capacity (kW)
22
closed
Coil capacity
(VA)
Rated
capacity (kW)
18.5
90
Coil capacity
(VA)
220V 380V
660V
230V 400V 415V 440V 690V
22
7.5
Rated current
Tightening
in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)
open
Coil capacity
(VA)
Rated
capacity (kW)
15
LT1 - D9511
1NO+1NC
15
closed
Coil capacity
(VA)
220V 380V
660V
230V 400V 415V 440V 690V
Type
number
LT1 - D8011
1NO+1NC
15
Rated
capacity (kW)
11
LT1 - D6511
1NO+1NC
11
220V 380V
660V
230V 400V 415V 440V 690V
Type
number
LT1 - D5011
1NO+1NC
11
Rated
capacity (kW)
7.5
LT1 - D4011
1NO+1NC
Coil capacity
(VA)
Rated
capacity (kW)
closed
open
20
200
32 А
2.5
Rated current
Tightening
in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)
40 А
5
Rated current
Tightening
in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)
50 А
5
Rated current
Tightening
in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)
65 А
5
Rated current
Tightening
in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)
80 А
9
Rated current
Tightening
in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)
95 А
9
10
Section of the
power supply
conductor
16
Section of the
power supply
conductor
25
Section of the
power supply
conductor
25
Section of the
power supply
conductor
50
Section of the
power supply
conductor
50
Coil
voltage (V)
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
230
400
12
24
36
48
110
23276
23292
23293
23294
23295
23296
23297
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
Coil
voltage (V)
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
230
400
12
24
36
48
110
23321
23322
23323
23324
23325
23326
23327
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
Coil
voltage (V)
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
230
400
12
24
36
48
110
23401
23402
23403
23404
23405
23406
23407
1 / 20
1 / 20
1 / 20
1 / 20
1 / 20
1 / 20
1 / 20
Coil
voltage (V)
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
230
400
12
24
36
48
110
23501
23502
23503
23504
23505
23506
23507
1 / 20
1 / 20
1 / 20
1 / 20
1 / 20
1 / 20
1 / 20
Coil
voltage (V)
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
230
400
12
24
36
48
110
23651
23652
23653
23654
23655
23656
23657
1 / 20
1 / 20
1 / 20
1 / 20
1 / 20
1 / 20
1 / 20
Coil
voltage (V)
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
230
400
12
24
36
48
110
23801
23802
23803
23804
23805
23806
23807
1 / 15
1 / 15
1 / 15
1 / 15
1 / 15
1 / 15
1 / 15
Coil
voltage (V)
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
230
400
12
24
36
48
110
23951
23952
23953
23954
23955
23956
23957
1 / 15
1 / 15
1 / 15
1 / 15
1 / 15
1 / 15
1 / 15
Contactors
51
Low voltage contactors LT 1 - H K/D
Документация на която
съответства изделието:
Стандарт EN 60947-1
EN 60947-4-1
LT 1-HK/D series of contactors are intended for control of circuits and consumers under the application category of AC2
where consumers work at the rated current and voltage, or such with less frequent starts at rated currents of up to 32A.
Contactors are supplied with one control contact and three power contacts. They are not recommended for control of AC
motors.
Functions:
- switching on/off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at controlling signal to the coil
- making of control systems
- used as an operating element in process control panels
- secured cover of the movable part of the contactor
- not suitable for AC motor control;
Technical data:
* Operation class: AC 2
* Rated operating voltage of power contactors: up to 690V; 50/60Hz
* Power contacts material: pure copper with a coating of 70% Ag20%NiCrO
* Surge voltage wear resistance: >6000V
* Rated voltage of the coil: from 12 to 400V AC
* Coil material: pure copper type QA-1
* Magnetic core material: alloy steel type 470
* Moveable part material: fireproof plastic
* Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15 Uc
* Joining terminal: screw terminal
* Connecting:
- flexible conductors with or without cable terminal
- rigid conductors
* Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥200000
* Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥500000
* Number of cycles per hour: 1200 UP TO 32A; 600 for 40-95A
* Pole leaking power: up to 13W
* Mounting:
- on DIN-rail or
- with bolts to the surface
- mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5°
* Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material)
* Ambient temperature: -10C
ْ + 60ْ C
* Altitude: up to 2000m
b
B
LT-K
06~12
LT1
D18
LT1
D25
LT1
D32
A
LT1-H K/D 06~32
Type
number
Coil capacity
(VA)
Rated
capacity (kW)
220V 380V
660V
230V 400V 415V 440V 690V
b
Type
А
B
C
34/35
45
4.5
LT-K
06~12
45
50
50
34/35
50/60
4.5
47
70
87
40
48
4.5
57
80
95
40
48
4.5
57
80
100
a
Type
ô
a
C
www.elmarkgroup.eu
closed
Rated current
Tightening
in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)
Section of the
power supply
conductor
open
LT 1 - НK 0610
1NO
1.5
2.2
Type
number
2.2
2.2
3
7
60
Coil capacity
(VA)
Rated
capacity (kW)
220V 380V
660V
230V 400V 415V 440V 690V
closed
6А
1.7
Rated current
Tightening
in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)
4
Section of the
power supply
conductor
open
LT1 - НK 0910
1NC
2.2
3.7
3.7
3.7
4
7
60
9А
1.7
4
LT1
D18
LT1
D25
LT1
D32
Coil
voltage (V)
230
400
12
24
36
48
110
Coil
voltage (V)
230
400
12
24
36
48
110
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
23061E
23062E
23063E
23064E
23065E
23066E
23067E
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
23091E
23092E
23093E
23094E
23095E
23096E
23097E
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
C2
Contactors
52
Low voltage contactors LT 1 - H K/D
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Type
number
LT 1 -НK 1210
1NO
220V 380V
660V
230V 400V 415V 440V 690V
3
4
Type
number
C2
LT 1 - HD 1810
1NO
7.5
9
10
7.5
9
9
10
220V 380V
660V
230V 400V 415V 440V 690V
11
Type
number
11
11
15
220V 380V
660V
230V 400V 415V 440V 690V
11
Type
number
11
11
15
220V 380V
660V
230V 400V 415V 440V 690V
15
15
closed
open
7
60
closed
open
7
60
closed
7.5
closed
7.5
15
18.5
closed
7.5
Rated current
Tightening
in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)
12 А
1.7
Rated current
Tightening
in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)
18 А
1.7
Rated current
Tightening
in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)
18 А
1.7
Rated current
Tightening
in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)
Section of the
power supply
conductor
4
Section of the
power supply
conductor
6
Section of the
power supply
conductor
6
Section of the
power supply
conductor
open
90
25 А
2.5
Rated current
Tightening
in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)
6
Section of the
power supply
conductor
open
90
Coil capacity
(VA)
Rated
capacity (kW)
7.5
60
Coil capacity
(VA)
Rated
capacity (kW)
5.5
7
Coil capacity
(VA)
Rated
capacity (kW)
5.5
open
Coil capacity
(VA)
220V 380V
660V
230V 400V 415V 440V 690V
Type
number
LT 1 - НD 3210
1NO
9
closed
Coil capacity
(VA)
Rated
capacity (kW)
4
LT 1 - НD 2501
1NC
5
220V 380V
660V
230V 400V 415V 440V 690V
Type
number
LT 1 - НD 2510
1NO
4
4
Rated
capacity (kW)
4
LT 1 - НD 1801
1NC
Coil capacity
(VA)
Rated
capacity (kW)
25 А
2.5
Rated current
Tightening
in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)
6
Section of the
power supply
conductor
open
90
32 А
2.5
10
Coil
voltage (V)
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
230
400
12
24
36
48
110
23121E
23122E
23123E
23124E
23125E
23126E
23127E
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
Coil
voltage (V)
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
230
400
12
24
36
48
110
23181E
23182E
23183E
23184E
23185E
23186E
23187E
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
Coil
voltage (V)
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
230
400
12
24
36
48
110
23275E
23286E
23287E
23288E
23289E
23290E
23291E
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
Coil
voltage (V)
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
230
400
12
24
36
48
110
23251E
23252E
23253E
23254E
23255E
23256E
23257E
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
Coil
voltage (V)
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
230
400
12
24
36
48
110
23276E
23292E
23293E
23294E
23295E
23296E
23297E
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
Coil
voltage (V)
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
230
400
12
24
36
48
110
23321E
23322E
23323E
23324E
23325E
23326E
23327E
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
1 / 50
Contactors
53
Low voltage contactors LT 1 - F
www.elmarkgroup.eu
The contactors LT 1- F are alternating current contactors used to control circuits and consumers operating in normal
working conditions with switching on /off the consumer and dirty working environment. They are suitable for consumers
with electrical power consumption from 115A to 800A.
Functions:
- frequently switching on/off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at controlling signal to the coil
- making of systems for consumers’ control
- used as an operating element in process control panels
- remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics
- reliable separation of power contactors
- secured cover of the movable part of the contactor
Technical data:
* Operation class: AC 3
* Rated operating voltage of power contactors: up to 1000V; 50/60Hz
* Composition of the power contact surfaces: unalloyed copper with coating 80% AgSnO
* Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V
* Coil composition: pure coil copper QA-1 type
* Magnetic core composition: steel alloy 360
* Movable part composition: bakelite
* Rated voltage of the coil: 230 and 400V AC
* Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15 Uc
* Joining terminal: screw terminal
* Connecting:
- flexible conductors with or without cable terminal
- rigid conductors
- rail
* Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10000000
* Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10000000
* Number of cycles (switching on) per hour: 200
* Pole leaking power: from 16 to 80W
* Mounting:
- with bolts to the surface
- mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 10°C
* Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material)
* Ambient temperature: -10°C + 60°C
* Altitude: up to 2000m
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60 947-4-1
The breakers are in accordance
with the directives of EC “Low
voltage directives (LVD) no.
73/23 EEC” and
“Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directives (EMC)
no. 89/336 EEC”.
Dimensions (mm):
Ty[e
a
b
c
L
M
Q
Q1
P
LT 1 F150
163.5
170
171
107
150
26
57.5
40
LT 1 F225
168.5
197
181
113.5
172
21
51.5
48
LT 1 F265
201.5
203
181
141
178
39
66.5
48
LT 1 F400
213
206
219
145
182
43
74
48
LT 1 F630
309
304
255
155
264
60
89
80
LT 1 F800
309
304
255
155
264
60
89
80
Motor rated
capacity (kW)
Type
number
Coil capacity
(VA)
220V 380V
660V
230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V 1000V
LT1 - F115
LT1 - F115
closed
open
Rated current
in AC-3 440V to up
Tightening
moment (N.m)
Coil
voltage (V)
Catalogue
number
230
400
12
24
36
48
110
230
400
12
24
36
48
110
230
400
12
24
36
48
110
230
400
12
24
36
48
110
23111
23112
23113
23114
23115
23116
23117
23151
23152
23153
23154
23155
23156
23157
23861
23862
23863
23864
23865
23866
23867
23261
23262
23263
23264
23265
23266
23267
Package / Box
( pcs )
30
55
59
59
59
80
60
54
660
115 A
18
LT1 - F150
LT1 - F150
40
75
80
80
90
100
65
45
660
150 A
25
LT1 - F225
LT1 - F225
63
110
110
110
129
129
100
55
660
225 A
35
LT1 - F265
LT1 - F265
75
132
140
140
160
160
147
66
966
265 A
35
LT1 - F400
LT1 - F400
110
200
220
250
257
280
185
66
966
400 A
50
230
400
23751
23752
1/1
LT1 - F630
LT1 - F630
200
335
375
400
400
450
450
630 A
50
230
400
23771
23772
1/1
LT1 - F800
LT1 - F800
250
450
450
450
450
475
450
800 A
230
400
23881
23882
1/1
Note: At mounting the containers from the series in control schemes a distance must be provided at the side of the contactor in case of eventual coil change.
1/4
1/4
1/2
1/2
C3
Contactors
Low voltage contactors with direct current coil LP 1-D
54
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard
EN60947-1 EN 60947-4-1
C4 The products are in accordance
b
with the directives of EC “Low
voltage directives (LVD) no.
73/23 EEC” and
“Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directives (EMC)
no. 89/336 EEC”.
a
A
The contactors LP1 D are alternating current contactors with constant current coil for control. The power plugs of the
contactor are designed for control of alternating current circuits and consumers operating in normal operating class AC-3
with frequently switching on/off the consumer and dirty working environment. The contactors are suitable for consumers
with electrical power consumption from 9A to 225A.
Functions:
- switching on/off alternating current consumers in direct current controlling schemes at controlling signal to the coil
- making of systems for consumers’ control
- used as an operating element in process control panels
- remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics
- reliable separation of power contacts
- secured cover of the movable part of the contactor
Technical data:
* Rated operating voltage of the controlling coil: from 12V DC to 220V DC
* Rated operating voltage of the power circuit: up to 690V DC
* insulation voltage: 690V
* Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V
* Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15 Uc
* Joining terminal: screw terminal
* Connecting:
- flexible conductors with or without cable terminal
- rigid conductors
* Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10000000
* Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10000000
* Number of cycles per hour: 1200 up to 32A; 600 for 40-95A
* Pole leaking power: up to 13W
* Mounting:
- on DIN-rail or
- with bolts to the surface
- mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5ْ
* Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable
(self-extinguishing material)
* Ambient temperature: -10ْ C + 60ْ C
* Altitude: up to 2000m
C
B
Dimensions:
LP1-D 09~95
Type
A
(mm)
LP 1 D0910
LP 1 D1210
LP 1 D1810
LP 1 D2510
LP 1 D3210
LP 1 D4011
LP 1 D5011
LP 1 D6511
LP 1 D9511
LP 1 F115
LP 1 F150
LP 1 F225
47
47
47
57
57
77
77
77
87
Type
LP 1 D0910
LP 1 D1210
LP 1 D1810
LP 1 D2510
LP 1 D3210
LP 1 D4011
LP 1 D5011
LP 1 D6511
LP 1 D9511
LP 1 F115
LP 1 F150
LP 1 F225
B
(mm)
76
76
76
86
86
129
129
129
129
Rated
current
(А)
Auxiliary
contact
(pcs.)
230V
9
12
18
25
32
40
50
65
95
115
150
225
1NO
1NO
1NO
1NO
1NO
1NO+1NC
1NO+1NC
1NO+1NC
1NO+1NC
1NO
1NO
1NO
2.20
3.00
4.00
5.50
7.50
11.0
15.0
18.5
25.0
30.0
40.0
63.0
C
(mm)
a
(mm)
95
95
95
101
101
176
176
176
182
34/35
34/35
34/35
40
40
40
40
40
40
Rated capacity of the consumer
(kW)
400V
415V
440V
690V
4.00
5.50
7.50
11.0
15.0
18.5
22.0
30.0
45.0
55.0
75.0
110
4.00
5.50
7.50
11.0
15.0
18.5
22.0
30.0
45.0
59.0
80.0
110
4.00
5.50
7.50
11.0
15.0
18.5
22.0
30.0
45.0
59.0
80.0
110
5.50
7.50
10.0
15.0
18.5
30.0
33.0
37.0
45.0
80.0
100
129
b
(mm.)
50/60
50/60
50
50
50
100
100
100
100
Catalogue number
according to the coil voltage (V DC)
12
24
36
23962
23963
23964
23925
23966
23967
23968
23969
23970
23911
23912
23913
23098
23128
23188
23258
23328
23408
23508
23658
23958
23118
23158
23228
23130
23131
23132
23133
23134
23135
23136
23137
23138
23914
23915
23916
48
23971
23972
23973
23974
23975
23976
23977
23978
23979
23917
23918
23919
110
23980
23981
23982
23983
23984
23985
23986
23987
23988
23989
23990
23994
230
23139
23140
23141
23142
23143
23144
23145
23146
23147
23148
23149
23201
Contactors
AC contactor for switching on of capacitors CJ19-43
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard
EN60947-1 EN 60947-4-1
The products are in accordance
with the directives of EC “Low
voltage directives (LVD) no.
73/23 EEC” and
“Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directives (EMC) no. 89/336
EEC”.
55
www.elmarkgroup.eu
The AC contactors CJ19-43 are specially designed electrical devices for commutation of three phase capacitors used for
power correction. They are alternating current contactor LT1 Dxx with mounted a group for peak current lowering from the
transitional process of the capacitor’s switching on/off. This group is a combination of current limiting resistors, switched
on in the beginning of the transitional process (switching on/off of the capacitor group).
The contactors are suitable for capacitors with rate up to 50 kVAr.
Functions:
- switching on/off of capacitors for reactive power compensation
- making of systems for compensation of the energy reactive component
- lowering of the peak transitional currents at switching on/off of the capacitor
- remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics
- reliable separation of power contacts
- secured part of the contactor against consumer contact
- do not allow manual operation
Technical data:
* Operation class: AC 6
* Rated operating voltage of the controlling coil: 230V AC; 50/60Hz
* Rated operating voltage of the power circuit: up to 690V AC
C5
* insulation voltage: 690V
* Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V
* Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15 Uc
* Number of the contacts: 3 NO power contacts +1NO operative
* Joining terminal: screw terminal
* Connecting:
- flexible conductors with or without cable terminal
- rigid conductors
* Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥300000
* Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥1000000
* Number of cycles (switching on) per hour: up to 600
* Pole leaking power: up to 13W
* Mounting:
- on DIN-rail or
- with bolts to the surface
- mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5ْ
* Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material)
* Ambient temperature: -10C
ْ + 60ْ C
* Altitude: up to 2000m
Dimensions
Type
number
CJ19-32 DPK
CJ19-32 DPK
CJ19-40 DPK
CJ19-40 DPK
CJ19-65 DPK
CJ19-65 DPK
CJ19-95 DPK
CJ19-95 DPK
CJ19-115 DPK
CJ19-150 DPK
CJ19-170 DPK
Type
A
(mm)
B
(mm)
C
(mm)
D
(mm)
CJ19-32 DPK
CJ19-40 DPK
CJ19-65 DPK
CJ19-95 DPK
CJ19-115DPK
CJ19-150DPK
CJ19-170DPK
56
75
85
85
74
127
127
127
130
180
200
200
150
150
157
157
Rated capacity
of the consumer (kVAr)
690V
400/440V
Coil
voltage
(V)
Catalogue
number
Package / Box
( pcs )
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
400
230
230
230
23932
23910
23900
23940
23961
23965
23909
23995
23991
23992
23993
1/20
1/20
1/16
1/16
1/16
1/16
1/16
1/16
1/4
1/4
1/4
Rated current
(A)
32
32
40
40
65
65
95
95
115
150
170
8
8
12.5
12.5
25
25
30
30
35
40
50
12.5
12.5
15
15
30
30
36
36
40
50
60
Contactors
Reverse contactors LT 4-Dxx
56
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard
EN60947-1, EN 60947-4-1
C6 The products are in accordance
with the directives of EC “Low
voltage directives (LVD) no.
73/23 EEC” and
“Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directives (EMC)
no. 89/336 EEC”.
LT 4-Dxx series contactors are specially designed electromagnetic devices for commutation of three phase induction
motor with reversing controlling scheme. They represent two alternating current contactors LT 4-Dxx series factory
mechanically joined together. The mechanical joining also provides locking of the contactors against simultaneous
switching on. The contactor is used for reverse control of induction motors with shortly joined rotor.
The contactors from the series are offered for consumers up to 95A.
Functions:
- switching on of electrical motors in one direction of rotation and reversing of the rotation direction at outside command
- making of control systems
- remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics
- reliable switching on or separation of power contacts
- secured part of the contactors against consumer contact
- secured cover of the movable part of the contactor
- impossibility for simultaneous switching on of the two contactors from the group due to mechanical locking
Technical data:
* Operation class: AC 3
* Rated operating voltage of the controlling coil: 230V AC; 50/60 Hz
* Rated operating voltage of the power circuit: up to 690V AC
* insulation voltage: 690V
* Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V
* Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15 Uc
* Number of plugs: 3 NO power contacts +1NO operative (for contactors over 40A there is also additional 1NC
contact)
* Joining terminal: screw terminal
* Connecting:
- flexible conductors with or without cable terminal
- rigid conductors
Note: The contactors are offered without fabric cabling
* Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥1 000 000
* Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10 000 000
* Number of cycles (switching on) per hour: up to 600
* Pole leaking power: up to 13W
* Mounting:
- on DIN-rail or
- with bolts to the surface
- mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5ْ
* Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material)
* Ambient temperature: -10C
ْ + 60ْ C
* Altitude: up to 2000m
Dimensions
Type
number
Type
number
Rated current
(A)
LT 4 D1810
18
A
(mm)
B
(mm)
C
(mm)
83
LT 4 - D1810
100
70
LT 4 - D2510
130
80
98
LT 4 - D3210
130
80
105
LT 4 - D4011
167
126
116
LT 4 - D6511
167
126
116
LT 4 - D9511
182
127
127
Catalogue number
Box / Carton
(pcs)
Rated capacity of the consumer
(kW)
230V
400V
415V
440V
690V
4
7.5
7.5
7.5
10
23301
1 / 20
11
11
15
23302
1 / 20
LT 4 D2510
25
5.5
LT 4 D3210
32
7.5
15
15
15
18.5
23303
1 / 20
LT 4 D4011
40
11
18.5
18.5
18.5
30
23304
1/ 8
37
23305
1/8
45
23306
1/6
11
LT 4 D6511
65
18.5
30
30
30
LT 4 D9511
95
25
45
45
45
Contactors
Auxiliary contact blocks
57
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Auxiliary contacts
At necessity the element provide auxiliary number of contacts. They are specially designed for mounting on the movable part
of the magnetic core of the contactors LT 1K/D series.
Functions:
- extending the number of the operative contactors up to 4 in different
Combinations
- switches on simultaneously with the other contact system of the contactor
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 60 947-4-1
The products are in accordance
with the directives of EC “Low
voltage directives (LVD) no.
73/23 EEC” and
“Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directives (EMC)
no. 89/336 EEC”.
Catalogue №23311
Technical data:
* Operation class: AC 3
* insulation voltage: 690V
* Joining terminal: screw terminal
* Connecting:
- flexible conductors with or without cable terminal
- rigid conductors
* Mounting:
- on the movable cover of the contactor through pinching
- mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5ْ
* Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable
(self-extinguishing material)
Type
C7
LT01-DN02 LT01-DN11 LT01-DN20 LT01-DN22 LT01-DN40 LT01-DN04 LT01-KN11 LA1-KN22
Number of
contacts
2NC
NO+NC
2NO
2NO+2NC
4NO
4NC
NO+NC
2NO+2NC
Catalogue
number
23002
23011
23020
23022
23040
23004
23001
23003
Auxiliary contacts LT03-DN11
Providing on necessity additional number of plug points and are mounted sideward to the movable part of the magnetic
cores of contactors of the series LT1 D. Variants with two additional plug points NO and NC are offered.
Functions:
- expanding the number of the operational plug points
- switching on simultaneously with the rest of the contact system
of the contactor
Technical characteristics:
* Environment operational regime: АС 3
* Insulation voltage: 690V
* Double connector: screw connector
* Connection:
- flexible conductors with or without cable end
- solid conductors
* Mounting method:
- mounting position – sideward to the contactor
* Plastic: resistant to UV and non-burning (self-extinguishing material)
Time delay contact block LT02-Dxx
LT02-Dxx is designed to set time intervals from 0.1 to 180s in different control schemes. It is used most frequently in
combination with contactors from LT1-Dxx series to form “star/delta” starters for electrical motor control, as it provides
the necessary time for motor winding.
Type
LТ02-DT0
LТ02-DT2
LТ02-DT4
Number of
contacts
N0+NC
N0+NC
N0+NC
Time
delay
0.1~3s
0.1~30s
10~180s
23901
23902
23903
Catalogue
number
Contactors
Module contactors K series
58
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Modular contactors K series are used for commutation of mono-phase and three-phase low power electrical consumers.
They provide connection between the consumers in small overall dimensions, silent work, mounting only at DIN-rails.
K20
C8
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 60669-2-3
The products are in accordance
with the directives of EC “Low
voltage directives (LVD) no.
73/23 EEC” and
“Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directives (EMC)
no. 89/336 EEC”.
Functions:
- switching on of consumers
- making of control systems
- remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics
- reliable switching on or separation of power contacts
Technical data:
* Operation class: AC 3
* Rated operating voltage of the controlling coil: 230V AC; 50/60 Hz
* Rated operating voltage of the power circuit: up to 690V AC
* insulation voltage: 690V
* Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V
* Joining terminal: screw terminal
* Connecting:
- flexible conductors with or without cable terminal
- rigid conductors
* Mounting:
- on DIN-rail or
- mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5°
* Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material)
* Ambient temperature: -10°C + 60°C
* Altitude: up to 2000m
À1
1
3
À1
1
3
À1
1
3
À2
2
4
À2
2
4
À2
2
4
Type
In
Coil voltage
(V)
Contacts
Catalogue
number
K20
K20
K20
K40
K40
20A
20A
20A
40A
40A
230V
230V
230V
230V
230V
2NO
NO+NC
2NC
2NO+2NC
4NO
23008
23007
23009
23422
23409
K40
2NO
À1
À2
1
3
5
7
À1
2
4
6
8
À2
4NO
27.5
NO+NC
2NC
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
2NO+2NC
Capacity coefficient compensation
Complex compensating devices
59
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Complex compensating devices
The use of electrical energy in industry is invariably connected with its transformation. The development of semiconductor elements and the broader coming of semi-conductor transformers, frequency control, welding machines and
electrical arc furnaces in industrial projects have a negative impact over the electrical power quality in the electro
distributing systems. Induction machines need reactive energy to create electromagnetic field. The reactive component of
current is taken from the electro distributing systems but it leads to additional losses in the power supply system and
makes shorter the exploitation term of electrical devices. This leads to curving of the sinusoid form of current and voltage
and interferences with harmonic character. Compensating the reactive power means to fill up the system in such a way
that the needed reactive power to be created from the compensating device instead of being taken from the electro
transportation system. This leads to killing the voltage fall and cable losses and increasing the outlet power of the power
transporters and cutting down the bills for overconsumption of reactive energy paid by consumers to the electricity supply
company. In practice compensating the reactive energy and high harmonics through LC filters combined in compensating
installations has the broadest spreading.
There are several types of compensation according to their location:
* individual compensation – when to every single motor or consumer is mounted a compensating system. It is applied
to powerful motors and transformers with fixed capacity.
* installation compensation – when the consumers from the whole section (workshop) are grouped and compensation D1
is accomplished for the whole section.
* overall compensation – accomplished at full compensation in the inlet of the installation.
According to the type of the compensating devices compensation can be:
* passive – when the system supplies constant reactive power. In this case the system does not react to changes in
the size and nature of the harmonic components and also to the per cent increase of the reactive energy in time.
* active – broader spread. The system controls the form of the consumed current and generates different capacity
depending on the load changes.
When designing the electro distributing system of industrial projects the following tasks are taken into consideration:
* defining the factor of non-sinusoid of the consumers and the voltage harmonic components
* defining the additional loading of the capacitor batteries from the harmonic components and calculating the filtering
elements if needed
The calculation of the compensating device capacity is done by reading the reactive energy of the system and the
working time of the system. Compensating devices represent a device of one or several metal boxes with common rail
system, automatic regulator for cosφ control RPSF-xx series, different number of capacitor batteries (according to the
capacity of the device) with different capacity HY 111 series, contactors for capacitor batteries control CJ 19-43 series,
protective elements, etc.
The broadest spreading of compensation has acquired the compensation of harmonics and reactive energy with
capacitors for high voltage. Capacitors HY 111 series are voltage remeasured and are able to endure overload from
harmonic components up to 7% from the basic harmonics. They are used in systems with high harmonics foul up to 25%.
The high harmonics composition is defined after measuring the influence rate of each separate harmonics compared to
the first one. In Bulgaria mostly spread are 5, 7, 9, 11 and 13 harmonics. The capacitors are remeasured for voltage 415V
and are normally mounted right in the compensation systems.
When the high harmonics are over 25% the system is taken to be foul and in this case except using capacitors, filters
for leveling the harmonics are to be used as well. These filters are calculated on the basis of the corresponding voltage
harmonics and differ for the different harmonics. They are calculated using complex mathematical programme which
reads the foul rate, the significance per cent of the voltage harmonic component, etc.
Capacity coefficient compensation
Capacitor batteries and cosφ regulator
60
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Capacitor batteries for reactive energy compensation
Capacitor batteries HY 111 series are specially designed three phase dry capacitors for compensation of reactive energy
and correction of the capacity factor. It represents an aluminum cylindrical body in which a metal polypropylene folio is
mounted which does not require special impregnation. The permittivity characteristics are acquired through filling with a
special mixture on a vegetable base (resins). The capacitor battery is constructed in such a way that at failure (overload
from voltage, current or temperature) breaks the connection to the upper cover where are the connections to the power
supply. This is done by a specially constructed valve for overpressure mounted right above the capacitor element.
The breaking of the inner couplings provides protection to the staff and environment from damage due to capacitor
element failure. There is a three phase capacitor in the cylindrical body with built in resistor for rarefying the capacitors.
The capacitor battery can be used both for passive and active compensation.
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 60831-1
EN 60831-2
D2
Technical data:
* Rated operating voltage: 440V; 50Hz
* insulation voltage: 690V
* Surge voltage wear resistance: 6kV per minute
* Capacity: from 8 to 30 kVAr at 440V
* Tolerance: ±5%
* Operating temperature: -40 - +55C
ْ
* Capacity losses: 0.5W/kVAr
* Built in discharging resistance
* Admissible current overload: twice as much the peak current
* Discharge time: <50V per minute
* Altitude: 2000m
Mounting:
* With bolt M12 orM16 to a flat horizontal base
Type of the battery
Dimensions
H / Ø (mm)
Operating voltage
(V)
HY 111A8
HY 111A12
HY 111A15
HY 111A20
HY 111A30
230 / 80
230 / 85
230 / 85
240 / 115
280 / 115
440
440
440
440
440
Battery capacity Catalogue number
(kVAr)
8.0
12.5
15.0
20.0
30.0
49008
49012
49015
49020
49030
Type of the battery
Dimensions
H / Ø (mm)
Operating voltage
(V)
Battery capacity
(kVAr)
Catalogue number
HY 111B12*
HY 111B25*
230 / 85
280 / 115
690
690
12.5
25
49031
49032
Note: *Suitable for wind generators
Controller for automatic regulation of the capacity factor (cosφ regulator)
The automatic regulators of the capacity factor RPCF-xx series are devices for monitoring of low voltage systems and
control of switching on of capacitor batteries for the capacity factor compensation. There is possibility for adjustment of
the system parameters and control. Manufactured by the latest CMOS technology, they are distinguished with high
degree of data security, easy programming and secure control of the outlets. There is possibility for indication and setting
the parameters of the power supply system as: capacity coefficient, display of the system parameters such as voltage,
current and capacity, losses, protection against overload, overload indication or lack of voltage, etc.
The change of parameters is performed through a combination of buttons on the front panel. There is light diode to
indicate which parameter is being displayed on the screen and which outlets are in operation. The display is four digital.
There is possibility for choice of the working conditions: manual or automatic.
Type
HY-RPCF12 HY-RPCF16
Number of
steps
12
16
Catalogue
number
49120
49160
Technical data:
* Rated operating voltage: 230/400V
* Operating frequency: 45 – 65Hz
* insulation voltage: 690V
* Surge voltage wear resistance: 6kV per minute
* Measurement range: from 0 to 9999kVAr
* Measurement accurateness:
- voltage: ±1.0%
- current: ±1.0%
- capacity coefficient: ±1.0%
- reactive energy: ±2.0%
* Operating temperature: -10-+55°C
* Humidity: 30 – 60%
* Display: 4 digital
* Responsiveness: 20mA
* Outlet: 7A
* Number of outlets: 12 and 16
* Altitude: up to 2500m
Mounting:
* Оn the front panel of the box through cutting an opening
Capacity coefficient compensation
61
Filters for harmonics and metal boxes
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Filters for harmonics
In the cases when the standard given in EN 50160 is not kept it is necessary to use a filtering system made of a capacitor
battery and connected to it inductivity in series. The parameters of the filtering element are defined according to the rate
of the given harmonics and are different for each one. The theoretical parameters of the filtering inductivity for the given
capacitor batteries for voltage 440V are presented in table 1.
Table1
Battery
12kVAr
Battery
20kVAr
Harmonics
inductivity (H)
Battery
8kVAr
L5
2.741x10-3
1.754x10-3
1.462x10-3
1.096x10-3
8.771x10-4
7.309x10-4
L7
-3
-4
-4
-4
-4
3.729x10-4
-4
1.398x10
Battery
15 kVAr
8.950x10
7.459x10
5.594x10
-4
4.475x10
8.420x10-4
5.414x10
4.512x10
3.384x10
2.707x10
2.256x10-4
L11
5.663x10-4
3.625x10-4
3.020x10-4
2.265x10-4
1.812x10-4
1.510x10-4
L13
-4
-4
-4
-4
-4
1.081x10-4
2.595x10
-4
Battery
30kVAr
L9
4.055x10
-4
Battery
25kVAr
2.163x10
1.622x10
1.298x10
Note: At order we define the practical parameters of the filtering elements for each capacitor system in order to improve the capacity
factor and minimize the consumed active and reactive energy in harmonics one.
On the basis of its production experience ELMARK offers filters for harmonics of seventh harmonic, which are
presented in table 2
Table2
7th harmonic
inductance (H)
Battery
8kVAr
Battery
12kVAr
Battery
15 kVAr
Battery
20kVAr
Battery
25kVAr
Battery
30kVAr
Catalogue number
49708
49712
49715
49720
49725
49730
Metal boards for making of systems for capacity factor correction
Metal boards for capacitor batteries mounting made of specially processed sheet iron with protective surface. A fan is
mounted to provide temperature conditions. There is possibility a breaker to be mounted on the door. The device is
protected against indirect contact to the current leading elements. It is mounted directly on the walls or floor, as at
mounting on a wall it is fixed with screws to the surface. It necessary to provide enough distance for cooling of the board.
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard
EN 60439-1
EN 60439-2
Technical data:
* Rated voltage: 400V; 50Hz
* insulation voltage: 690V
* Surge voltage wear resistance: 6kV/m
* Operating temperature: -5-+55C
ْ
* Maximum overloading current: 1.3xIn
* Surface: zinc passivation
* Colour: RAL 7032
* Altitude: up to 2500m
Mounting:
* on vertical or horizontal surfaces
Dimensions
Type
L
(mm)
H
(mm)
W
(mm)
Catalogue number
CXF550/356/225
550
356
225
49225
CXF1140/450/450
1140
450
450
49450
CXF1730/600/600
1730
600
600
49600
Note: The boards are supplied with a cooling fan
D3
Devices for control and protection of electrical motors
Thermal relays
62
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard
EN 60947-1
EN 60947-4-1
The products are in accordance
with the directives of EC “Low
voltage directives (LVD) no.
73/23 EEC” and
“Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directives (EMC)
E1 no. 89/336 EEC”.
Thermal relays
The thermal relays LT 2- K/Exx series are devices designed for protection of induction motors from overload or overheat.
They are mounted to contactors LT 1 K/Dxx series and an operating circuit for motor control is passed through their NC
contacts. The operation of these devices is based on the curving of bimetal plates mounted in the thermal relay caused
by the current passing through them. When the current to the consumer gets higher due to failure, the thermal current
gets higher which leads to additional curving of the bimetal plates and at getting above the limit value for the plate it
pushes the breaking mechanism and breaks the operating circuit.
The choice of a suitable protection prevents motor’s operation at unusual temperature conditions and guarantees
maximum constant operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of exploitation.
Functions:
- switching off alternating current consumers at current overload
- making of control systems for consumers
- used as a protective operating element in control panels of induction motors
- remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics
Technical data:
* Rated operating voltage: up to 690V AC; 50/60 Hz
* Rated operating current range: up to 690V AC
* insulation voltage: >690V
* Surge voltage wear resistance:≥6000V
* Joining terminal: screw terminal
* Connecting:
- flexible or rigid conductors with or without cable terminal for joining to the consumer
- to the contactor through the relay terminals
- the connecting terminals with the consumer can be adjusted according to the type of the contactor
* Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥1000000
* Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10000000
* Indication for protection activating
* Possibility for choice of the protection restoring (through the blue button)
* Possibility for range adjustment of the protection activating
* Possibility for operation at higher frequency
* Mounting:
- mounting to the contactor: to the terminals of the contactor as it is additionally clamped to its frame through a pin
- mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5ْ
* Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material)
* Ambient temperature: -10C
ْ + 60ْ C
* Installation altitude: up to 2000m
Note: To protect the consumer from short circuit, before the combination contactor- thermal relay, a suitably measured
breaker or safety device should be mounted.
Connecting scheme
LT 2 Exx
control
buttons
hour
2h
1h
40 mm
20 mm
10 mm
4 mm
2 mm
1 mm
Dimensions
40 s
20 s
Type
a
(mm)
b
(mm)
4s
LT 2 - Kxx
81
50
2s
LT 2 - E13xx
86
55
LT 2 - E23xx
86
55
LT 2 - E33xx
115
76
10 s
1s
0.8 s
0.8
1
2
4
6
10
x value (Ir)
c
(mm)
m
(mm)
x
(mm)
y
(mm)
v
(mm)
z
(mm)
0
98
47
92
44
17
10.7
108
47
92
44
17
9
109
47
92
44
17
9.5
124
54
109
70
30
17 20
Devices for control and protection of electrical motors
Thermal relays
For contactor
LT1-K06 type
LT2-K0301
LT2-K0302
LT2-K0303
LT2-K0304
LT2-K0305
LT2-K0306
LT2-K0307
LT2-K0308
LT2-K0310
LT2-K0312
LT2-K0314
LT2-K0316
LT2-K0321
LT2-K0322
For contactors
from LT1-D09 to
LT1-D25 type
LT2-E1301
LT2-E1302
LT2-E1303
LT2-E1304
LT2-E1305
LT2-E1306
LT2-E1307
LT2-E1308
LT2-E1310
LT2-E1312
LT2-E1314
LT2-E1316
LT2-E1321
LT2-E1322
LT2-E1353
For contactor
LT1-D32 type
63
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Motor capacity (kW)
220V
230V
380V
400V
660V
690V
0.37
0.75
1.10
1.10
2.20
3.70
4.00
5.50
0.37
0.75
1.50
2.20
2.20
4.00
5.50
7.50
7.50
0.37
0.55
1.10
1.50
3.00
4.00
4.00
7.50
11.0
15.0
15.0
Motor capacity (kW)
220V
230V
380V
400V
660V
690V
0.37
0.75
1.10
2.00
2.20
3.70
4.00
5.50
9.00
0.37
0.75
1.50
2.20
3.70
4.00
5.50
7.50
9.00
11.0
0.37
0.55
1.10
1.50
3.00
4.00
5.50
7.50
11.0
15.0
18.5
18.5
Motor capacity (kW)
Rated current
(A)
0.16
0.25
0.40
0.63
1.00
1.60
2.50
4.00
6.00
8.00
10.0
13.0
18.0
25.0
Rated current
(A)
0.16
0.25
0.40
0.63
1.00
1.60
2.50
4.00
6.00
8.00
10.0
13.0
18.0
25.0
33.0
Rated current
(A)
Protection
adjustment range
0.10 - 0.16
0.16 - 0.25
0.25 - 0.40
0.40 - 0.63
0.63 - 1.00
1.0 - 1.60
1.6 - 2.50
2.5 - 4.00
4.0 - 6.00
5.5 - 8.00
7.0 - 10.0
9.0 - 13.0
12.0 - 18.0
17.0 - 25.0
Protection
adjustment range
0.10 - 0.16
0.16 - 0.25
0.25 - 0.40
0.40 - 0.63
0.63 - 1.00
1.0 - 1.60
1.6 - 2.50
2.5 - 4.00
4.0 - 6.00
5.5 - 8.00
7.0 - 10.0
9.0 - 13.0
12.0 - 18.0
17.0 - 25.0
23.0 - 32.0
Protection
adjustment range
Catalogue
number
Package / Box
( pcs )
13401
13402
13403
13404
13405
13406
13407
13408
13410
13411
13412
13413
13414
13415
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
Catalogue
number
Package / Box
( pcs )
13001
13002
13003
13004
13005
13006
13007
13008
13010
13012
13014
13016
13021
13022
13053
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
1 / 100
Catalogue
number
Package / Box
( pcs )
380V
400V
440V
660V
690V
LT2-E2353
11
11
18.5
32
23.0 - 32.0
13253
1 / 100
LT2-E2355
15
15
22.0
36
28.0 - 36.0
13255
1 / 100
Catalogue
number
Package / Box
( pcs )
For contactors
from LT1-D40 to
LT1-D95 type
Motor capacity (kW)
Rated current
(A)
Protection
adjustment range
380V
400V
440V
660V
690V
LT2-E3355
18.5
18.5
30
40
30.0 - 40.0
13355
1 / 50
LT2-E3357
22
22
30
50
37.0 - 50.0
13357
1 / 50
LT2-E3359
30
30
37
65
48.0 - 65.0
13359
1 / 50
LT2-E3363
45
45
55
80
63.0 - 80.0
13363
1 / 50
LT2-E3365
55
55
75
93
80.0 - 93.0
13365
1 / 50
E1
Devices for control and protection of electrical motors
64
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Dimensions
E2
Auxiliary
contact
UVR
Thermomagnetic automatic breaker TM 2
The thermomagnetic automatic breakers TM 2-Exx series are devices designed for control and protection of induction
motors from overload, overheat or short circuit. The overload motor protection is carried out by the built in the breaker
thermal elements, and the short circuit protection is carried out by the magnetic elements. These magnetic elements
allow the adjustment of the current leakage which is 13 times the maximum current of the thermal protection. The
overload protection elements include automatic compensation for the ambient temperature changes. In combination with
under voltage release the thermomagnetic breaker TM 2-Exx also provides protection of the motors from fall out of a
phase from the power supply. The choice of a suitable protection prevents motor’s operation at unusual temperature
conditions and guarantees maximum constant operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of
exploitation.
Functions:
- switching off alternating current consumers at current overload
- switching off the electrical circuit to the consumer at inlet short circuit
- protects the motor at lack/lowering of the phase voltage (if there is under voltage release)
- used as a protective operating element in control panels of induction motors
- remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics
- possibility for change/choice of the protection current (according to the operating current of the motor)
- automatic compensation of the ambient temperature
Technical data:
* Rated operating voltage: up to 690V AC; 50/60 Hz
* Rated operating current range: from 0.1 to 80A according to the type in table 1
* insulation voltage: 690V
* Surge voltage wear resistance:≥6000V
* Joining terminal: screw terminal
* Connecting:
- flexible or rigid conductors with or without cable terminal for joining to the consumer
- to the contactor through the relay terminals
- the connecting terminals with the consumer can be adjusted according to the type of the contactor
* Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥1000000
* Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10000000
* Indication for protection activating
* Switching on of the breaker manually with button “I” and switching off with button “O” manually or automatically at
failure or after activating of the protection
* Possibility for range adjustment of the protection activating
* Possibility for operation at higher frequency
* Possibility for independent operation or as an element of an automation system
* Mounting:
- mounting to DIN-rail
- mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5ْ
* Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material)
* Ambient temperature: -10C
ْ + 60ْ C
* Altitude: up to 2000m
Devices for control and protection of electrical motors
Thermomagnetic automatic breaker TM 2
65
www.elmarkgroup.eu
E2
Type
number
Magnetic segment Thermal protection
current (A)
adjustment range
Rated capacity of three-phase motor
in AC-3 category
220V
230V
400V
415V
440V
500V
690V
-
-
-
-
-
TM2-E02
-
0.06
0.06
-
TM2-E03
0.06
0.09
0.09
-
TM2-E04
-
0.12
0.18
-
TM2-E05
0.09
0.25
0.25
0.37
TM2-E06
0.18
0.37
0.37
TM2-E07
0.37
0.75
TM2-E08
0.55
1.10
TM2-E10
1.10
TM2-E14
1.50
TM2-E16
2.20
TM2-E20
4.00
TM2-E21
5.50
TM2-E01
Thermal current
Ithe TM2-E
Catalogue
number
Package / Box
( pcs )
1 / 50
А
А
1.5
0.1 - 0.16
0.16
48001
-
2.4
0.16 - 0.25
0.25
48002
1 / 50
-
5.0
0.25 - 0.40
0.40
48003
1 / 50
0.37
8.0
0.40 - 0.63
0.63
48004
1 / 50
0.55
13.0
0.63 - 1.00
1
48005
1 / 50
0.37
0.75
22.5
1 - 1.60
1.6
48006
1 / 50
0.75
1.10
1.50
33.5
1.6 - 2.50
2.5
48007
1 / 50
1.50
1.50
2.20
51.0
2.5 - 4.00
4
48008
1 / 50
2.20
2.20
3.00
4.00
78.0
4 - 6.30
6.3
48010
1 / 50
3.00
4.00
4.00
5.50
138
6 - 10.0
9
48014
1 / 50
5.50
5.50
7.50
9.00
170
9 - 14.0
13
48016
1 / 50
7.50
7.50
9.00
15.0
223
13 - 18.0
17
48020
1 / 50
9.00
11.0
11.0
18.5
327
17 - 23.0
21
48021
1 / 50
TM2-E22
5.50
11.0
11.0
15.0
22.0
327
20 - 25.0
23
48022
1 / 50
TM2-E32
7.50
15.0
15.0
18.5
22.0
416
24 - 32.0
24
48032
1 / 50
TM2-E40
11.0
18.5
22.0
25.0
33.0
480
25 - 40.0
32
48040
1 / 15
TM2-E63
15.0
30.0
33.0
40.0
55.0
550
40 - 63.0
50
48063
1 / 15
TM2-E80
22.0
40.0
45.0
55.0
63.0
665.5
56 - 80.0
64
48080
1 / 15
Devices for control and protection of electrical motors
66
Auxiliary devices for thermomagnetic automatic breaker TM 2
www.elmarkgroup.eu
For increasing the effectiveness of the thermomagnetic breakers TM 2-Exx operation, they can be supplied with
auxiliary devices, designed for widening the practice range and improving the technical characteristics of the breakers
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60 947-2; EN 60947-4-1
The products are in accordance
with the directives of EC “Low
voltage directives (LVD) no.
73/23 EEC” and
“Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directives (EMC)
no. 89/336 EEC”.
E3
Voltage release (VR) for TM 2
The release is designed to switch off the thermomagnetic breaker when the controlling voltage falls under breaking level
0.55 to 0.7 UN and does not allow switching on of the breaker unless the voltage is over 0.85 Un.
Functions:
- switching off the breaker at power supply voltage fall under 0.55 – 0.7 Un
- does not allow switching on of the breaker when the power supply voltage is under 0.85 Un
- prevents unwarranted secondary start of the breaker at falling off and restoring of the power supply voltage
- protects the motor at lack/lowering of the phase voltage
- used as a protective operating element in control panels of induction motors
- remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics
Mounting:
* laterally to a breaker
* At the side of the breaker through special openings
Type
ТМ2 АU225
ТМ3 АU385
Voltage (V)
230
400
Catalogue number
48099
48098
Watertight box for TM 2-E
Specially designed plastic box with silicon screen for increasing the IP code from dust and moisture to
IP 65. Designed for thermal-magnetic circuit breakers of up to 32A
* Mounting:
- mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5ْ
- mounted to horizontal surfaces (walls) with bolts
- the breaker TM2 Exx is fixed inside of it on rail
* Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable
(self-extinguishing material)
Catalogue number 8083
Auxiliary contact block TM2 AE11
It is designed to switch on operational systems or signalization. Designed with one NO and one NC contact. It changes
the position of its contacts according to the position of the breaker (switched on/off) to which it is mounted.
* Mounting:
- laterally to a breaker TM2-Exx
* Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable
(self-extinguishing material)
21
22
* Ambient temperature: -10C
ْ + 60ْ C
* Altitude: up to 2000m
13
Catalogue number 48912
14
Auxiliary contact block TM2 AN11
It is designed to switch on operational circuits or signalization. It is designed with one NO and one NC contact. It
changes the position of its contacts according to the position of the breaker (switched on/off) to which it is mounted.
* Mounting:
- laterally to a breaker TM2-Exx
- more than 5 auxiliary contact blocks can be mounted
* Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable
(self-extinguishing material)
* Ambient temperature: -10°C + 60°C
* Altitude: up to 2000m
Type
Catalogue number
ТМ2 АN11
ТМ3 АN11
48911
48913
Devices for control and protection of electrical motors
67
Starters for direct start
www.elmarkgroup.eu
The electromagnetic starters LT 5 Dxx series are devices designed for remote control, direct control and protection of
induction motors or other electrical consumers. They are a combination of contactors LT 1 Dxx series and thermal
protection LT 2 Exx fabric cabled. The starters are offered on the market in metal or plastic boxes with the corresponding
IP code from dust and moisture. At mounting there should be provided protection of the device from short circuit through
breakers or disconnectors.
If necessary, at client’s order the fabric mounted thermal protection in the pneumatic starter can be substituted. The
choice of a suitable protection prevents motor’s operation at unusual temperature conditions and guarantees maximum
constant operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of exploitation.
13
3/L3
2/L2
1/L1
1/L1
KM 1=LT1- Dxx
I
95
14
KM 1
LT2-Exx
LT2-Exx
A2
W
V
96
O
KM 1
A1
U
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 60947-1;
EN 60947-4-1
The products are in accordance
with the directives of EC “Low
voltage directives (LVD) no.
73/23 EEC” and
“Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directives (EMC)
no. 89/336 EEC”.
Functions:
- switching on/off alternating current consumers
- does not allow secondary unwarranted switching on of the starter at transitory lowering of the voltage
- protects the motor from overload in the range of the corresponding thermal protection
- remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics
Technical data:
* Rated voltage of the controlling voltage: 230/400V AC; 50/60 Hz
Note: In case you need different controlling coils voltage of the starters you can turn to our regional representatives.
* Rated operating voltage: 690V
* Rated operating current range: from 7 to 93 A AC
* insulation voltage: 690V
* Surge voltage wear resistance:≥6000V
E4
* Joining terminal: screw terminal
* Little power consumption and small dimensions
* Connecting:
- flexible or rigid conductors with or without cable terminal for joining to the consumer and section according to the
motor power
- two by two inlets/outlets supplied with orifices for the cables
* Possibility for range adjustment of the protection activating
* IP code: IP 44
* Possibility for operation at higher frequency
* Mounting:
- mounting to a flat surface (wall) with bolts/screws
- mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5ْ
* Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material)
* Metal corpus: corrosion-proof coating
* Ambient temperature: -10C
ْ + 60ْ C
* Altitude: up to 2000m
M
L2/N
Devices for control and protection of electrical motors
Starters for direct start
68
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Type
number
Rated capacity of motors
50/60Hz AC-3 category
Rated
current
(A)
Thermal
relay
adjustment
range
9
7 .. 10A
220V / 230V 380V / 400V 415V / 440V
LT5 D093
LT5 D123
LT5 D185
2.2
4.0
3.0
5.5
4.0
7.5
4.0
5.5
9.0
12
18
9 .. 13A
12 .. 18A
Coil
voltage
(V)
Catalogue Package
number
/ Box
230
43091
1 / 16
400
43092
1 / 16
230
43121
1 / 16
400
43122
1 / 16
230
43181
1 / 16
400
43182
1 / 16
Remark : Under request the thermal relay will be replaced
120
140
2 x PE13
166
2 x PE13
2x Æ
5.5
88
150
E4
Type
number
Rated capacity of motors
50/60Hz AC-3 category
220V / 230V 380V / 400V 415V / 440V
LT5 D255
LT5 D325
5.5
11
7.5
15
11
15
Rated
current
(A)
Thermal
relay
adjustment
range
25
17 .. 25A
32
23 .. 32A
Coil
voltage
(V)
Catalogue Package
number
/ Box
230
43251
1 / 16
400
43252
1 / 16
230
43321
1 / 16
400
43322
1 / 16
Coil
voltage
(V)
Catalogue Package
number
/ Box
Remark : Under request the thermal relay will be replaced
135
142
185
2 x PE16
16
PE13
2xÆ
5.5
101
165
Type
number
Rated capacity of motors
50/60Hz AC-3 category
Rated
current
(A)
Thermal
relay
adjustment
range
40
30 .. 40A
220V / 230V 380V / 400V 415V / 440V
LT5 D405
LT5 D655
LT5 D955
11.0
18.5
25.0
18.5
30.0
45.0
22
37
45
65
95
Remark : Under request the thermal relay will be replaced
150
161
312
2 x PE29
4x Æ
7.7
105
181
PE13
195
48 .. 65A
80 .. 93A
230
43401
1/6
400
43402
1/6
230
43651
1/6
400
43652
1/6
230
43951
1/6
400
43952
1/6
Devices for control and protection of electrical motors
“Star/delta” starter
69
www.elmarkgroup.eu
The electromagnetic starters LT 3 Dxx series are devices designed for remote control, direct control and protection of
induction motors coiled and operating according to a starter scheme “star/delta”. They are a combination of three
contactors LT 1 Dxx series, time relay and a set of buttons “start” and “stop” fabric cabled. They provide the easy motor
unwinding giving possibility for setting the time for unwinding in “star” as the time for switching between “star” and “delta”
is fixed to 0.5 seconds.
The starters are offered on the market in two types:
- closed type – metal boxes providing the corresponding IP code from dust and moisture (IP 54) as at mounting there
should be provided protection of the device from short circuit through breakers or disconnectors
- open type – for mounting in distribution boxes as at mounting there should be provided protection of the device from
short circuit through breakers or disconnectors
The starters are offered on the market without mounted thermal protection which is purchased separately according to
the motor capacity. The choice of a suitable protection prevents motor’s operation at unusual temperature conditions and
guarantees maximum constant operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of exploitation.
If necessary, at client’s order the power supply operating voltage of the pneumatic starter can be changed.
Functions:
- switching on/off alternating current three phase motors operating according to a scheme “star - delta”
- does not allow secondary unwarranted switching on of the starter at transitory lowering of the voltage
- protects the motor from overload in the range of the corresponding thermal protection
- indication of the operating condition through a valve indicator
- possibility for mounting of additional contacts (for the open type)
- remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics
Technical data:
E5
* Rated voltage of the controlling voltage: 400V AC; 50/60 Hz
Note: In case you need different controlling coils voltage of the starters you can turn to our regional representatives.
* Rated operating voltage: 690V
* Rated operating current range: from 7 to 93A AC
* insulation voltage: >690V
* Surge voltage wear resistance:≥6000V
* Joining terminal: screw terminal
* Little power consumption and small dimensions
* Connecting:
- flexible or rigid conductors with or without cable terminal for joining to the consumer and section according to
the motor power
- three by three inlets/outlets supplied with orifices for the cables
* Possibility for operation at higher frequency
* Protection degree:IP54
* Mounting:
- mounting to a flat surface (wall) with bolts/screws
- mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5ْ
* Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material)
* The metal body is covered with corrosion-proof paint
* Ambient temperature: -10C
ْ + 60ْ C
* Altitude: up to 2000m
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-4-1
The products are in accordance
with the directives of EC “Low
voltage directives (LVD) no.
73/23 EEC” and
“Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directives (EMC)
no. 89/336 EEC”.
2
4
6
R
S
T
1
3
5
2
4
6
K2
95
96
1
3
5
2
4
6
K3
1
3
5
2
4
6
K1
21 REMOTE
CONTROL
22
13
14
U1
U2
V1 W1
V2
W2
U1
U2
V1
V2
W1
W2
1
3
2
4
5
6
LT2-Exx
K2
K1
K2
K3
Kx = LT3-Dxx
K1
12
14
12
14
55
67
K2
56
21
68
K1
22
K2
K3
21
22
Devices for control and protection of electrical motors
“Star/delta” starter
70
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Type designation
(without a box)
LТ3-D25А
LТ3-D32А
LТ3-D40А
LТ3-D65А
LТ3-D95А
Type designation
(without a box)
E5
LТ3-D25А
LТ3-D32А
LТ3-D40А
LТ3-D65А
LТ3-D95А
Rated capacity
kW
220V
230V
380V
400V
11
15
18.5
30
37
15
18.5
22
55
75
415V
15
18.5
22
55
75
Overall dimensions
(mm)
height
width
depth
135
135
150
150
150
170
170
285
285
310
160
160
190
190
190
Rated current
Coil voltage
(V AC)
Catalogue number
25А
32А
40А
65А
95А
400
400
400
400
400
43253
43323
43403
43653
43953
440V
15
18.5
22
55
75
Note: It is necessary that thermal protection with suitable range is mounted to protect the controlled motor.
The shown values of magnetic starters are for normal regimes for motor control, for hard operation regimes are chosen starters which
correspond to the current rating of the motor
Type designation
(with a box)
LT 3 -B-D25A
LT 3 -B-D32A
LT 3 -B-D40A
LT 3 -B-D65A
LT 3 -B-D95A
Type designation
(with a box)
LT 3 - B - D25А
LT 3 - B - D32А
LT 3 - B - D40А
LT 3 - B - D65А
LT 3 - B - D95А
Rated capacity
kW
220V
230V
380V
400V
11
15
18.5
30
37
15
18.5
22
55
75
415V
15
18.5
22
55
75
Overall dimensions
(mm)
height
width
depth
370
370
470
470
470
240
240
265
265
265
160
160
160
160
160
Rated current
Coil voltage
(V AC)
Catalogue number
25А
32А
40А
65А
95А
400
400
400
400
400
43254
43255
43256
43257
43258
440V
15
18.5
22
55
75
Note: It is necessary that thermal protection with suitable range is mounted to protect the controlled motor.
The shown values of magnetic starters are for normal regimes for motor control, for hard operation regimes are chosen starters which
correspond to the current rating of the motor
Devices for control and protection of electrical motors
Reverse starters
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-4-1
The products are in accordance
with the directives of EC “Low
voltage directives (LVD) no.
73/23 EEC” and
“Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directives (EMC)
no. 89/336 EEC”.
L -1
4A
97NO
F1
95NC
R
96
I
98
II
0
14 N0
K1
13
S1
14 N0
K2
13
S2
A2
A2
A1
A1
K1
K2
L 2/N
L1
L2
L3
1 L1
3 L2
5 L3
1 L1
3 L2
2 T1
4 T2
6 T3
2 T1
4 T2
1 L1
3 L2
5 L3
K1
71
www.elmarkgroup.eu
The electromagnetic starters LT4 Dxx series are devices used for direct start, reverse start and protection of induction
motors with short connected rotor. They are a combination of two contactors LT1 Dxx series supplied with two buttons
“start” and one “stop” fabric cabled. They provide the unwinding of the motor in one of the directions with possibility for
pushing the button “stop” and giving command from the other “start” for changing the motor winding direction. The two
contactors are mechanically blocked and do not allow simultaneous start in both winding directions.
The starters are offered – closed type in metal boxes providing the corresponding IP code from dust and moisture (IP54)
as at mounting there should be provided protection of the device from short circuit through breakers or disconnectors.
The starters are offered with mounted thermal protection which can be substituted according to the motor power. The
choice of a suitable protection prevents motor’s operation at unusual temperature conditions and guarantees maximum
constant operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of exploitation.
If necessary, at order the power supply operating voltage of the pneumatic starter can be changed.
Functions:
- switching on alternating current three phase motors in one winding direction, switching off and change of the winding
direction at giving a signal
- does not allow secondary unwarranted switching on of the starter at transitory lowering of the voltage
- protects the motor from overload in the range of the corresponding thermal protection
- remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics
Technical data:
* Rated voltage of the controlling voltage: 400V AC; 50/60 Hz
Note: In case you need different controlling coils voltage of the starters you can turn to our regional representatives.
* Rated operating voltage: 690V
* Rated operating current range: from 7 to 93 A AC
* insulation voltage: 690V
* Surge voltage wear resistance:≥6000V
* Joining terminal: screw terminal
* Little power consumption and small dimensions
* Connecting:
- flexible or rigid conductors with or without cable terminal for joining to the consumer and section according to the
motor power
- three by three inlets/outlets supplied with orifices for the cables
* Possibility for operation at higher frequency
* IP code: IP 44
* Mounting:
- mounting to a flat surface (wall) with bolts/screws
- mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5ْ
* Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material)
* The metal body is covered with corrosion-proof paint
* Ambient temperature: -10C
ْ + 60ْ C
* Altitude: up to 2000m
5 L3
K2
6 T3
Type designation
(with a box)
F1
2 T1
4 T2
6 T3
U1 V1 W1
scheme “Reverse”
LT 4 - B - D25А
LT 4 - B - D32А
LT 4 - B - D40А
LT 4 - B - D65А
LT 4 - B - D95А
LT 4 - B - D25А
LT 4 - B - D32А
LT 4 - B - D40А
LT 4 - B - D65А
LT 4 - B - D95А
Rated capacity
kW
Overall dimensions
(mm)
220V
230V
380V
400V
415V
440V height width
11.0
15.0
18.5
30.0
37.0
11.0
15.0
18.5
30.0
37.0
15.0
18.5
22.0
55.0
75.0
15.0
18.5
22.0
55.0
75.0
15.0
18.5
22.0
55.0
75.0
15.0
18.5
22.0
55.0
75.0
15.0
18.5
22.0
55.0
75.0
15.0
18.5
22.0
55.0
75.0
240
240
270
270
270
240
240
270
270
270
240
240
265
265
265
240
240
265
265
265
Rated current
(А)
Coil voltage
(V AC)
Catalogue
number
400
400
400
400
400
230
230
230
230
230
43001
43002
43003
43004
43005
43006
43007
43008
43009
43010
depth
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
25
32
40
65
95
25
32
40
65
95
E6
Devices for control and protection of electrical motors
72
www.elmarkgroup.eu
ELM 1000 frequency inverters
Frequency inverters are designed to control three-phase induction motors with short-circuited rotor. They provide for the
implementation of some control laws, thus becoming an indispensable part of the control systems for conveyors and
packaging machines. The ELM 1000 inverter provides optimized V/f control and output load can reach up to 150% within
60 seconds. It features easy definition of curves and easy parameters setting of inverter through the use of control panel
buttons.
Documents corresponding to
the product:
E7
Standard EN60898-1
EN 60947-2
The products are in accordance
with the directives of EC “Low
voltage directives (LVD) no.
73/23 EEC” and
“Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directives (EMC)
no. 89/336 EEC”.
Functions:
- rotation speed increase – automatic and manual
- sliding compensation: from 0 to 20%
- adjustment of the V/F control curve – linear or quadratic
- energy saving through automatic optimization of the V/F curve
- omission of resonance frequencies
- JOG function
- 'counter' function
- automatic restart option in case of power supply failure
- seven speed degrees control option
- control choice from the control panel; external or COM terminal
- frequency control from the control panel, external potentiometer by current or by voltage
- incoming signals on clockwise or counter-clockwise rotation, multi-step control, restart, etc.
- outgoing discrete control signal 24V
- outgoing analogue control signal 0 – 10V
- DC brake in static mode
- dynamic breaking with external breaking resistor – used in inert electric motor load
- output voltage adjustment option
- activation of output safety functions option
Technical features:
* Rated working voltage: 230/400V АС; 50 Hz
* Permissible working voltage deviation: ±10%
* Unbalance of phases: < 3%
* Frequency fluctuation: < 5%
* Output frequency: 0 – 400 Hz
* Output voltage: from 0 to Ubx max
* Overload capacity:
- constant: up to 110%
- moment: up to 150%
* Precision of output frequency adjustment: 0.1%
* Type of connection:
- the connection of the inverter to the power supply should always be done through a circuit breaker of the MCB
or MCCB type
- connection of consumer to power terminals: through conductors suitable for the power
- connection of control circuits: flexible conductor up to 1.5 mm2
Note: It is not recommendable to mount contactors or other commutation devices between the frequency inverter and
the motor, except as described in the product passport.
*Mounting:
- mounting to a flat surface by means of bolts
- mounting position – vertical gradient maximum ± 5°
Note: When more than one inverter is mounted in a board, it is recommendable to install them side by side and when
this is not possible, the appropriate cooling conditions should be provided.
* Plastic: UV-rays resistant and fire resistant (self-extinguishing material)
* Ambient temperature: -10° to 60° C
* Altitude : up to 2000 m
* Function enhancement option: through the inclusion of additional modules
Devices for control and protection of electrical motors
73
ELM 1000 frequency inverters
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Type of sign
ELМ1000- G -0150 T3 С
lid type code: C=metal clips; B=plastic lid
power supply code: T3=three-phase; S2= single phase
motor power
inverter type: G=constant momentum
inverter model
Dimensions (mm):
Type of
inverter
H
W
A
B
D
ELМ1000-G0007S2B
ELМ1000-G0015S2B
ELM1000-G0022S2B
ELМ1000-G0007T3B
ELМ1000-G0015T3B
ELМ1000-G0022T3B
ELМ1000-G0037T3B
ELМ1000-G0040T3B
ELМ1000-G0055T3B
ELМ1000-G0075T3B
ELМ1000-G0110T3C
ELМ1000-G0150T3C
150
170
170
170
170
170
250
250
300
300
340
380
105
125
125
125
125
125
162
162
200
200
225
230
139
160
160
160
160
160
233
233
282
282
322
362
94
114
114
114
114
114
145
145
182
182
160
186
120
140
140
140
140
140
150
150
160
160
220
225
Type
Input
voltage
Maximum
output power
(kW)
Maximum
current output
(А)
Catalogue
number
ELМ1000-G0007S2B
ELМ1000-G0015S2B
ELM1000-G0022S2B
ELМ1000-G0007T3B
ELМ1000-G0015T3B
ELМ1000-G0022T3B
ELМ1000-G0037T3B
ELМ1000-G0040T3B
ELМ1000-G0055T3B
ELМ1000-G0075T3B
ELМ1000-G0110T3C
ELМ1000-G0150T3C
230V
230V
230V
400V
400V
400V
400V
400V
400V
400V
400V
400V
0.75
1.5
2.2
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
4.0
5.5
7.5
11
15
4.5
7
9
2
4
6.5
8
9
12
17
23
32
423107M
423115M
423122M
423307M
423315M
423322M
423337M
423340M
423355M
423375M
423391M
423392M
R
S
T
R
S
U
V
T
W
E
OP 1
TA
TB
TC
OP 2
OP 3
OP 4
OP 5
OP 6
FM
V3
M
IM
V3
A
OP 7
OP 8
COM
V1
V2
12V
OUT
I2
V3
A+
B-
J
485 Comunication
d
Ø4
Ø5
Ø5
Ø5
Ø5
Ø5
Ø6
Ø6
Ø6
Ø6
Ø6
Ø6
E7
Devices for control and protection of electrical motors
74
www.elmarkgroup.eu
ELM2000 frequency inverters with no-sensor control
Frequency inverters are designed to control three-phase induction motors with short-circuited rotor. They provide for the
implementation of some control laws, thus becoming an indispensable part of the control systems for conveyors and
packaging machines, pumps, air conditioning systems, etc. The ELM 2000 inverter provides the so-called no-sensor
control, V/f control and impulse control while the output load can reach up to 150% within 60 seconds. It features easy
definition of curves and easy parameters setting of inverter through the use of control panel buttons. The inverter can
auto calibrate according to the motor power, i.e. if the inverter is connected to a motor with power different from that set
by the inverter manufacturer, it automatically adjusts its programmable parameters to suit the motor parameters.
Documents corresponding to
the product:
E7
Standard EN60898-1
EN 60947-2
The products are in accordance
with the directives of EC “Low
voltage directives (LVD) no.
73/23 EEC” and
“Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directives (EMC)
no. 89/336 EEC”.
Functions:
- rotation speed increase – automatic and manual
- sliding compensation: from 0 to 20%
- no-sensor control of the motor
- adjustment of the V/F control curve – linear or quadratic
- energy saving through automatic optimization of the V/F curve
- PID control law implementation option
- omission of resonance frequencies
- JOG function
- 'counter' function
- automatic restart option in case of power supply failure
- fifteen speed degrees control option
- control choice from the control panel; external or COM terminal
- frequency control from the control panel, external potentiometer by current or by voltage
- auto-calibration in accordance with the switched motor
- incoming signals on clockwise or counter-clockwise rotation, multi-step control, restart, etc.
- outgoing discrete control signal 24V
- outgoing analogue control signal 0 – 10V
- DC brake in static mode
- dynamic breaking with external breaking resistor – used in inert electric motor load
- output voltage adjustment option
- activation of output safety functions option
- electronic motor protection
Technical features:
* Rated working voltage: 230/400V АС; 50 Hz
* Permissible working voltage deviation: ±10%
* Unbalance of phases: < 3%
* Frequency fluctuation: < 5%
* Output frequency: 0 – 400 Hz
* Output voltage: from 0 to Ubx max
* Overload capacity:
- constant: up to 110%
- momentary: up to 150%
* Precision of output frequency adjustment: 0.1%
* Type of connection:
- the connection of the inverter to the power supply should always be done through a circuit breaker of the MCB
or MCCB type
- connection of consumer to power terminals: through conductors suitable for the power
- connection of control circuits: flexible conductor up to 1.5 mm2
Note: It is not recommendable to mount contactors or other commutation devices between the frequency inverter and
the motor, except as described in the product passport.
* Mounting:
- mounting to a flat surface by means of bolts
- mounting position – vertical gradient maximum ± 5°
Note: When more than one inverter is mounted in a board, it is recommendable to mount them side by side and
when this is not possible, the appropriate cooling conditions should be provided.
* Plastic: UV-rays resistant and fire resistant (self-extinguishing material)
* Ambient temperature: -10° to 60° C
* Altitude : up to 2000 m
* Function enhancement option: through the inclusion of additional modules
Devices for control and protection of electrical motors
75
ELM2000 frequency inverters with no-sensor control
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Type of sign
ELМ1000- G -0150 T3 С
lid type code: C=metal clips; B=plastic lid
power supply code: T3=three-phase; S2= single phase
motor power
inverter type: G=constant momentum
inverter model
Dimensions (mm):
Type of
inverter
H
W
A
B
D
ELМ2000-G0007S2B
ELМ2000-G0015S2B
ELM2000-G0022S2B
ELМ2000-G0007T3B
ELМ2000-G0015T3B
ELМ2000-G0022T3B
ELМ2000-G0037T3B
ELМ2000-G0040T3B
ELМ2000-G0055T3B
ELМ2000-G0075T3B
ELМ2000-G0110T3C
ELМ2000-G0150T3C
150
170
170
170
170
170
250
250
300
300
340
380
105
125
125
125
125
125
162
162
200
200
225
230
139
160
160
160
160
160
233
233
282
282
322
362
94
114
114
114
114
114
145
145
182
182
160
186
120
140
140
140
140
140
150
150
160
160
220
225
Type
Input
voltage
Maximum
output power
(kW)
Maximum
current output
(А)
Catalogue
number
ELМ2000-G0007S2B
ELМ2000-G0015S2B
ELM2000-G0022S2B
ELМ2000-G0007T3B
ELМ2000-G0015T3B
ELМ2000-G0022T3B
ELМ2000-G0037T3B
ELМ2000-G0040T3B
ELМ2000-G0055T3B
ELМ2000-G0075T3B
ELМ2000-G0110T3C
ELМ2000-G0150T3C
230V
230V
230V
400V
400V
400V
400V
400V
400V
400V
400V
400V
0.75
1.5
2.2
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
4.0
5.5
7.5
11
15
4.5
7
9
2
4
6.5
8
9
12
17
23
32
423107B
423115B
423122B
423307B
423315B
423322B
423337B
423340B
423355B
423375B
423391B
423392B
R
S
T
R
S
U
V
T
W
E
OP 1
TA
TB
TC
OP 2
OP 3
...
...
OP 13
FM
V3
M
IM
V3
A
OP 14
OP 15
COM
V1
V2
12V
OUT
I2
V3
A+
B-
J
485 Comunication
d
Ø4
Ø5
Ø5
Ø5
Ø5
Ø5
Ø6
Ø6
Ø6
Ø6
Ø6
Ø6
E7
Devices for control and protection of electrical motors
Auxiliary equipment for frequency inverters
76
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Stopping equipment
Brake resistor and brake element – used when stopping time is little or load inertia moment is huge. Inverters up to 15W
are offered with built in brake element but for consumers with high requirements to stopping, there are brake resisters as
an outer module for additional mounting to the brake module.
Functions:
- increasing of the brake moment
- providing a quick stop of the motor
Technical data:
* Rated operating voltage: 230/400V; 50Hz
* Admissible diversion of the rated voltage: ±10%
* Disbalance of the phases: <3%
* Connecting:
- connecting to the inverter through suitable connecting conductors according to the given scheme
* Mounting:
- to a metal surface/frame near the inverter
- necessity for enough space for the normal cooling of the module
- take precautious measures to prevent the access to the electrical connections
Connecting scheme of a brake resister
Connecting scheme of the auxiliary elements
E8
Breaking module
Inverter
Breaking resister
Breaker (MCCB)
Contactor
Inverter
type
Inlet
voltage
Breaking
module
Break resistor admissible
value for inverter type
Catalogue
number
230V
230V
230V
400V
400V
400V
400V
400V
400V
400V
400V
400V
embedded
embedded
embedded
embedded
embedded
embedded
embedded
embedded
embedded
embedded
embedded
embedded
80W/200Ω
160W/100Ω
300W/70Ω
80W/750Ω
160W/400Ω
300W/250Ω
400W/150Ω
400W/150Ω
600W/100Ω
800W/75Ω
1000W/50Ω
1500W40Ω
422202
422204
422205
422206
422207
422208
422209
422210
422211
422212
422213
422214
Inlet reactor
Inlet EMC filter
DC reactor
Outside breaking
resister
Inverter
Outside breaking
module
Outlet EMC filter
EL xxx-G0007S2
EL xxx-G0015S2
EL xxx-G0022S2
EL xxx-G0007T4
EL xxx-G0015T4
EL xxx-G0022T4
EL xxx-G0037T4
EL xxx-G0040T4
EL xxx-G0055T4
EL xxx-G0075T4
EL xxx-G0110T4
EL xxx-G0150T4
Outlet reactor
Remote control (Extension of the control panel)
It doubles the control panel and serves for control of the inverter from a distance. It represents the inverter panel fabric
cabled with cables with different length – 1.0; 1.5; 2.0; 5 and 10m.
It is ordered as a separate position in addition to the standard equipment of the inverter.
Inverter type
EL xxx-G0007S2
EL xxx-G0015S2
EL xxx-G0007T4
EL xxx-G0015T4
EL xxx-G0022T4
EL xxx-G0037T4
EL xxx-G0055T4
EL xxx-G0075T4
EL xxx-G0110T4
EL xxx-G0150T4
Cable
length
2m
2m
2m
2m
2m
2m
2m
2m
2m
2m
Type
designation
UPM 2
UPM 2
UPM 2
UPM 2
UPM 2
UPM 2
UPM 2
UPM 2
UPG 2
UPG 2
Catalogue number
422UPM2
422UPM2
422UPM2
422UPM2
422UPM2
422UPM2
422UPM2
422UPM2
422UPG2
422UPG2
Devices for control and protection of electrical motors
Auxiliary equipment for frequency inverter
77
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Filters for protection of the power supply grid from high harmonics (inlet)
The use of frequency inverters for control of motors with short connected rotor is a precondition for interference from non-sine
character in the power supply grid. It concerns to a great extent the use of powerful inverters. The protection of the power supply grid
from the interference is accomplished through the mounting before the inverter of specially designed throttle elements that smoothen
these non-sine waves generated at the operation of the inverter’s rectifier block.
Functions:
- protection of the power supply grid from high harmonics
Technical data:
* Rated operating voltage: 275/480V AC; 50Hz
* Admissible diversion of the operating voltage: ±10%
* insulation voltage
- phase – earth (2s): 2250V DC
- phase – phase (2s): 1500V DC
* Connecting:
- connecting to the inverter through suitable connecting conductors according to the given scheme
* Mounting:
- to a metal surface/frame near the inverter
- necessity for enough space for the normal cooling of the module
- take precautious measures to prevent the access to the electrical connections
- mounted between the inverter and the power supply grid
Inverter type
EL xxx-G0007S2
EL xxx-G0015S2
EL xxx-G0022S2
EL xxx-G0007T4
EL xxx-G0015T4
EL xxx-G0022T4
EL xxx-G0037T4
EL xxx-G0040T4
EL xxx-G0055T4
EL xxx-G0075T4
EL xxx-G0110T4
EL xxx-G0150T4
Inlet filter type
DL - 6TH1
DL - 10TH3
DL 15TH1
DL - 5EBK5/40
DL - 5EBK5/40
DL - 10EBK5/40
DL - 16EBK5/40
DL - 16EBK5/40
DL - 16EBK5/40
DL - 25EBK5/40
DL - 35EBK5/40
DL - 50EBK5/50
Catalogue number
422001
422002
422003
422004
422005
422006
422007
422008
422009
422010
422011
422012
Filters for protection from electromagnetic interference (EMC) (outlet)
The use of frequency inverters for control of motors with short connected rotor can lead to interference in the magnetic circuits of
appliances mounted near the inverter. This is a specially designed filter element that can be mounted at the outlet of the inverter to
protect the other equipment from the electromagnetic interference from the motor power supply cable. This filter is recommended
when using frequency inverters in systems with special functions, radio dependent systems, medical equipment, etc.
Functions:
- protection of the power supply grid from electromagnetic interference
Technical data:
* Rated operating voltage: 275/480V AC; 50Hz
* Admissible diversion of the operating voltage: ±10%
* Insulation voltage
- phase – earth (2s): 1500V DC
- phase – phase (2s): 1500V DC
* Connecting:
- connecting to the inverter through suitable connecting conductors according to the given scheme
* Mounting:
- to a metal surface/frame near the inverter
- necessity for enough space for the normal cooling of the module
- take precautious measures to prevent the access to the electrical connections
- mounted between the inverter and the power supply grid
Inverter type
Outlet filter type
EL xxx-G0007S2
EL xxx-G0015S2
EL xxx-G0022S2
EL xxx-G0007T4
EL xxx-G0015T4
EL xxx-G0022T4
EL xxx-G0037T4
EL xxx-G0040T4
EL xxx-G0055T4
EL xxx-G0075T4
EL xxx-G0110T4
EL xxx-G0150T4
DL - 5EBL5/40
DL - 10EBL5/40
DL - 16EBL5/40
DL - 5EBL5/40
DL - 5EBL5/40
DL - 10EBL5/40
DL - 16EBL5/40
DL - 16EBL5/40
DL - 16EBL5/40
DL - 25EBL5/40
DL - 35EBL5/40
DL - 50EBL5/40
Catalogue number
422013
422014
422015
422016
422017
422018
422019
422020
422021
422022
422023
422024
E8
Devices for control and protection of electrical motors
78
ELM 2500 soft starters
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Soft starters are designed to control the start of three-phase induction motors with short-circuited rotor. A number of motor
control issues are avoided through them, and namely: prolonged start moments, auto-ignition of motor, there is no need of stardelta switching, auto-transformer switching, resistant switching, etc. The ELM 2500 soft starter pertains to the AC53b type of
starters as per the standard requirements and it provides rotation of motor and once the operation mode is set, a shunt
contactor of the LT 1 D/F series is switched to control motor operation as the soft starter is not designed to control motors in a
set mode. Under a stop command in accordance with the selected control scheme, the soft starter can or can not be included in
shutting the motor down.
Functions:
1. System functions
- over-voltage protection – motor will switch off when power supply exceeds the preset limits
- overload protection – protects the motor from overloading
- phase loss protection
- temperature overload protection
2. Control functions
- output faults
- motor faults diagnostics
- keyboard or outward control
- delayed start option
- faults memory
Technical features:
* Rated working voltage: 230/400V АС; 50 Hz
* Permissible working voltage deviation: ±10%
* Unbalance of phases: < 3%
* Frequency fluctuation: < 5%
* Obligatory bypass contactor installation
* Mounting :
- mounting to a flat surface through bolts
- mounting position – vertical gradient maximum ± 5°
Note: When more than one soft starter is mounted in a board, it is recommendable to mount them side by side and when this is
not possible, the appropriate cooling conditions should be provided.
* Plastic: UV-rays resistant and fire resistant (self-extinguishing material)
* Altitude : up to 2000 m
Documents corresponding to
the product:
E9
Standard EN60947-4-2
EN 60947-1
The products are in accordance
with the directives of EC “Low
voltage directives (LVD) no.
73/23 EEC” and
“Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directives (EMC)
no. 89/336 EEC”.
Dimensions (mm)
Type of soft starter
EL M25015
EL M25022
EL M25037
EL M25045
EL M25055
EL M25075
А
Е
F
B
А
В
С
E
F
250
250
250
250
250
510
153
153
153
153
153
260
162
162
162
162
162
194
219
219
219
219
219
389
140
140
140
140
140
232
d
Ø6
Ø6
Ø6
Ø6
Ø6
Ø8
С
R ST
A
L
Тип на
софтстартера
QF
S3
R
LT1-D/Fxx
S
T
15
PE
14
RST
Lt2
13
BX
S2
12
STOP
S1
11
10
RUN CM
ЕLM2500
U
V
LT 2 Exx
W
1
2
3
4
Y1
Y2
Y3
T1
5
6
7
T2 T3
30A
LT 1 D/Fxx
L1
M
N
8 9
30B 30C
EL M25015
EL M25022
EL M25037
EL M25045
EL M25055
EL M25075
Мощност
Номинален ток Тип на байпасен
на двигателя
(А)
контактор
( kW )
15
22
37
45
55
75
30
45
76
90
110
150
LT 1-D 50
LT 1-D 50
LT 1-D 80
LT 1-D 95
LT 1-F 115
LT 1-F 150
Сечение на Каталожен номер
захранващите
проводници
10
10
16
25
25
35
42225015
42225022
42225037
42225045
42225055
42225075
Timers, relays and displaying devices
Programmable timers
79
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Programmable digital one-channel timer TE 15A
Cat.N
50036
The timer is manufactured under the CMOS technology with a quartz minicontroller which makes it reliable for operation.
The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It can memorize up to eight ON/OFF programs (ON/OFF cycles). Each
program setting is done through the push buttons. Programming starts with selection of the days of the week (you can
choose among a whole week cycle, work days cycle, weekend cycle, or a specific day of the week); then the cycle start
time and end time are set. If you have selected work days cycle, then the program will start and stop at the set times
each work day of the week. This is one ON/OFF program. Where necessary, other programs can be memorized up to the
limit of eight possible programs. If you continue setting new programs the first memorized program will be deleted. The
minimal interval for cycle programming is 1 minute.
Technical data:
* Display: LCD
* Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz
* Operations: 8 switching ON/OFF
* Time deviation: <2s (at 25°C)
* Battery for programme storing: up to 15 days
* Power consumption: <5VA
* Switched on indicator
* Electrical wear resistance: 105 cycles
85
* Mechanical wear resistance: 107 cycles
* Operating temperature: -10 - +40°C
* Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
* Number of contacts: 1NO + 1NC
* Commutating capacity:
F1
- active load: up to 6A
36
64
- inductive load: up to 2.5
* Weight: 120g
Mounting:
* DIN-rail
Programmable digital one-channel timer TE 15B
Cat.N
50101
The timer is manufactured under the CMOS technology with a quartz minicontroller which makes it reliable for operation.
The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting.It can memorize up to six ON/OFF programs (ON/OFF cycles). Each program
setting is done through the push buttons. Programming starts with selection of the days of the week (you can choose
among a whole week cycle, work days cycle, weekend cycle, or a specific day of the week); then the cycle start time and
end time are set. If you have selected work days cycle, then the program will start and stop at the set times each work
day of the week. This is one ON/OFF program. Where necessary, other programs can be memorized up to the limit of
eight possible programs. If you continue setting new programs the first memorized program will be deleted. The minimal
interval for cycle programming is 1 minute. There is possibility for automatic correction of the time according to the
seasonal sun variations.
Technical data:
* Display: LCD
* Automatic adjustment of the current time (time correction winter/summer)
* Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz
* Operations: 6 switching ON/OFF
* Time deviation: <2s (at 25°C)
* Battery for programme storing: up to 15 days
* Power consumption: <5VA
* Switched on indicator
* Electrical wear resistance: 105 cycles
* Mechanical wear resistance: 107 cycles
* Operating temperature: -10 - +40°C
* Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
85
* Number of contacts: 1NO + 1NC
* Commutating capacity:
- active load: up to 6A
- inductive load: up to 2.5
* Weight: 120g
Mounting:
* DIN-rail
36
64
80
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Cat.N
50100
F1
Cat.N
35005
Cat.N
50102
Timers, relays and displaying devices
Programmable timers
Programmable digital one-channel timer TE 20
The timer is manufactured under the CMOS technology with a quartz minicontroller which makes it reliable for operation.
The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It is possible to adjust forty-eight ON/OFF cycles. Each program setting is
done through selection of the cycle start and end time with the push buttons. When a program is on, the time cycle is
indicated as a dimmed out section on the dial. For example, if you start a 2-hour program the 2-hour portion between On
and Off times on the dial becomes dark. The minimal interval for cycle programming is 15 minutes. The battery allows
programme storing at lack of power supply.
Technical data:
* Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz
* Time deviation: <2s (at 25°C)
* Battery for programme storing and operation: up to 150 hours
* Power consumption: <5VA
* Switched on indicator
* Electrical wear resistance: 105 cycles
* Mechanical wear resistance: 107 cycles
* Operating temperature: -10 - +40°C
* Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
* Number of contacts: 1NO + 1NC
* Li-Ion battery: 150h
* Commutating capacity:
- active load: up to 16A
* Weight: 120g
Mounting:
* DIN-rail
Tariff switching clock (timer) TE 18
The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It is used for switching on tariff lighting in housing buildings and switching off
after the adjusted time. Easy to adjust time intervals, mounting and conducting. Reliable to use.
Technical data:
* Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz
* Adjustment range: 0.5 to 20 min
* Power consumption: <5VA
* Operating temperature: -10-+55°C
* Humidity: 45 – 85%RH
* Number of contacts: 1NO
* Commutating capacity:
- active load: up to 16A
- inductive load: up to 10 A
* Weight: 75g
Mounting:
* DIN-rail
Time relay “star/delta” TE 19
The time relay is manufactured under the most modern methods of qualitative and reliable materials. The timer is
adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It is used to provide reliable and safe time hold at “star/delta” starters and it is used for
setting fixed time intervals. Programming is done through selection of the time unit (seconds or minutes) and rate (x 0.1
or x1) by the slide switches, and then selection of a value from the timer knob (from 0 to 10). Whenever timer circuit
receives a signal, it executes the set cycle and then stops until a new signal is available.. It gives possibility for time
adjustment for motor unwinding in star up to 600s and time change to delta according to the consumer’s need.
Technical data:
* Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz
* Adjustment range for operation in star: 1 to 600 seconds
* Repetition accuracy: ±5% from the whole scale
* Adjustment accuracy: ±5% from the whole scale
* Zeroing time: <0.5s
* Power consumption: <5VA
* Electrical wear resistance: 100 000 cycles
* Mechanical wear resistance: 1 000 000 cycles
* Operating temperature: -10-+55°C
* Humidity: 45 – 85%RH
* Commutating capacity: up to 5A
* Indication:
- at operation in “star”: red indication
- at operation in “delta”: green indication
* Weight: 150g
Mounting:
* DIN-rail
Timers, relays and displaying devices
Programmable timers
Тype
Catalogue number
ТЕ8А - 1а
ТЕ8А - 2а
50113
50114
81
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Timer TE8A – 1a, TE8A – 2a
The timer is manufactured under the most modern technology CMOS with a quartz minicontroller which makes it precise,
qualitative and reliable. It has a built in battery which allows operation of the timers without charging up to 150 hours. The
timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. Timer programming is done through selection of the operational day(s) of the
week, followed by selection of the start time and end time. You may choose out of ten modes (one for each day of the
week, one for the work days, one for the weekends and one for the whole week). When setting the time, you should start
first with the hours and then continue with the minutes.
ТЕ8A - 1a - Up to eight programs can be memorized. The on/off time resolution is 1 minute.
ТЕ8A - 2a - It has two operating channels, each of which can adjust four programmes for a day or a week with
minimal interval of 1 minute for switching on and off.
Indication on LCD display with high resolution and
showing the time in hours, minutes and seconds.
Technical data:
* Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz
* Power consumption: <5VA
* Electrical wear resistance: 107 cycles
* Mechanical wear resistance: 105 cycles
* Operating temperature: -10ºC - +55ºC
* Temperature of storage: up to 70C
* Humidity: 45 – 85%RH
* Commutating capacity: up to 16A
* Two outlet relays
* Li-Ion battery: 150h
* Weight: 150g
F1
Mounting:
* DIN-rail
Impulse relay
Impulse relays allow circuit remote control. They can be operated manually, remotely, from several control points, or by
impulses. Impulse relays are most frequently used for the control of lighting circuits in various public places with multiple
control points.
Cat.No:
50104
Timer TE6B
The timer is manufactured under the most modern technology CMOS with a quartz minicontroller which makes it precise,
qualitative and reliable. The timer is modulated to be mounted on the front panel of boards. The direction of operation is
adjusted – direct or reverse. There is possibility to adjust the time range from 0.01 second to 99 hours 59 minutes,
possibility for correction of the set values during operation. Indication on LCD display with high resolution and showing
the time in hours, minutes and seconds.
Technical data:
* Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz
* Possibility for choice of operating range:
- from 0.01 second to 99.99 seconds
- from 1 second to 99.59 minutes
- from 1 minute to 99.59 hours
* Error: <0.01% ±0.05s
* Minimal duration of the input pulse: 20ms
* Power consumption: <5VA
* Electrical wear resistance: 107 cycles
* Mechanical wear resistance: 105 cycles
* Operating temperature: -10-+55°C
* Temperature of storage: up to 70°C
* Humidity: 45 – 85%RH
* Commutating capacity at active load: 3A
* Weight: 300g
Mounting:
* on the front panel of the board
045
Cat.No:
50300
Technical data:
* Control voltage: 230V
* Rated current of the power circuit: 16А
* Electrical endurance: 200000 cycles
* Maximum switching frequency: 5 operations/minute
* Impulse duration: 50ms
Connection:
* tunnel terminals
Timers, relays and displaying devices
Programmable timers
82
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Cat.N
50105
F1
Timer TE48S-S
The timer is manufactured under the most modern technology CMOS with a quartz minicontroller which makes it precise,
qualitative and reliable. The timer is modulated to be mounted on the front panel of boards. The direction of operation is
adjusted – direct or reverse. It represents two separate operating channels, each of which can operate independently with
time range adjustment from 1 second to 99 minutes. Possibility for correction of the set values during operation. First,
select the time unit (seconds or minutes) and then set the time. Depending on the timer coupling, it can be used as a
cyclic timer relay, i.e. it initially counts the first time set, then counts the second time set, then starts counting over the first
time again, etc. until a stop signal is received. In another mode, the timer can count the set time and stop until a new
signal is received to count the next cycle. Indication on LCD display with high resolution and showing the time in hours,
minutes and seconds.
Technical data:
* Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz
* Admissible variation of the input voltage: 85-110%U
* Possibility for choice of operating range:
- from 1 to 99 seconds
- from 1 minute to 99 minutes
* Error: <0.01% ±0.05s
* Minimal duration of the input pulse: 20ms
* Power consumption: <5VA
* Electrical wear resistance: 107 cycles
* Mechanical wear resistance: 105 cycles
* Operating temperature: -10-+55°C
* Temperature of storage: up to 70°C
* Humidity: 45 – 85%RH
* Commutating capacity at load: 3A
* Weight: 300g
Mounting:
* on the front panel of the board
indication
indication
Adjusting block
Т1 Time setting
Cat.№
50102M
Т2 Time setting
Timer ТЕ 19M
Timer is developed using modern technologies from quality and reliable materials and is adapted for mounting on DIN
rail. It is used for providing time intervals in eight time programs, which are assigned by combinations of the keys. There
is an option for it to operate in time ranges (assigned by the keys K4, K5,K6): seconds, minutes or hours depending on
the necessity of the user. Power contact up to 3A.
Technical characteristics:
* Input voltage: 230V; 50Hz
* Range of setting: from 0.6 sec to 100 hours
* Accuracy of setting: ± 5% from the whole scale
* Time for nullifying: <0.5 seconds
* Consumed capacity: < 5VA
* Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 100 000 cycles
* Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): 1 000 000 cycles
* Operation temperature: -10 - +55°С
* Humidity: 45 - 85%RH
* Computing option: up to 5А
* Indication:
- on power supply: red indication
- on operational output relay: green indication
* Weight: 150 gr.
* Time functions: according to the programming guide
Mounting method:
* DIN rail
Timers, relays and displaying devices
Digital counters
83
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Universal digital counter CE2J
The device is manufactured under the modern technology CMOS which allows high speed of counting and high counting
reliability. It has a built in battery which allows data storing for more than 10 years. It is supplied with a digital display with
black lighting digits, providing excellent visibility at different lighting. The counter is to be mounted on the front panel of
the boards. It is used for impulse sequence counting with accumulation or deduction. There is possibility for relay outlet
operation at reaching beforehand set value, and also a possibility for changing the position of the decimal point.
Documents corresponding to the product:
Standard EN 61010-1
Cat.N
50111
Technical data:
* Display: LCD
Power supply indicator
* Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz
Current value
* Counting range: 0 - 99999
* Counting speed: 30/3k cps
Set value 1 and 2
* Zeroing: outside impulse
* Battery for programme storing: up to 10 years
Return button
* Power consumption: <5VA
System
* Operating temperature: -10-+40°C
return button
* Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
* Commutating capacity: relay outlet with active load: up to 3A
* Weight: 250g
Mounting:
* on the front panel
* opening with dimensions: 45x45
Protection indicator
Outlet channel indicator
Set
value
68
Setting
buttons (1~6)
Operational
button
Display
button
68
F2
065
90
Combined digital counter/timer CE10J
The device is for front mounting in the board. It can be used as a counter or timer choosing a definite combination from
keys. It is manufactured under the modern technology CMOS which allows high speed of counting, precision at operation
as a timer and high reliability. It has a built in battery which allows data storing for more than 10 years. It is supplied with a
digital display providing excellent visibility at different lighting. It is used for impulse sequence counting with accumulation
or deduction. There is possibility for relay outlet operation at reaching beforehand set value, and also a possibility for
changing the position of the decimal point.
Cat.N
50120
Documents corresponding to the product:
Standard EN 61010-1
Technical data:
* Display: LCD
* Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz
* Counting range: 0 – 999
* Timer range: 0.01 – 99h99min
* Counting speed: 30/500 cps
* Zeroing: outside impulse
* Battery for programme storing: up to 10 years
* Power consumption: <3VA
* Mechanical wear resistance: 107 cycles
* Operating temperature: -5-+40°C
* Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
* Commutating capacity: relay outlet with active load: up to 3A
* Weight: 120g
Mounting:
* on the front panel
* opening with dimensions: 45x45
operating
value
set
value
68
functional
button
68
065
90
Timers, relays and displaying devices
Digital counters
84
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Total digital counter CE15J
The device is to be mounted on DIN-rail. It is used as an impulse counter with no outside power supply. For that purpose
there is a Li battery built in the device which provides data storing and operation of the device for 5 years. It has eight
digital lighting display providing excellent visibility at different lighting. It is used for impulse sequence counting with
accumulation.
Cat.N
50112
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 61010-1
Technical data:
* Display: LCD
* Power supply voltage: built in battery
* Inlet signal: 100-230V AC/DC
* Counting accuracy: <0.002%
* Data storing battery: up to 5 years
* Operating temperature: -5-+40°C
* Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
* Weight: 120g
Mounting:
* DIN-rail
Total digital counter CE15L
The device is to be mounted on DIN-rail. It is used as a time impulse counter with no outside power supply. For that
purpose there is a Li battery built in the device which provides data storing and operation of the device for 5 years. It has
eight digital lighting display providing excellent visibility at different lighting. It is used for time impulse sequence counting
with accumulation. It displays the operated time.
F2
Cat.N
50115
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 61010-1
Cat.N
50103
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 61010-1
Technical data:
* Display: LCD
* Power supply voltage: built in battery
* Inlet signal: 100-230V AC/DC
* Counting accuracy: <0.002%
* Battery for data storing: up to 5 years
* Operating temperature: -5-+40°C
* Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
* Weight: 120g
Mounting:
* DIN-rail
Phase sequence indicator EK - RSTB
The device is to be mounted on DIN-rail. It is used for control and indication of the presence, sequence and quality of the
phases. The device indicates the following fault:
- lack of one or several phases;
- change in the sequence of the phases;
- lowering of the power supplying voltage: under 10%;
- increasing of the power supplying voltage: over 10%;
- phase asymmetry of the power supplying voltage: ±10%
In the presence of one of the conditions above a relay starts operating in the device which breaks the controlling circuit.
The time between fault indication and outlet relay switching on can be adjusted in order to prevent unwilling stops at very
short breaks. When the voltage is back to normal limits, the device receives energy (indication lights) according to the
hysteresic values. At phase sequence fault the device operates immediately.
Technical data:
* Power supply voltage: 400V; 50Hz
* Possibility for operation range adjustment: 0.1 – 10 seconds
* Possibility for working range adjustment: from 300 to 480 V
* Electrical wear resistance: 1 000 000 cycles
* Mechanical wear resistance: 10 000 000 cycles
* Indication:
- green LED – indication for a change in the condition
- red LED - failure
* Operating temperature: -5-+40°C
* Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
* Weight: 120g
Mounting:
* DIN-rail
Timers, relays and displaying devices
Industrial Relays
85
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Industrial Relays and Bases
Devices intended for construction of automation and signalling boards. They are mainly used for command transfer
towards the executive mechanisms. Currents of comparatively heavy values enabling the direct control of industrial
executive mechanisms are commuted in comparatively small sizes. The contact surfaces are made from silver-coated
electrolytic copper. The entire contact system is closed within a lid of colourless fire-proof plastic with a test-button
installed to it. The base provides a safe electric connection of the conductors of the electric installation and the relays and
is used to install the relay to the DIN busbar.
Documents corresponding to
the product:EN 60947-5-1;
EN 61810
Technical Characteristics:
* Supply voltage: from 12 to 230V АС, 50 Нz and from 12 to 110V DC
* Acceptable deviation of the supply voltage: 85 -110% Un
* Rated current of the sockets: 10А АС
* Electrical endurance: 1 000 000 cycles
* Isolation resistance: 500 mΩ /min (500V)
* Impulse tension resistance: 2000V, 50Нz
* Dielectric strength: 1000V АС/1 min
* Turn-out time: 25ms
* Working temperature: -5 - + 65°С
* Humidity: 35 - 85% RH
Method of installation:
* on a DIN rail by means of a socket
ELM - 90.xx
ELM - 94.x
Catalogue number
Relay type
Voltage of the coil
(V)
Socket type
ELM - 14FC
ELM - 14FC
ELM - 14FC
12 VDC
24 VDC
48 VDC
ELM-08A
ELM-08A
ELM-08A
Relay type
Voltage of the coil
(V)
Socket type
Resistance of the coil
(Ω)
Number of
contacts
Catalogue number
ELM - 60.2
ELM - 60.2
ELM - 60.2
ELM - 60.2
ELM - 60.13
ELM - 60.13
ELM - 60.13
ELM - 60.13
ELM - 60.13
12 VDC
24 VDC
48 VDC
230 VAC
12 VDC
24 VDC
48 VDC
110 VAC
230 VAC
ELM - 90.22
ELM - 90.22
ELM - 90.22
ELM - 90.22
ELM - 90.23
ELM - 90.23
ELM - 90.23
ELM - 90.23
ELM - 90.23
20
80
320
7400
20
80
320
1700
7400
2NO+2NC
2NO+2NC
2NO+2NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
3NO+3NC
3NO+3NC
3NO+3NC
3NO+3NC
57601
57602
57603
57605
57611
57612
57613
57614
57615
Relay type
Voltage of the coil
(V)
Socket type
Resistance of the coil
(Ω)
Number of
contacts
Catalogue number
ELM - 55.02
ELM - 55.02
ELM - 55.02
ELM - 55.02
ELM - 55.04
ELM - 55.04
ELM - 55.04
ELM - 55.04
ELM - 55.04
12 VDC
24 VDC
48 VDC
230 VAC
12 VDC
24 VDC
48 VDC
110 VAC
230 VAC
ELM - 94.3
ELM - 94.3
ELM - 94.3
ELM - 94.3
ELM - 94.4
ELM - 94.4
ELM - 94.4
ELM - 94.4
ELM - 94.4
42
168
675
14000
42
168
675
3500
14000
3NO+3NC
3NO+3NC
3NO+3NC
3NO+3NC
4NO+4NC
4NO+4NC
4NO+4NC
4NO+4NC
4NO+4NC
57521
57522
57523
57525
57541
57542
57543
57544
57545
Socket type
Dimensions
(mm)
Number of
terminals (pcs.)
Catalogue number
ELM - 08A
ELM - 94.3
ELM - 94.4
ELM - 90.22
ELM - 90.23
72 x 15
67 x 30
67 x 30
68 x 38
68 x 38
5
11
14
8
11
Resistance of the coil
(Ω)
270
1080
4340
Number of
contacts
NO+NC
NO+NC
NO+NC
57141
57142
57143
57901
57902
57903
57904
57905
F3
Timers, relays and displaying devices
Industrial Relays
86
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Documents corresponding to
the product:EN 60947-5-1;
EN 61810
F3
Industrial Solid State Relays (SSR)
Industrial SSR are intended for mounting in power and control cabinets as an output switch devices with reliable ON/OFF
performance. The SSR are based on the CMOS technology. The non-contact electronic switch is optically separated from
the input signal by a photoelectric coupler. This allows use of switch currents of up to 50A despite of the devices small
overall size. Another important feature of the relay is that output load can be regulated depending on the input signal
value. The relay is mainly used to transmit control signals to actuating mechanisms since it can work at comparatively
high currents making it possible to directly control actuators. RRS have transparent plastic covers to additionally improve
their safety level. The SSR use is connected with considerable heat emissions, so measures must be taken to dispense
the excessive thermal energy in the atmosphere. This is achieved through application of specially deigned radiators. The
correct definition of radiator parameters is of critical importance. It is made by calculating the heat generation capacity
with the formula: Heat generation = active load current x 3.0 W/A. The heat removal surface is estimated with the help of
the following graphic:
Technical Specifications:
Load/output voltage: 30/400V 50 Hz orheSRndrom0 o230/400VDC or the solid state voltage regulators
Rated output current: from 10А to 60А
Insulating voltage: 1000 MΩ /min (500V)
Impulse voltage stability: 2000V, 50Hz
Dielectric Strength: < 2500VAC / 1 min
Leakage current: <2mA
Turn-on time: <10ms
Operating temperature: -5°С + 65°С
Relative Humidity: 35 - 85%RH
Type
Relay Type
Control Voltage
(V)
Output Voltage
(V)
Number of
phases
Output Current
(А)
Catalogue
number
ZG3NC - 2 - 10B
ZG3NC - 2 - 20B
ZG3NC - 2 - 25B
ZG3NC - 2 - 40B
ZG3NC - 2 - 60B
ZG3NC - 3 -10B
ZG3NC - 3 - 20B
ZG3NC - 3 - 25B
ZG3NC - 3 - 40B
ZG3NC - 3 - 60B
SSR
SSR
SSR
SSR
SSR
SSR
SSR
SSR
SSR
SSR
3-32VDC
3-32VDC
3-32VDC
3-32VDC
3-32VDC
3-32VDC
3-32VDC
3-32VDC
3-32VDC
3-32VDC
230VАC
230VАC
230VАC
230VАC
230VАC
400VАC
400VАC
400VАC
400VАC
400VАC
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
10
20
25
40
60
10
20
25
40
60
57710
57720
57725
57740
57760
57713
57723
57735
57743
57763
Type
Relay Type
Control Voltage
(V)
Output Voltage
(V)
Number of
phases
Output Current
(А)
Catalogue
number
ZG1NC - 2 - 10D
ZG1NC - 2 - 20D
ZG1NC - 2 - 25D
ZG1NC - 2 - 40D
ZG1NC - 3 -10D
ZG1NC - 3 - 20D
ZG1NC - 3 - 25D
ZG1NC - 3 - 40D
SS voltage regulator
SS voltage regulator
SS voltage regulator
SS voltage regulator
SS voltage regulator
SS voltage regulator
SS voltage regulator
SS voltage regulator
1-10VDC
1-10VDC
1-10VDC
1-10VDC
1-10VDC
1-10VDC
1-10VDC
1-10VDC
0-230VАC
0-230VАC
0-230VАC
0-230VАC
0-400VАC
0-400VАC
0-400VАC
0-400VАC
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
10
20
25
40
10
20
25
40
57810
57820
57825
57840
57813
57823
57835
57843
Type
Relay Type
Control Voltage
(V)
Output Voltage
(V)
Number of
phases
Output Current
(А)
Catalogue
number
ZG33 - 3 - 10В
ZG33 - 3 - 20В
ZG33 - 3 - 25В
ZG 33 - 3 - 40В
SSR
SSR
SSR
SSR
3-32VDC
3-32VDC
3-32VDC
3-32VDC
400VАC
400VАC
400VАC
400VАC
3
3
3
3
10
20
25
40
57831
57832
57833
57834
Note: The relay output must be supplied with a varistor to ensure its over-voltage protection, whenever RRS is used to
control inductive loads.
Type of Radiator
Overall
Dimensions (L/W/H)
Approximate Load
(А)
Catalogue
number
QW-A 50
QW-B 72
QW-B 100
QW-C 115
QW-E 50
60x50x50
72x100x50
100x100x50
115x100x50
150x88x35
15
20
25
40
75
57906
57907
57908
57909
57910
Timers, relays and displaying devices
Devices for temperature measurement
87
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Digital Temperature Controller Type CD - 701
The device is intended for industrial control and monitoring of temperature. It allows monitoring and adjustment of
temperatures of up to 1999°С depending on the used sensor – thermocouple or thermoresistor. The device allows
programming of the used type of sensor (К (CA) ; J ( IC) PT 100, etc.) and the controller working range. It also allows
selection of the control algorithm, error adjustment, indication hysteresis curve adjustment and alarm settings. The
controller is intended for mounting on control panels. It is user friendly and can be set through the push buttons on the
device front panel. The program can be password protected. When operational, the display shows the set temperature
and the current temperature.
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 61010-1
Type
Catalogue number
CD - 701
50124
Technical Specifications:
* Rated voltage: 230V, 50 Hz
* Permissible voltage deviation: 85 - 110% Un
* Input signal: from thermocouple, thermoresistor or unified signal (4-20mA; 0-10VDC)
* Output: Relay
* Emergency Output: Relay
* Electrical life: 1 000 000 cycles.
* Indication:
- Green LED – indicates the measured (current) temperature
- Red LED – indicates the set temperature
* Insulation resistance: 20 MΩ /min (500V)
* Impulse voltage stability: 2000V, 50Hz
* Operating temperature: -5°С + 65°С
* Relative Humidity: 35 - 85%RH
Mounting:
* on the front panel
F4
Thermocouple and thermo resistance
The thermo-measuring elements are designed for measuring the temperature in the point of contact between the surface
(warmed or cooled) and the thermo-element. They are a comparatively cheap and the most wide-spread method for
temperature measurement. The thermocouples are produced by accumulating two conductors from a special measuring
alloy in one common head. Each of these elements has a specific electromotive voltage at a specific temperature. The
temperature measuring is based on the difference in the electromotive powers between the hot and the cool end of the
thermocouple, while this difference in the form of voltage of several milivolts is supplied at the input of the
thermoregulator, which displays the measured temperature. Each thermocouple is produced and calibrated for measuring
of specific temperature ranges depending on the alloys of which it is made. When thermocouples measuring great
distances from the thermoregulators are used (more than 15 points), it is obligatory to use compensatory cable
corresponding to the type of the thermocouple. The thermo-resistant elements action is based on the capacity of specific
alloys, very often Pt100 to change their resistance when the temperature is changed. For each temperature value is
specified a value of resistance. This value is supplied at the input of the thermoregulator, which displays the measured
temperature.
Each thermoregulator operates with a specific type of thermo-element.
Type of thermo-element
Symbol
Temperature range
Type of catching
Sizes of the head
Size of the free end
Catalogue number
K
WRNT - 01
-15 ÷ 95°C
nut
30 x 35
1m
50K95G
K
WRNT - 01
0 ÷ 400°C
nut
30 x 35
1m
50K40G
K
WRNT - 31
0 ÷ 400°C
Bayonet
30 x 35
0.5m
50K40B
K
WRNT - 13
0 ÷400°C
explosion-proof
Ø6
2m
50K40EX
J
WRKT - 01
0 ÷400°C
nut
30 x 35
1m
50J40G
J
WRKT - 13
0 ÷400°C
explosion-proof
Ø6
2m
50J40EX
Pt100
WZPT - 03
-100 ÷250°C
explosion-proof
Ø6
2m
50PT95EX
Cu50
WZCT - 03
-50 ÷100°C
explosion-proof
Ø6
2m
50PT40EX
Timers, relays and displaying devices
Current measurement transformers
88
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Current measurement transformers MES - xx/xx type
The measurement transformers find application at current measuring, current regulation, systems for current
characteristics watching, systems for reactive energy compensation, signaling, etc. They are with x/5 gear ratio as X is
the inlet range of the transformer.
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 61010-1;
EN 60044-1; EN 60044-6
Technical data:
* Maximum operating voltage: 720V; 50Hz
* Admissible deviation of the operating current: 1.2 x In
* Inlet current: 50 – 1200A
* Outlet current: 5A
* Impulse voltage wear resistance: 4000V; 50Hz (1min)
* Operating temperature: -5-+65°C
* Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
* Precision class: 0.5
Mounting:
*Current transformers can be DIN rail mounted;
* vertically or horizontally to the power supplying rails according to the opening of the transformer
* Current transformers can be mounted on flat surfaces by use of fixing clamps.
F5
F
А
C
D
E
B
G
Overall dimensions
Type
А
B
C
D
E
F
MES - 75/30
MES - 75/40
MES - 86/60
88
88
117
52
52
57
30
30
50
41
41
184
77
77
77
31
41
61
G
31
41
61
MES - 75/30
Range
Precision
class
Capacity
VA
Weight
kg
Catalogue number
50/5
75/5
100/5
150/5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.5
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
45050А
45075А
45103А
45153А
Range
Precision
class
Capacity
VA
Weight
kg
Catalogue number
200/5
250/5
300/5
400/5
500/5
600/5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
45204А
45254А
45304А
45404А
45504А
45604А
Weight
kg
Catalogue number
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
45406А
45506А
45606А
45806А
45906А
45916А
MES - 75/40
5
5
10
10
10
15
MES - 86/60
Range
Precision
class
400/5
500/5
600/5
800/5
1000/5
1200/5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
Capacity
VA
15
15
15
15
15
15
Timers, relays and displaying devices
Displaying measurement devices
89
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Digital voltmeter/amperemeter EKDP 15 A/V
Digital device adjusted for DIN-rail mounting and offered in two types:
-amperemeter
-voltmeter
It is supplied with LCD display where the measurement quantity is displayed with numbers with 31/2 size. It has high
accuracy of analogue-digital transfer, measurement precision and electromagnetic interference stability. There is
possibility for adjustment of the measurement range through built in micro switches. Adjusted to measure constant current
(AD,DV) and alternating current (AA,VA) quantities.
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 61010-1
Type
EKDP-15AA
EKDP-15AD
EKDP-15VA
EKDP-15VD
Catalogue number
50117A
50117D
50116A
50116D
Technical data:
* Power supply voltage: 100 - 240V; 50Hz
* Inlet signal:
- operating as voltmeter: 2 – 700V (the range is adjusted from inside)
- operating as amperemeter: 5 – 2000A (the range is adjusted from inside)
Note: At current range over 5A a current measurement transformer should be used
* Consumption: <5A
* Impulse voltage wear resistance: 4000V; 50Hz (1min)
* Operating temperature: -5-+50°C
* Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
* Precision: 0.5% from the whole scale
* Display: LCD
* Weight: 150gr
Mounting:
* DIN-rail
inlet
F6
захранване
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 61010-1
Type
Catalogue number
EKDP7-AV
EKDP7-AA
EKDP7-DV
EKDP7-DA
EKDP7-HZ
50106
50107
50108
50109
50110
Digital voltmeter/amperemeter and frequency meter EKDP7
Digital device adjusted for mounting on the front panel of electrical boards and offered in the following types:
- amperemeter:
EKDP7 – AA – amperemeter for alternating current
EKDP7 – DA – amperemeter for direct current
- voltmeter:
EKDP7 – AV – voltmeter for alternating current
EKDP7 – DV – voltmeter for direct current
EKDP7 – Hz – frequency meter
It is supplied with LCD display where the measurement quantity is displayed with numbers with 31/2 size. It has high
accuracy of analogue-digital transfer, measurement precision and electromagnetic interference stability. There is
possibility for adjustment of the measurement range through built in micro switches. Adjusted to measure direct current
and alternating current quantities.
Technical data:
* Power supply voltage: 100 - 240V; 50Hz
* Inlet signal:
- operating as voltmeter: 2 – 700V (the range is adjusted from inside)
- operating as amperemeter: 5 – 2000A (the range is adjusted from inside
Note: For high current range a current measurement transformer should be used for alternating current device and a
measurement shunt for direct current.
* Consumption: <5A
* Impulse voltage wear resistance: 4000V; 50Hz (1min)
* Operating temperature: -5-+50°C
* Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
* Precision: 0.5% from the whole scale
* Display: LCD
* Weight: 130gr
0
Mounting:
* on the front panel
Timers, relays and displaying devices
Displaying measurement devices
90
www.elmarkgroup.eu
DIN Rail Mounted kWh Meters
Electronic single and three phase kWh meters intended for DIN rail mounting and active energy measurement. Meters
are suitable for home and commercial applications. They perform direct measurement of the real consumption of electric
power and the results are shown on the LCD display. The system doesn’t need any additional adjustment or calibration.
The range includes single and multi-tariff models.
DDS - 1Y - 45
Technical Specifications:
* Direct power consumption measurement: up to 20 (80) А; 50/60Hz
* Automatic temperature compensation
* LED phase voltage outage indicator.
* Indication for wrong cable connection
* Indication for wrong measurement
* Accuracy class: 1
* Number of tariffs: see the table below
* Meter constant: See the table below
Documents corresponding to the product:
Standard IEC 61036
Measuring range
Type designation
F6
DDS - 1Y - 45
DDS - 1Y - 100
DDS - 1Y - 100
Overall dimensions (mm) Catalogue number
height / width / depth
Number of
Tariffs
Meter constant
(imp/kWh)
Voltage
(V)
5 (45)
1
1000
230
63 / 18 / 118
50214
10 (100)
1
1600
230
65 / 76 / 100
50260
50280
50380
DDS - 1Y 80*
5 (80)
4
1600
230
65 / 76 / 100
DDS - 3Y 80*
20 (80)
4
800
3x230/400
65 / 76 / 100
* Note: The kWh meter is supplied with a built-in switch clock for the tariffs.
Analogue (pointer) panel meters SD72 type for build-in
Analogue devices adjusted for mounting on the front panel of electrical boards. Designed for frequency measurement,
capacity, alternating or direct voltage and current of the power supply grid, with overall dimensions 72x72mm. They are
manufactured on the basis of bridge measurement schemes. There is possibility for display change for the higher scopes
of measuring.
DDS - 1Y/3Y 80
Documents corresponding to the product:
Standard EN 60051-1
Тип на
измерв. с-ма
Наименование
панел метър
Kлас на
точност
Oбхват
Забележка
Kаталожен номер
-
50118
0-100А
current transfer 100/5
654010
0-200А
current transfer 200/5
654020
0-400А
current transfer 400/5
654040
0-600А
current transfer 600/5
654060
0-1000А
current transfer 1000/5
654100
0-1500А
current transfer 1500/5
654150
0-500V
-
50125
МЕ
0.5
45-65Hz
-
50126
amperemeter АС
MEMSI
1.5
0-40А
amperemeter АС
MEMSI
1.5
amperemeter АС
MEMSI
1.5
amperemeter АС
MEMSI
1.5
amperemeter АС
MEMSI
1.5
amperemeter АС
MEMSI
1.5
amperemeter АС
MEMSI
1.5
voltmeter АС*
MEMSI
1.5
frequency meter**
cosφ meter
MEMSI
1.5
3P 400V
-
50127
amperemeter DC
MEMC
1.5
0-5A
-
50128
amperemeter DC
MEMC
1.5
0-50A
outer resistor 60mV
50129
voltmeter DC
MEMC
1.5
0-50V
-
50130
voltmeter DC
MEMC
1.5
0-100V
-
50131
wattmeter
MEMSI
1.5
0-3000W 1P240V
-
50132
wattmeter
MEMSI
1.5
0-3000W 3P 3 line
-
50133
wattmeter
MEMSI
1.5
0-3000W 3P 4 line
-
50134
Note: MEMSI - magnetic-electrical movable steel instrument; MEMC – magnetic-electrical movable coil
* Possibility for supplying with voltage transformer X/100V for range expanding
** Possibility for voltage 110, 230, 400V
Elements for automation, monitoring and control
91
Limit switches
www.elmarkgroup.eu
The all-purpose limit switches are devices used in automatic systems as a control element. They are used for setting of
gearing limits. They are mounted on transport lines, conveyors and other linear progressive motion machines. They
feature a vibration-resistant metal shell.
Product conformity documentation:
Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1
All-purpose limit switch – series CSA-xxx
* Dielectric strength: 1000V AC
* Insulating resistance: 100mΩ
* Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 500 000 with active load
* Mechanical endirance (number of cycles): 1 000 000
* Gearing speed: 5mm/s to 0.5 m/s
* Rated voltage: 230V
Type
* Rated current: up to 10A
of the contact system
* Protection degree: IP66
(4) (3)
NO
NO
* Cable input: cable gland PG11
2
(1)
(2)
* Section of power supply conductor: up to 2mm
NC
NC
* Fastening strength of terminals: 6-8kgf/cm
Type of
the head
Power of
starting
Power of
release
Switching
position
General
movement
metal
cylinder
800g
400g
2.0mm
5.8mm
Type of
the head
Power of
starting
Power of
release
Switching
position
General
movement
800g
400g
2.0mm
5.8mm
Power of
starting
Power of
release
Switching
position
General
movement
800g
400g
2.0mm
5.8mm
Power of
starting
Power of
release
Switching
position
General
movement
100g
22.5°
Power of
release
Switching
position
100g
22.5°
Power of
release
Switching
position
General
movement
22.5°
50mm
cylinder
with metal
roll
Type of
the head
horizontal
lever with
metal roll
Type of
the head
adjustable
lever with
metal roll
Type of
the head
lever with
metal
roll
Type of
the head
spring
lever
400g
Power of
starting
400g
Power of
starting
150g
50g
95°
General
movement
95°
Rated
current
Type
10А-active
CSA - 001
4А-inductive
Rated
current
Type
10А-active
CSA - 003
4А-inductive
Rated
current
Type
10А-active
CSA - 012
4А-inductive
Rated
current
10А-active
4А-inductive
Rated
current
10А-active
4А-inductive
Rated
current
10А-active
4А-inductive
Type
CSA - 031
Type
CSA - 021
Type
CSA - 081
Catalogue
number
46А001
Catalogue
number
46А003
Catalogue
number
46А012
Catalogue
number
46А031
Catalogue
number
46А021
Catalogue
number
46А081
G1
Elements for automation, monitoring and control
92
Limit switches
www.elmarkgroup.eu
The all-purpose limit switches are installed on transport lines, conveyors and other linear progressive motion machines.
The miniature limit switch is mounted in an aluminum shell, resistant to vibrations, lubricants and water.
Product conformity documentation:
Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1
All-purpose limit switch – series TZ-6xxx
* Dielectric strength: 1000V AC
* Insulating resistance: 100mΩ
* Contact resistance: 15mΩ
* Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 500 000 with active load
* Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): 10 000 000
* Gearing speed: 0.1mm/s to 0.5 m/s
Type
of the contact system
* Rated voltage: 230V
NC
* Protection degree: IP65
COM
* Cable input: cable gland PG11
NO
2
* Section of power supply conductor: up to 1.5mm
G1
Type of
the head
Power of
starting
Power of
release
Switching
position
General
movement
metal
cylinder
350g
115g
0.5mm
5.5mm
Type of
the head
Power of
starting
Power of
release
Switching
position
General
movement
800g
240g
2mm
Power of
starting
Power of
release
Switching
position
General
movement
500g
100g
1mm
3.5mm
Power of
starting
Power of
release
Switching
position
General
movement
640g
230g
5mm
Power of
starting
Power of
release
Switching
position
640g
230g
5mm
Type of
the head
Power of
starting
Power of
release
Switching
position
spring
lever
150g
oil-resistant
metal
cylinder
Type of
the head
oil-resistant
cylinder
with
metal roll
Type of
the head
oil-resistant
horizontal
lever
with metal
roll
Type of
the head
oil-resistant
vertical
lever
with metal
roll
-
20°
5mm
6mm
General
movement
6mm
General
movement
-
Rated
current
15А-active
5A-inductive
Rated
current
15А-active
5A-inductive
Rated
current
Type
TZ-6001
Type
TZ - 6101
Type
15А-active
TZ - 6102
5A-inductive
Rated
current
Type
15А-active
TZ - 6104
5A-inductive
Rated
current
15А-active
5A-inductive
Type
TZ -6143
Type
TZ - 6106
Catalogue
number
466001
Catalogue
number
466101
Catalogue
number
466102
Catalogue
number
466104
Catalogue
number
466143
Catalogue
number
466106
Elements for automation, monitoring and control
93
Limit switches
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Limit switches of the CM series are used mainly as replacement of the limit switches of the TZ series or for setting the
movement limits of some types of equipment. The switches are supplied with screw cable terminals. They can work at
resistance loads as high as 15A, and are of single circuit type. Limit switches have high accuracy and can operate at wide
variety of speeds.
Items are compliant with the following standards:
EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1
Universal Limit Switch – Series CM-1xxx
* Dielectric Strength: 1000V AC
* Insulation Resistance: 100mΩ min. (at 500VDC)
* Contact Resistance: 5mΩ
* Electrical Life (No. of cycles): 500 000 with non-inductive load
* Mechanical Life (No. of cycles): 5 000 000
Type
* Operating frequency: 20 electrical operations/minute
of the contact system
* Operating speed: 0.1mm/s to 1.0m/s
NC
* Rated voltage: 230V
COM
NO
* Degree of protection: IP65
* Fastening strength of terminals: 6-8kgf/cm
Type of
the head
Power of
starting
Power of
release
Switching
position
General
movement
Rated
current
Type
Catalogue
number
350g
114g
0.4mm
5.5mm
15А-active
5A-inductive
CM - 1307
468105
Type of
the head
Power of
starting
Power of
release
Switching
position
General
movement
Rated
current
Type
Catalogue
number
Cylinder
and
transverse
metal roll
350g
114g
15А-active
5A-inductive
CM - 1309
468106
Type of
the head
Power of
starting
Power of
release
Switching
position
General
movement
Rated
current
Type
Catalogue
number
Cylinder
longitudinal
metal roll
350g
114g
0.4mm
5.5mm
Type of
the head
Power of
starting
Power of
release
Switching
position
General
movement
Metal
cylinder
350g
114g
0.4mm
1.6mm
Type of
the head
Power of
starting
Power of
release
Switching
position
General
movement
160g
22g
7.1mm
1.02mm
Power of
starting
Power of
release
Switching
position
General
movement
10g
3g
20mm
5.6mm
Metal
cylinder
Extended
metal roll
Type of
the head
Spring
lever
0.4mm
5.5mm
15А-active СМ - 1308
5A-inductive
Rated
current
Type
15А-active СМ - 1305
5A-inductive
Rated
current
15А-active
5A-inductive
Rated
current
15А-active
5A-inductive
Type
CM -1703
Type
CM - 1705
468109
Catalogue
number
468110
Catalogue
number
468113
Catalogue
number
468117
G1
Elements for automation, monitoring and control
94
Limit switches
www.elmarkgroup.eu
The all-purpose limit switches are devices used for setting gearing limits. They are mounted on transport lines, conveyors
and other linear progressive motion machines. They have small dimensions and a vibration-resistant metal shell with
plastic lid, resistant to oil and water.
Product conformity documentation:
Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1
All-purpose limit switch – series TZ-8xxx
* Dielectric strength: 1000V AC
* Insulating resistance: 100MΩ
* Contact Resistance: 25mΩ
* Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 500 000 with active load
* Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): 5 000 000
* Gearing speed: 5mm/s to 0.5 m/s
Type
* Rated voltage: 230V
of the contact system
* Protection degree: IP40
(4) (3)
NO
NO
* Cable input: cable gland PG11
2
(1)
(2)
* Section of power supply conductor: up to 2mm
NC
NC
* Fastening strength of terminals: 6-8kgf/cm
G1
Type of
the head
Power of
starting
lever with
plastic
roll
750g
Type of
the head
Power of
starting
adjustable
lever with
plastic
roll
Type of
the head
cylinder
with metal
roll
750g
Power of
starting
900g
Type of
the head
Power of
starting
metal
cylinder
900g
Type of
the head
Power of
starting
metal
rod
Type of
the head
spring
lever
750g
Power of
starting
150g
Power of
release
Switching
position
General
movement
100g
20°
50°
Power of
release
Switching
position
General
movement
100g
20°
50°
Power of
release
Switching
position
General
movement
150g
1.5mm
4.0mm
Power of
release
Switching
position
General
movement
150g
1.5mm
4.0mm
Power of
release
Switching
position
General
movement
100g
20°
50°
Power of
release
Switching
position
General
movement
-
30mm
-
Rated
current
5А-active
3А-inductive
Rated
current
5А-active
3А-inductive
Rated
current
5А-active
3А-inductive
Rated
current
5А-active
3А-inductive
Rated
current
5А-active
3А-inductive
Rated
current
5А-active
3А-inductive
Type
TZ - 8104
Type
TZ - 8108
Type
TZ - 8112
Catalogue
number
468104
Catalogue
number
468108
Catalogue
number
468112
Type
Catalogue
number
TZ - 8111
468111
Type
Catalogue
number
TZ -8107
Type
TZ - 8167
468107
Catalogue
number
468167
Elements for automation, monitoring and control
95
Limit switches
www.elmarkgroup.eu
The all-purpose limit switches are devices used for setting gearing limits. They are mounted on transport lines, conveyors
and other linear progressive motion machines. They have aluminium shell of high mechanic strength and resistance to
oil, water and pressure.
Product conformity documentation:
Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1
All-purpose limit switch – series CWL-xxx
* Dielectric strength: 1000V AC
* Insulating resistance: 100mΩ
* Contact resistance: 15mΩ
* Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 500 000 with active load
* Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): 10 000 000
* Gearing speed: 1mm/s to 2 m/s
Type
* Rated voltage: 230V
of the contact system
* Protection degree: IP66
(4) (3)
NO
NO
* Cable input: cable gland
(1)
(2)
* Metal shell
NC
NC
* Vibration-resistant
Type of
the head
Power of
starting
Power of
release
Switching
position
General
movement
Rated
current
Type
Catalogue
number
metal
cylinder
2720g
910g
2.0mm
6.4mm
10А-active
3А-inductive
CWLD
46LD
Type of
the head
Power of
starting
Power of
release
Switching
position
General
movement
Rated
current
Type
Catalogue
number
cylinder
with metal
roll
2720g
910g
2.0mm
5.6mm
10А-active
3А-inductive
CWLD2
46LD2
Type of
the head
Power of
starting
Power of
release
Switching
position
General
movement
Rated
current
Type
Catalogue
number
lever with
metal
roll
1360g
227g
20°
50°
Type of
the head
Power of
starting
Power of
release
Switching
position
General
movement
adjustable
lever with
metal roll
2720g
910g
20°
50°
Type of
the head
Power of
starting
Power of
release
Switching
position
General
movement
90±10°
10А-active
3А-inductive CWLCA2-2
Rated
current
Type
46LCA2-2
Catalogue
number
10А-active
3А-inductive CWLCA12-2-Q 46LCA12-2-Q
Rated
current
Type
Catalogue
number
10А-active CWLCA32-41 46LCA32-41
3А-inductive
10А-active
46LNJ
3А-inductive CWLNJ
fork
1200g
-
55°
oil-resistant
spring
lever
150g
-
28mm
Type of
the head
Power of
starting
Power of
release
Switching
position
General
movement
Rated
current
Type
Catalogue
number
metal rod
142g
28g
20°
50°
10А-active
3А-inductive
CWLCL
46LCL
G1
Elements for automation, monitoring and control
96
Limit switches
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Limit switches of the CZ 93 series are Safety Key Interlock Switches. They are used in object control systems with high
safety requirements. The limit switch body is mounted to the fixed system component, while the safety key is mounted to
the movable system component. System operation cannot start, unless a full interlocking is achieved. Safety key interlock
switches can operate at up to 10A non-inductive resistance load, 3A lamp load and 5A inductive load. They have high
operating accuracy at wide variety of speeds. These limit switches are available in two versions depending on the
operating contacts number: 2NC and NO+NC
Items are compliant with the following standards:
EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1
Universal Limit Switch – Series CZ93-xx
Dielectric Strength: 2500V AC
Insulation Resistance: 100mΩ min. (at 500VDC)
Contact Resistance: 25mΩ
Electrical Life (No. of cycles): 50 000 with non-inductive load
Mechanical Life (No. of cycles): 2 000 000
Operating frequency: 30 electrical operations/minute
Operating speed: 0.1mm/s to 0.5m/s
Rated voltage: 230V
Degree of protection: IP65
Type
of the contact system
CZ93-K1
Power of
release
Switching
position
General
movement
CZ-93BPG01 147N
29.4N
6 mm
28mm
CZ-93CPG01 147N
29.4N
6 mm
28mm
Power of
release
Switching
position
General
movement
CZ-93BPG02 147N
29.4N
6 mm
28mm
CZ-93CPG02 147N
29.4N
6 mm
28mm
Power of
release
Switching
position
General
movement
CZ-93BPG03 147N
29.4N
6 mm
28mm
CZ-93CPG03 147N
29.4N
6 mm
28mm
Type of
the head
G1
Type of
the head
Power of
starting
Power of
starting
Rated
current
Type
Catalogue
number
10А-active
3А-inductive
10А-active
3А-inductive
CZ93-K1
46CZ08
CZ93-K1
46CZ09
Rated
current
Type
Catalogue
number
10А-active
3А-inductive
10А-active
3А-inductive
CZ93-K2
46CZ10
CZ93-K2
46CZ11
Type
Catalogue
number
CZ93-K2
Type of
the head
CZ93-K3
Power of
starting
Key
Actuating
Type
Catalogue
number
Horizontal
CZ 93 - K 1
46CZ931
Vertical
CZ 93 - K 2
46CZ932
Adjustable
CZ 93 - K 3
46CZ933
Rated
current
10А-active
3А-inductive
10А-active
3А-inductive
CZ93-K3
46CZ12
CZ93-K3
46CZ13
Elements for automation, monitoring and control
97
Proximity sensor
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Proximity induction sensors are all-purpose switches used in machine systems and equipment for no contact surveillance
of metal elements motion. They can also be used in other machine systems applications as no contact control sensors for
level of liquids, control sensors for the speed and position of rotating chains, etc. They are developed on the base of PNP
and NPN transition. They have small dimensions and feature a metal cylindrical shell resistant to vibrations and a plastic
lid which is oil and water resistant.
All-purpose proximity switch – series LM xx
* Insulating resistance: ≥ 50 M Ω
* Gearing distance: from 2 mm to 7 mm
* Precision of repetition: 0.01
* Ambient temperature: -25˚С to +70˚С
* Gearing speed: 5mm/s
* Rated voltage: 6~36VDC; 90~230VAC
* Protection degree: IP 67
Object
Start
distance
EL-LM8-3002NA
2 mm
EL-LM8-3002NB
2 mm
EL-LM8-3002PA
2 mm
EL-LM8-3002PB
2 mm
EL-LM8-2002A
2 mm
Min. size of object: 8х8х1
Type
45
12
35
M8x1
EL-LM8
15
4
M12x1
58
17
8
15
4
M12x1
M18x1
30
M18x1
4
Start
distance
EL-LM12-3004NA
EL-LM12-3004NB
EL-LM12-3004PA
EL-LM12-3004PB
EL-LM12-2004A
4 mm
4 mm
4 mm
4 mm
4 mm
EL-LM18-3008NA
EL-LM18-3008NB
EL-LM18-3008PA
EL-LM18-3008PB
EL-LM18-2008A
70
60
10
Type
Type
55
4
Terminal repeater
Power supply
voltage
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
230 VAC
Type of
transition
NPN
NPN
PNP
PNP
SCR
Type of
contact
NO
NC
NO
NC
NO
Output
load
130 mA
130 mA
130 mA
130 mA
150 mA
Catalogue
number
46LM 8-32NA
46LM 8-32NB
46LM 8-32PA
46LM 8-32PB
46LM 8-22A
Power supply
voltage
Type of
transition
Type of
contact
Output
load
Catalogue
number
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
230 VAC
NPN
NPN
PNP
PNP
SCR
NO
NC
NO
NC
NO
200 mA
200 mA
200 mA
200 mA
300 mA
46LM 12-34NA
46LM 12-34NB
46LM 12-34PA
46LM 12-34PB
46LM 12-24A
Type
42
M22x1,5
EL-LM22-3010NA
EL-LM22-3010NB
EL-LM22-3010PA
EL-LM22-3010PB
EL-LM22-2010A
60
42
8
Start
distance
8 mm
8 mm
8 mm
8 mm
8 mm
Power supply
voltage
Type of
transition
Type of
contact
Output
load
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
230 VAC
NPN
NPN
PNP
PNP
SCR
NO
NC
NO
NC
NO
200 mA
200 mA
200 mA
200 mA
300 mA
Catalogue
number
46LM 18-38NA
46LM 18-38NB
46LM 18-38PA
46LM 18-38PB
46LM 18-28A
Power supply
voltage
Type of
transition
Type of
contact
Output
load
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
230 VAC
NPN
NPN
PNP
PNP
SCR
NO
NC
NO
NC
NO
200 mA
200 mA
200 mA
200 mA
300 mA
Catalogue
number
46LM 22-30NA
46LM 22-30NB
46LM 22-30PA
46LM 22-30PB
46LM 22-20A
Min. size of object: 18х18х1
60
27
27
Switch
Min. size of object:: 15х15х1
70
30
30
LC circuit
50
17
EL-LM12
C
L
M22x1,5
Start
distance
10 mm
10 mm
10 mm
10 mm
10 mm
Min. size of object: 22х22х1
50
17
15
4
Start
distance
Power supply
voltage
Type of
transition
Type of
contact
Output
load
Catalogue
number
EL-LM12-4002A
2 mm
230 V
inductive
NO
100 mA
46LM 12-44A
EL-LM12-4004A
4 mm
230 V
inductive
NO
300 mA
46LM 12-46A
M12x1
EL-LM18
Type
17
58
8
15
4
M12x1
Min. size of object: 15х15х1
70
30
55
M18x1
4
30
Start
distance
Power supply
voltage
Type of
transition
Type of
contact
Output
load
Catalogue
number
EL-LM18-4006A
5 mm
230 V
inductive
NO
100 mA
46LM 18-44A
EL-LM18-4008A
8 mm
230 V
inductive
NO
300 mA
46LM 18-48A
70
60
10
30
4
M18x1
EL-LM22
Type
Min. size of object: 18х18х1
G2
Elements for automation, monitoring and control
98
Capacitive sensors
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Capacitive sensors are used in machine systems and equipment for no-contact motion surveillance. They consist of two
coaxial electrodes, a condenser and RC generator. This type of sensors reacts to both metal and non-metal objects, as
the gearing distance for non-metal objects depends on their dielectric constants. They allow gearing distance adjustment
for non-magnetic conductive materials. They are developed on the base of PNP and NPN transition. They have small
dimensions and feature a metal cylindrical shell resistant to vibrations and a plastic lid which is oil and water resistant.
Capacitive sensors – series CM xx
* Insulating resistance: ≥ 50 M Ω
* Gearing distance: from 2 mm to 15 mm
* Precision of repetition: 0.01
* Ambient temperature: -25˚С to +70˚С
* Gearing speed: 5mm/s
* Rated voltage: 6~36VDC; 90~230VAC
* Protection degree: IP 54
EL-CM12
General scheme of a capacitive transducer
Object
17
EL-CM18
58
G3
8
15
4
RC generator
Switch
Output
amplifier stage
Start
distance
Power supply
voltage
Type of
transition
Type of
contact
Output
load
Catalogue
number
EL-CM12-3004NA
EL-CM12-3004NB
EL-CM12-3004PA
EL-CM12-3004PB
0~4 mm
0~4 mm
0~4 mm
0~4 mm
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
NPN
NPN
PNP
PNP
NO
NC
NO
NC
200 mA
200 mA
200 mA
200 mA
46CM 12-32NA
46CM 12-32NB
46CM 12-32PA
46CM 12-32PB
Type of
transition
NPN
NPN
PNP
PNP
SCR
Type of
contact
NO
NC
NO
NC
NO
M12x1
Type
70
30
55
M18x1
70
60
30
10
30
EL-CM18-3008NA
EL-CM18-3008NB
EL-CM18-3008PA
EL-CM18-3008PB
EL-CM18-2008A
Power supply
voltage
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
230 VAC
Output
load
200 mA
200 mA
200 mA
200 mA
300 mA
Catalogue
number
46CM 18-38NA
46CM 18-38NB
46CM 18-38PA
46CM 18-38PB
46CM 18-28A
M18x1
EL-CM24
Start
distance
0~8 mm
0~8 mm
0~8 mm
0~8 mm
0~8 mm
Type
4
4
75
30
55
Power supply
voltage
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
230 VAC
Type of
transition
NPN
NPN
PNP
PNP
SCR
Type of
contact
NO
NC
NO
NC
NO
Output
load
200 mA
200 mA
200 mA
200 mA
300 mA
Catalogue
number
46CM 24-12NA
46CM 24-12NB
46CM 24-12PA
46CM 24-12PB
46CM 24-12A
Type
Start
distance
Power supply
voltage
Type of
transition
Type of
contact
Output
load
Catalogue
number
EL-SM12-3110NA
EL-SM12-3110NB
EL-SM18-3110PA
EL-SM18-3110PB
10 mm
10 mm
10 mm
10 mm
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
NPN
NPN
PNP
PNP
NO
NC
NO
NC
200 mA
200 mA
200 mA
200 mA
46SM 12-31NA
46SM 12-31NB
46SM 18-31PA
46SM 18-31PB
Power supply
voltage
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
Type of
transition
inductive
inductive
inductive
inductive
Type of
contact
NO
NC
NO
NC
Output
load
100 mA
100 mA
300 mA
300 mA
Catalogue
number
46XM 18-35A
46XM 18-35B
46XM 24-38A
46XM 24-38B
EL-CM24-3012NA
EL-CM24-3012NB
EL-CM24-3012PA
EL-CM24-3012PB
EL-CM24-2012A
75
47
8
Start
distance
8 mm
8 mm
8 mm
8 mm
8 mm
Type
M24x1,5
30
Inductive
surface
M24x1,5
17
35
4
EL-SM12
M12x1
Note: Sensor of Hal
65
50
30
M18x1
4
Type
EL-XM18-305PMI
EL-XM18-305PMU
EL-XM24-308PMI
EL-XM24-308PMU
Start
distance
5 mm
5 mm
8 mm
8 mm
Note: MI -current type
MU - voltage type
EL-XM18
Elements for automation, monitoring and control
99
Photoelectrical sensors
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Photoelectrical sensors of the Gxx series are all-purpose switches used in machine systems and equipment for no
contact surveillance of motion of elements. They are based on the photoelectric principle of operation – inside the
sensor there is a photo signal emitter and receiver of the returned signal. There are three types of sensors: diffuse
sensors, reflector sensors and emitter-receiver sensors. These types of sensors differ in the way of returning the
signal. They allow for gearing distance adjustment. They are developed on the base of PNP and NPN transition. They
have small dimensions and feature a metal cylindrical shell resistant to vibrations and a plastic lid which is oil and
water resistant.
EL-G12
Technical features:
* Insulating resistance: ≥ 50 M Ω
* Gearing distance: from 2 mm to 7 mm
* Precision of repetition: 0.01
* Ambient temperature: -25˚С to +70˚С
* Gearing speed: 5mm/s
* Ratedl voltage: 6~36VDC; 90~230VAC
* Protection degree: IP 67
Truth beam type
Emitter
Receiver
Object
EL-G18
Type
Start
distance
Power supply
voltage
Type of
transition
Type of
contact
Type of
sensor
Catalogue
number
EL-G12-3A07NA
EL-G12-3A07PA
EL-G12-3B1NA
EL-G12-3B1PA
EL-G12-3C3NA
EL-G12-3C3PA
70 mm
70 mm
1m
1m
3m
3m
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
NPN
PNP
NPN
PNP
NPN
PNP
Ø12; l=50
Ø12; l=50
Ø12; l=50
Ø12; l=50
Ø12; l=50
Ø12; l=50
Diffuse
Diffuse
Reflector
Reflector
Truth beam
Truth beam
46G12A071
46G12A072
46G123B11
46G123B12
46G123C11
46G123C12
Type
Start
distance
Power supply
voltage
Type of
transition
Type of
contact
Type of
sensor
Catalogue
number
EL-G18-3A10NA
EL-G18-3A10PA
EL-G18-3B2NA
EL-G18-3B2PA
EL-G18-3C5NA
EL-G18-3C5PA
100 mm
100 mm
2m
2m
5m
5m
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
NPN
PNP
NPN
PNP
NPN
PNP
Ø18; l=70
Ø18; l=70
Ø18; l=70
Ø18; l=70
Ø18; l=70
Ø18; l=70
Diffuse
Diffuse
Reflector
Reflector
Truth beam
Truth beam
46G18A101
46G18A102
46G183B11
46G183B12
46G185C11
46G185C12
Type
Start
distance
Power supply
voltage
Type of
transition
Type of
contact
Type of
sensor
Catalogue
number
EL-G30-3A70NA
EL-G30-3A70PA
EL-G30-3B3NA
EL-G30-3B3PA
EL-G30-3C101NA
EL-G30-3C101PA
500 mm
500 mm
3m
3m
10 m
10 m
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
NPN
PNP
NPN
PNP
NPN
PNP
Ø22; l=70
Ø22; l=70
Ø22; l=70
Ø22; l=70
Ø22; l=70
Ø22; l=70
Diffuse
Diffuse
Reflector
Reflector
Truth beam
Truth beam
46G30A101
46G30A102
46G303B11
46G303B12
46G305C11
46G305C12
Type
Start
distance
Power supply
voltage
Type of
transition
Type of
contact
Type of
sensor
Catalogue
number
EL-G35-3A50NA
EL-G35-3A50PA
EL-G35-3B3NA
EL-G35-3B3PA
EL-G35-3C5NA
EL-G35-3C5PA
500 mm
500 mm
3m
3m
5m
5m
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
NPN
PNP
NPN
PNP
NPN
PNP
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
Diffuse
Diffuse
Reflector
Reflector
Truth beam
Truth beam
46G35A101
46G35A102
46G353B11
46G353B12
46G355C11
46G355C12
Type
Start
distance
Power supply
voltage
Type of
transition
Type of
contact
Type of
sensor
Catalogue
number
EL-G50-3A30NA
EL-G50-3A30PA
EL-G50-3B4NA
EL-G50-3B4PA
EL-G50-3C5NA
EL-G50-3C5PA
500 mm
500 mm
4m
4m
5m
5m
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
NPN
PNP
NPN
PNP
NPN
PNP
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
Diffuse
Diffuse
Reflector
Reflector
Truth beam
Truth beam
46G50A101
46G50A102
46G503B11
46G503B12
46G505C11
46G505C12
Type
Start
distance
Power supply
voltage
Type of
transition
Type of
contact
Type of
sensor
Catalogue
number
EL-BZJ-211
EL-BZJ-311
EL-BZJ-411
10 mm
9mm
9mm
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
Reflector
Reflector
Reflector
NO
NO
NO
Colour detector
Colour detector
Colour detector
46BZJ211
46BZJ311
46BZJ411
Рефлекторен тип
Emitter
Receiver
Object
EL-G30
Diffuse type
Emitter
EL-G35
EL-G50
EL-BZJ
Object
G4
Elements for automation, monitoring and control
100
Float switches
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Float switches
Float switches of the type QW-xx-xx are sealed units for direct pump control. They are intended for continuous liquid level
maintenance in pools, tanks or ponds exercised through direct control of the pumping in or out process in the respective
reservoir. They are pre-wired and depending on the chosen configuration can control either the pumping in, or pumping
out of the reservoir. They allow direct control of single phase pumps with mounted power of 1 kW. Float switches are
waterproof.
DHC1Y - SD
The automatic level control units of the DHC1Y-xx series are intended for mounting on pumping control panels. They do
not use any additional sensors, but conductive probes to contact the liquid. The unit sends low (harmless) voltage signals
to the probes and once a contact between a probe and liquid is established, the unit changes its contactors' state. Units
are available in three variants with different number of control contacts suitable for different applications. Each contact
can transfer current of up to 5A, which is enough to ensure control over the powerful pumps' contactors or to directly
control pumps with mounted power of 1 kW. The automatic level control units can be installed on a DIN rail.
QW - 70AB
Type
Number of
probes
(No. of levels)
DHC1Y - S
DHC1Y - SD
DHC1Y - T
1
3
1
Type
No. of levels
QW - M 15 - 3
QW - 70AB
G5
2
2
Output
Load
(A)
5
5
5
Output
Load
(A)
6
4
Accuracy
Operating
Voltage
(V)
Note
Catalogue
No.
±1%
±1%
±1%
230
230
230
2 pumps control
46DW001
46DW002
46DW003
Accuracy
Operating
Voltage
(V)
Note
Catalogue
No.
±1%
±1%
230
230
-
46DW004
46DW005
QW - M 15 - 3
Power supplies
The DRP-xx-xx series of power supplies are voltage reduction and rectification units ideally suited to provide stable power
supply of systems and equipment for contact-free movement monitoring elements (such as inductive, capacity and photo
sensors, logic elements and systems, etc.). They have small overall dimensions and can be installed on a DIN rail. The
power units have metal or plastic cases resistant to vibrations and plastic oil- and waterproof covers. They are able to
provide stable output voltage at comparatively fluctuating input voltage. Devices have built-in overload and short circuit
protection, allowing short time overload of up to 130%. Power supplies are available with various output voltages (5, 12,
15 and 24 V DC) and different output power rates.
Technical Specifications:
·Input voltage: 80 ~ 230V AC
·Over-voltage: 115 ~ 135% of the rated output voltage
·Overload: 120 ~ 120% of the rated output power
·Terminals: Input – 2 screw terminals; Output: 4 screw terminals;
·Protection level: IP44
·Power indicator
·Installation: DIN rail
·Cooling: Free air cooling convection
Type
Designation
Input Voltage
(V)
Output Load
(A)
Tolerance
Power
(W)
Dimensions W/H/L
(mm)
Catalogue
No.
DR - 45 -5
DR - 45 - 12
DR - 45 - 15
DR - 45 - 24
5
12
15
24
5
3.5
2.8
2
±2%
±1%
±1%
±1%
25
42
42
48
78 / 93 / 56
78 / 93 / 56
78 / 93 / 56
78 / 93 / 56
46DR455
46DR4512
46DR4515
46DR4524
Type
Designation
Input Voltage
(V)
Output Load
(A)
Tolerance
Power
(W)
Dimensions W/H/L
(mm)
Catalogue
No.
12
24
24
6.3
3.2
10
±2%
±1%
±1%
75
75
240
55.5 / 125.3 / 100
55.5 / 125.3 / 100
125.5 / 125.3 / 100
46DR7512
46DR4524
46DR2424
DR - 75 -12
DR - 75 - 24
DRP - 240 - 24
Elements for automation, monitoring and control
101
Rotary switches
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Rotary switches LW26 series
The rotary switches LW26 series are produced for switching on/off electrical circuits with commutated current from 20 to
160A. They are designed on the bases of the rotor-eccentric switching on which is realized through turning of the handle
to 60 or 90 degrees. The normal operation is used for commutation of two, three or four conductor systems. There are
special rotary switches that switch on under given connection schemes and are used to control motors, electric welding
machines and other consumers.
Documentation corresponding to the product:
Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-3-1
Technical data:
* Power supply voltage: 230/400V; 50Hz
* Insulation voltage: 690V
* Impulse voltage wear resistance: 6000V
* Mechanical wear resistance: 3x105 commutation cycles
* Operating temperature: -10 - +50°C
* Humidity: 35 – 85% RH
* Commuting capacity: up to 160A according to the tables
* Plastic: UV rays wear resistance
* :
- IP42 for the ordinary breakers mounted in a panel
- IP65 for the breakers offered in a box
* Cable connection: screw joining
* Tightening moment of the bolt: 1.33N
* Maximum section of the power supply conductors: according to the dimensions table
* Weight: according to the number of the contacts
Mounting:
* directly to the control panel
* thickness of the surface to which it is mounted: max 5mm
* дебелина на повърхността: max 5mm
G6
Dimensions
Designation
Front panel
Joining
conductor (mm2)
LW26-20
M1 panel
1x2.5
M1 panel with inscription field
Overall dimensions (mm)
A
B
C
Mounting dimensions (mm)
L
a
b
d1
d2
48
48
43
22 + 9.6n
36
36
Ø8.5 Ø4.5
48
60
43
22 + 9.6n
36
36
Ø8.5 Ø4.5
LW26-25
M1 panel
1x4.0
48
48
45.2
23+12.8n
36
36
Ø8.5 Ø4.5
LW26-32
M2 panel
1x6.0
64
64
58
29.2 + 12.8n
48
48
Ø10
Ø4.5
LW26-63
M2 panel
1x16
64
64
66
29.2 + 21.5n
48
48
Ø10
Ø4.5
LW26-125
M3 panel
1x35
88
88
84
35 + 26.5n
68
68
Ø13
Ø6
LW26-160
M3 panel
1x50
88
88
88
35 + 32.5n
68
68
Ø13
Ø6
* n - number of modules
Elements for automation, monitoring and control
102
Rotary switches
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Scheme
In (A)
Levels
Type number
Catalogue number
Q10
three-poles
switching on;
motor starting and
stopping;
voltage turning
on/off to the
consumers
20
25
32
63
125
160
2
2
2
2
2
2
LW26 - 20Q
LW26 - 25Q
LW26 - 32Q
LW26 - 63Q
LW26 - 125Q
LW26 - 160Q
492201
492251
492321
492631
492951
492961
Scheme
In (A)
Levels
Type number
Catalogue number
20
25
32
63
2
2
2
2
LW26GS - 20/04
LW26GS - 25/04
LW26GS - 32/04
LW26GS - 63/04
492207
492257
492327
492637
Scheme
In (A)
Levels
Type number
Catalogue number
N11
3-position –
2 start positions
and 1 stop;
for motor reversing
20
25
32
63
125
160
3
3
3
3
3
3
LW26 - 20N
LW26 - 25N
LW26 - 32N
LW26 - 63N
LW26 - 125N
LW26 - 160N
492202
492252
492322
492632
492952
492962
Scheme
In (A)
Levels
Type number
Catalogue number
25
63
125
160
4
4
4
4
Q11
three-poles switching
over;
motor starting and
stopping;
voltage turning on/off
to the consumers;
possibility for
access control
G6
S19
3-position –
2 start positions and
1 stop;
for two speed
motor control;
switching over
between charging*
Note: It is necessary that additional bridges be placed at switching over between charging
LW26 - 25S
LW26 - 63S
LW26 - 125S
LW26 - 160S
492253
492633
492953
492963
Elements for automation, monitoring and control
103
Rotary switches
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Scheme
S21
3-position
switching on star/delta
In (A)
25
63
Levels
Type number
Catalogue number
4
4
LW26 - 25 SD
LW26 - 63 SD
492025
492063
Levels
Type number
Catalogue number
3
3
LW26 - 32H 5881/3
LW26 - 63H 5881/3
492324
492634
0
Scheme
H5881/3 – 85
for welding transformer
windings switching over
In (A)
32
63
G6
Scheme
YH5/3 - 66
for voltage switching over
In (A)
20
Levels
3
Type number
LW26 - 20 YH5/3
Scheme
In (A)
Levels
Type number
LH3/3 - 58
for amperemeter
switching on to
current transformers
20
3
LW26 - 20 LH3/3
Scheme
Type number
IP code
IP
LW26 - 20-25-Q
LW26 - 32-Q
42
42
Box for LW26-20/25
Box for LW26-32
Adaptor for DIN-rail
for LW26-20/25
LW26 - 20-25-DIN
Catalogue number
492205
Catalogue number
492206
Catalogue number
492037
492038
492039
Elements for automation, monitoring and control
104
Rotary switches
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Scheme
4.I7168/7
In (A)
Levels
7
20
Type number
LW26 4.I7168/7
Catalogue
№
7
0
492028
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1
6
2
5
4
3
4.I7168/7
Scheme
4.H6518/5
In (A)
Levels
5
25
Type number
LW26 4.H6518/5
Catalogue
№
492029
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2
3
7
6
5
4
4.H6518/5
G6
Scheme
In (A)
Levels
Type number
Catalogue
№
LW30-20
20
3
LW30-20
492030
LW30-32
32
3
LW30-32
492031
LW30-40
40
3
LW30-40
492033
LW30-63
63
3
LW30-63
492034
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
LW30-20-100A
ON/OFF switch 3 poles
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
* Possibility for access control
IP55
Scheme
In (A)
Levels
Type number
Catalogue
№
LW30-32
32
3
LW30-32 IP54
492032
* Possibility for access control
LW30-20-100A
ON/OFF switch 3 poles
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
Elements for automation, monitoring and control
105
Buttons and LED indicators
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Buttons and LED indicators
These are devices used in control and indication systems, command boards and panels in industrial automation systems.
They are manufactured to commutate controlling circuits and to control the switching on or off executive mechanisms
such as relays, contactors, etc. The signal lamps and indicators find broad application in all industrial fields. The devices
endure short time current overload up to 10A, and normally they can commutate thermal current up to 6A in their contact
system. The connection to the contact terminals is through screw terminals to which operational conductors with section
up to 2.5mm2 can be joined.
Documentation corresponding to the product:
Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1
Overall dimensions
Diagram for drill the openings
Technical data:
* Insulation voltage: 660V; 50/60Hz
* Impulse voltage wear resistance: 6000V;
* Rated current: 6A (230V AC); 0.3A (230V DC)
* Short circuit protection: safety device 10A gG outside in the circuit
* Mechanical wear resistance: 1x106 commutation cycles
* Power of mechanical compression:
- at closing: 20N
- at opening: 8N
* Operating temperature: -20 - +70°C
* Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
* Tightening moment of the joining conductors: 0.15Nm
* Section of the conductor: 1x0.5; 1x0.75; 1x1; 1x1.5; 1x2.5mm2
Mounting:
* to a flat metal or plastic surface with thickness: max 4mmова повърхност с дебелина : max 4mm
* отвор с големина: Ø22.5mm
Type
Description
Type of contacts
Rated current
(А) at 400V
Colour
Catalogue
number
EL 2- BA 21
EL 2- BA 31
EL 2- BA 51
EL 2- BA 61
EL 2- BA 42
Button round
with spring reverse
NO
NO
NO
NO
NC
6
6
6
6
6
black
green
yellow
blue
red
401021
401031
401051
401061
401042
Type
Description
Type of contacts
Rated current
(А) at 400V
Colour
Catalogue
number
NO
6
green
401032
EL 2- BР 31
Button round
with spring reverse
EL 2- BР 42
G7
Note
Note
IP=65
Provided from silicon lid
NC
6
red
401043
IP=65
Provided from silicon lid
Elements for automation, monitoring and control
106
Buttons and LED indicators
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Type
Description
Voltage for the
indicator
Rated current
(А) at 400V
Colour
Catalogue
number
24V
24V
24V
24V
110V
110V
110V
110V
230V
230V
230V
230V
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
red
green
yellow
blue
red
green
yellow
blue
red
green
yellow
blue
401474
401374
401574
401674
401473
401373
401573
401673
401471
401371
401571
401671
Note
EL 2- BW3471
EL 2- BW3371
EL 2- BW3571
EL 2- BW3671
EL 2- BW3471
EL 2- BW3371
EL 2- BW3571
EL 2- BW3671
EL 2- BW3471
EL 2- BW3371
EL 2- BW3571
EL 2- BW3671
Button round
with spring reverse
and LED indicator
Type
Description
Type of
contacts
Rated current
(А) at 400V
Colour
Catalogue
number
Note
EL 2- BD 21
Switch with arrest
1NO
6
black
401421
two-position
EL 2- BD 33
Switch with arrest
2NО
6
black
401433
three-position
Type
Description
Type of
contacts
Rated current
(А) at 400V
Colour
Catalogue
number
Note
EL 2- BС 42
Button with head
“mushroom” type
1NС
6
red
401642
Type
Description
Type of
contacts
Rated current
(А) at 400V
Colour
Catalogue
number
Note
EL 2- BS 545
Button with head
“mushroom” type
1NС + 1NO
6
red
401545
elease with spinning
G7
spring reverse
Elements for automation, monitoring and control
107
Buttons and LED indicators
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Type
Description
Button double
EL 2- BW8475
Type
Description
EL 2- BG 21
Change-over switch
with switch
Type of
contacts
Rated current
(А) at 400V
1NO+1NС
6
Type of
contacts
Rated current
(А) at 400V
1NO
6
Colour
Catalogue
number
401845
Colour
Catalogue
number
401121
Note
Green and red button
+ LED indicator
Note
two-position
with switch
G7
AD56-22
LED индикация
EL02 - BЕ10x
Un
Colour
Type number
Catalogue number
230V AC
110V AC
24V AC/DC
110V AC
24V AC/DC
230V AC
230V AC
110V AC
24V AC/DC
230V AC
110V AC
24V AC/DC
230V AC
110V AC
24V AC/DC
230V AC
110V AC
24V AC/DC
white
white
white
amber
amber
amber
green
green
green
blue
blue
blue
yellow
yellow
yellow
red
red
red
AD56-22-W-230
AD56-22-W-110
AD56-22-W-24
AD56-22-А-110
AD56-22-А-24
AD56-22-А-230
AD56-22-РG-230
AD56-22-РG-110
AD56-22-РG-24
AD56-22-B-230
AD56-22-B-110
AD56-22-B-24
AD56-22-Y-230
AD56-22-Y-110
AD56-22-Y-24
AD56-22-R-230
AD56-22-R-110
AD56-22-R-24
401123
401111
401124
401211
401224
401223
401323
401311
401324
401523
401511
401524
401723
401711
401724
401423
401411
401424
Type of the contact
Colour
Type number
Catalogue number
1
1 NO
green
EL02 - BЕ101
401001
2
1 NC
red
EL02 - BЕ102
401002
Elements for automation, monitoring and control
108
Buttons and LED indicators
www.elmarkgroup.eu
EL1 - B134
Overall dimensions (mm)
L
H
W
68
68
50
Type of the contact
Colour
Type number
Catalogue number
1 NO
black
EL1-B134
401134
Type of the contact
Colour
Type number
Catalogue number
switching on
0-1
IP44
EL1 - B102
Overall dimensions (mm)
L
H
W
68
68
50
1 NO
green
EL1-B102
401102
68
68
50
1 NO
green
EL1-BP102
401132
Type of the contact
Colour
Type number
Catalogue number
EL1-B213
401213
EL1-BP213
401233
Type number
Catalogue number
EL1-B339
401339
EL1-BP339
401349
1 button with spring
return Ip44
1 button with spring
return Ip65
IP44/65
G7
EL1 - B213
Overall dimensions (mm)
L
H
W
104
68
50
104
68
50
2 buttons with spring
return Ip44
2 buttons with spring
return Ip65
1 NC
1 - red
1 NO
1 - green
1 NC
1 - red
1 NO
1 - green
IP44/65
EL1 - B339
Overall dimensions (mm)
L
H
W
134
68
50
3 buttons with spring
return Ip44
3 buttons with spring
return Ip65
134
68
50
IP44/65
EL1 - B174
Overall dimensions (mm)
Emergency button
with head “mushroom”
L
H
W
type Ø40
Release
through turning
IP44
68
68
50
Type of the contact
Colour
1 NO
1 - green
1 NC
1 - red
1 NO
1 - green
1 NO
1 - green
1 NC
1 - red
1 NO
1 - green
Type of the contact
Colour
Type number
Catalogue number
1 NC
red
EL1-B174
401174
Elements for automation, monitoring and control
109
Buttons and LED indicators for DIN-rail
These are devices used in control and indication systems adjusted for mounting in command boards and panels directly
on DIN-rail. They are manufactured to commutate controlling circuits and to control the switching on or off executive
mechanisms such as relays, contactors, etc. The signal lamps and indicators find broad application in all industrial fields.
The devices endure short time current overload up to 20A, and normally they can commutate current up to 10A with their
contact system. The connection to the contact terminals is through screw terminals to which operational conductors with
section up to 2.5mm2 can be joined. There are also designed buttons combined with lamps.
45±0.31
35±0.5
71 -0.43
66±0.37
49.5±0.31
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60 947-5-1
Technical data:
* Insulation voltage: 660V; 50/60Hz
* Impulse voltage wear resistance: 6000V;
* Rated current: up to 10A (230V AC)
* Short circuit protection: safety device 10A gG outside in the circuit
* Rated consumed current (for indicators and buttons combined with indicators): <20mA
* wear resistance (indicators): >2000h
* Mechanical wear resistance (buttons): 1x106 commutation cycles
* Power of mechanical compression:
- at closing: 20N
- at opening: 8N
* Operating temperature: -20 - +70°C
* Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
* Tightening moment of the joining conductors: 0.15Nm
* Section of the conductor: 1x0.5; 1x0.75; 1x1; 1x1.5; 1x2.5mm2
Mounting:
* to a DIN-rail
* Altitude: up to 2000m
G8
Type
Description
Rated current
(A) at 400V
Colour
Type of
contacts
Catalogue
number
ELB - BL - DIN
ELB - BL - DIN
ELB - G - DIN
ELB - G -DIN
ELB - Y - DIN
ELB - Y - DIN
ELB - R - DIN
ELB - R - DIN
button
button
button
button
button
button
button
button
<10
<10
<10
<10
<10
<10
<10
<10
black
black
green
green
yellow
yellow
red
red
2NO+ 1 NC
1NO+ 2 NC
2NO+ 1 NC
1NO+ 2 NC
2NO+ 1 NC
1NO+ 2 NC
2NO+ 1 NC
1NO+ 2 NC
401505
401506
401507
401508
401509
401510
401512
401513
Tип
Description
Voltage
(V)
Rated current
(A) at 400V
Colour
Catalogue
number
230V
230V
230V
230V
230V
<20
<20
<20
<20
<20
green
red
yellow
blue
white
401500
401501
401502
401503
401504
ELD - G - DIN
ELD - R - DIN
ELD - Y - DIN
ELD - B - DIN
ELD -W - DIN
lamp
lamp
lamp
lamp
lamp
Type
Description
Voltage
(V)
Rated current
(A) at 400V
Colour
Type of
contacts
Catalogue
number
ELBD - G - DIN
ELBD -G - DIN
ELBD - R - DIN
ELBD - R - DIN
ELBD - Y - DIN
ELBD - Y - DIN
button + lamp
button + lamp
button + lamp
button + lamp
button + lamp
button + lamp
230V
230V
230V
230V
230V
230V
<20
<20
<20
<20
<20
<20
green
green
red
red
yellow
yellow
2NO+ 1 NC
1NO+ 2 NC
2NO+ 1 NC
1NO+ 2 NC
2NO+ 1 NC
1NO+ 2 NC
401514
401515
401516
401517
401518
401519
Elements for automation, monitoring and control
110
Devices for telpher control
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Devices for telpher control MBP type
They represent different combinations of START and STOP buttons mounted in plastic boxes in different sizes. They are
connected to the operating circuits of cranes or telphers and serve as a remote control of their movement. They are
connected directly to the operating cable of the telpher and send commands directly to the executive mechanisms. They
are designed to provide protection from dust and moisture IP65.
Technical data:
* Supplying voltage: 230V; 50/60Hz
* Consumed power: <5VA
* Electrical wear resistance: 1x105 cycles
* Operating temperature: -10 +40°C
* Dampness: 35 – 85% RH
* Number of contacts: according to the number of the buttons
* Commuting capacity: up to 6A
* Plastic: UV rays wear resistance
* IP code: IP65
* Weight: according to the number of the contacts
Mounting:
* directly to the control cable of the telpher (crane)
They represent different combinations of START and STOP buttons mounted in plastic boxes in different sizes. They are
stop button
type
М В Р - А to
х хthe
х х operating
connected
circuits
of cranes or telphers and serve as a remote control of their movement. They are
button
type
– one-speed
or two-speed
(x91)
connected directly to the operating
cable of the(x81)
telpher
and send commands
directly to the executive mechanisms. They
number
of buttons
are designed to provide
protection
from dust and moisture IP65.
G9
Number
of buttons
Contact block and scheme
Technical
data:
* Supplying voltage: 230V; 50/60Hz
For the directions
* Consumed power: <5VA Emergency
* Electrical wear resistance: 1x105 cycles
* Operating2temperature: -10 +40°C
NO+NC
* Dampness: 35 – 85% RH
* Number of2 contacts: according
of the buttons
- to the number NO+NC
* Commuting capacity: up to 6A
* Plastic: UV
resistancebutton
2+1rays wearemergency
NO+NC
* IP code: IP65
emergency
* Weight: according
to the
numberbutton
of the contacts
2+1
NO+NC
with switch
Mounting:
* directly to2+1
the control emergency
cable of thebutton
telpher (crane)
NO+NC
Type
Catalogue
number
Package
MBP-A281
46281
1
MBP-A291
46291
1
MBP-A2813
46283
1
MBP-A2813К
46283K
1
MBP-A2913
46294
1
two-speed
two-speed
4
-
NO+NC
MBP-A481
46481
1
4
-
NO+NC
MBP-A491
46491
1
4+1
emergency button
NO+NC
MBP-A4813
46483
1
4+1
emergency button
with switch
NO+NC
MBP-A4813К
46483K
1
4+1
emergency button
NO+NC
MBP-A4913
46493
1
6
-
NO+NC
MBP-A681
46681
1
6
-
NO+NC
MBP-A691
46691
1
6+1
emergency button
NO+NC
MBP-A6813
46683
1
6+1
emergency button
with switch
NO+NC
MBP-A6813K
46683K
1
6+1
emergency button
NO+NC
MBP-A6913
46693
1
8
-
NO+NC
MBP-A881
46881
1
8
-
NO+NC
MBP-A891
46891
1
8+1
emergency button
NO+NC
MBP-A8813
46883
1
8+1
emergency button
with switch
NO+NC
MBP-A8813K
46883K
1
8+1
emergency button
NO+NC
MBP-A8913
46893
1
two-speed
two-speed
two-speed
two-speed
two-speed
two-speed
Elements for automation, monitoring and control
111
Warning lights and towers
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60 947-5-1
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Warning lights and towers
The revolving warning lights and towers are devices intended for use as status indicators in the human-machine control
systems. They are suitable for installation on control cabinets and panels or directly on machines. They are manufactured
in different color combinations to attract attention of operators working in a given production sector. Warning lights and
towers are widely used in almost any industrial branch. They can be mounted on movable components or such, creating
potential danger and can warn all workers for a critical situation with their blinking light and siren. These devices are
electrically connected through cables, protruding out of the lamp casing.
Technical Specification:
·Rated voltage: 230V; 50/60 Hz;
·Isolation voltage: 600V; 50/60 Hz;
·Impulse voltage stability: 6000V
·Rated power: see the tables below
·Short circuit protection: 1A gG external fuse
·Operating Temperature: - 20 oC + 70 oC
·Humidity: 35 – 85% RH
·Plastic cover: UV resistant polycarbonate not considered as being harmful to human health
Installation:
* Warning lights are fixed to the respective machine body with the studs protruding from the light plastic casing.
Type
LTE1101 - R
LTE1101 - G
LTE1101 - Y
LTE1101J - R
LTE1101J - G
LTE1101J - Y
LTE1101 - R
LTE1101 - G
LTE1101 - Y
LTE1101J - R
LTE1101J - G
LTE1101J - Y
Type
LTE1161 - R
LTE1161 - G
LTE1161 - Y
LTE1161 - R
LTE1161 - G
LTE1161 - Y
Description
Warning light
Warning light
Warning light
Warning light + siren
Warning light + siren
Warning light + siren
Warning light
Warning light
Warning light
Warning light + siren
Warning light + siren
Warning light + siren
Description
Warning light
Warning light
Warning light
Warning light
Warning light
Warning light
Voltage
(V)
12
12
12
12
12
12
230
230
230
230
230
230
Voltage
(V)
12
12
12
230
230
230
Rated Power
(W)
10
10
10
11
11
11
8
8
8
9
9
9
Rated Power
(W)
35
35
35
28
28
28
Colour
Red
Green
Yellow
Red
Green
Yellow
Red
Green
Yellow
Red
Green
Yellow
Colour
Red
Green
Yellow
Red
Green
Yellow
Catalogue
number
401525R
401525G
401525Y
401526R
401526G
401526Y
402525R
402525G
402525Y
402526R
402526G
402526Y
Catalogue
number
401527R
401527G
401527Y
402527R
402527G
402527Y
LTA
Type
Description
MS-290B
MS-390
Voltage
(V)
Rated Power
(W)
Colour
Catalogue
number
LTA205 - 1
LTA205 - 2
LTA205 - 3
LTA205 - 3J
LTA205 - 5
Tower
Tower
Tower
Tower + siren
Tower
12
12
12
12
12
4
8
12
12
18
1 - Red
2 - Red/Green
3 - Red/Yellow/Green
3 - Red/Yellow/Green
5 - Red/Yellow/Green/
Blue/Transparent
401528
401529
401530
401531
401532
LTA205 - 1
LTA205 - 2
LTA205 - 3
LTA205 - 3J
LTA205 - 5
Tower
Tower
Tower
Tower + siren
Tower
230
230
230
230
230
6
8
10
11
14
1 - Red
2 - Red/Green
3 - Red/Yellow/Green
3 - Red/Yellow/Green
5 - Red/Yellow/Green/
Blue/Transparent
402528
402529
402530
402531
402532
Sound level
(dB)
Catalogue
number
100
120
85
85
85
85
401533
401534
401535
401536
401537
401538
401539
401540
CB-4B
FA-01
Type
Description
Voltage
(V)
MS-290A
MS-390
CB-4
CB-4
CB-4
CB-4
FA-01
FA-01
siren
siren
alarm bell
alarm bell
alarm bell
alarm bell
fire alarm
fire alarm
230
230
12
24
110
230
24
230
Rated Power
(W)
60
160
G10
Security sensors
112
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Catalogue number: 46DS400
G11
Catalogue number: 46DS402
Catalogue number: 46DS403
Security sensors
Motion Infrared Sensor ST07
Motion detector with built-in infrared sensor, sensitive to changes in the infrared spectre. Once the sensor detects
movement within the detector's range, it sends a signal to the microprocessor to activate the system.
Applications:
* Lights switching on at motion detection.
* Security system activation at motion detection.
Technical Specifications:
* Power Supply: 230VAC, 50/60 Hz
* Rated Load:1200W
* Detection Range: 360°
* Reach: 6 m (max. <24°)
* Light Control: <10Lux
* Time Setting: 5 sec., 1 min, 5 min, 8 min
* Reaction to movement with speed of: 0.6 ~ 1.5 m/s
* Operating Temperature: - 20 ºC ~ 40 ºC
* Humidity: < 93% RH
Installation: ceiling mounting
Motion Infrared Sensor ST 01
Motion detector with built-in infrared sensor, sensitive to changes in the infrared spectre or to sound effects. Once the
sensor detects movement within the detector's range, it sends a signal to the microprocessor to activate the system.
Applications:
* Lights switching on at motion detection.
* Security system activation at motion detection.
Technical Specifications:
* Power Supply: 230VAC, 50/60 Hz
* Rated Load: 500W
* Detection Range: >140°
* Reach: 12m (max. <24°)
* Detection System:infrared radar
* Light Control : < 2Lux~1000Lux
* Time Setting: from 5 sec to 9 min
* Reaction to movement with speed of: 0.6 ~ 1.5 m/s
* Sound control sensitivity: adjustable 30db ~ 90dB
* Installation: wall mounting 0.4~1.8m; mounting into round console box for concrete and brick
* Humidity: < 93% RH
Motion Infrared Sensor ST 08
Motion detector with built-in infrared sensor, sensitive to changes in the infrared spectre or to sound effects. Once the
sensor detects movement within the detector's range, it sends a signal to the microprocessor to activate the system. The
sensor is intended for outdoor use.
Applications:
* Lights switching on at motion detection.
* Security system activation at motion detection.
Technical Specifications:
* Power Supply: 230VAC, 50/60 Hz
* Rated Load:1200W
* Detection Range:180°
* Reach: 9 m (max. <24°)
* Detection System:infrared radar
* Light Control:< 3Lux ~ daylight
* Time Setting: 5 sec to 9 min
* Reaction to movement with speed of: 0.6 ~ 1.5 m/s
* Degree of Protection: IP44
* Operating Temperature: - 20 ºC ~ 40 ºC
* Humidity: < 93% RH
* Installation: 0.5 ~ 3.5 m
Security sensors
Security sensors
Catalogue number: 46DS404
Catalogue number: 46DS405
Catalogue number: 46DS406
113
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Smoke Alarm ST82
Smoke alarm with photoelectric sensor. Whenever the sensor detects presence of smoke in the room as a result of fire,
the photoelectric sensor sends a signal to the microprocessor to activate the alarm.
Applications:
· Fire alarm activation at detecting smoke in the room.
Technical Specifications:
· Power Supply: 230VAC, 50/60 Hz
· Output Load:10 mA
· Alarm Sound: 85dB(3m)
· Operating Temperature: - 10 oC ~ 40 oC
· Humidity: < 93% RH
· Low Voltage Alarm: 5.5V~6.2V
· Support Battery: 7 ~ 15 days
· Installation: ceiling mounting
Smoke Alarm ST85-2
Smoke alarm with photoelectric sensor. Whenever the sensor detects presence of smoke in the room as a result of fire,
the photoelectric sensor sends a signal to the microprocessor to activate the alarm. Suitable for incorporation in building
fire and security systems.
Applications:
· Fire alarm activation at detecting smoke in the room.
Technical Specifications:
· Power Supply: 12/24 V DC
· Output Load:17 mA
· Alarm Sound: 85dB(3m)
· Operating Temperature: - 5 oC ~ 40 oC
· Humidity: < 93% RH
· Installation: ceiling mounting
Gas Leak Alarm ST 401
A gas leak sensor reacting to the presence of certain gases in closed rooms. It is powered by a standard electricity socket
and whenever gas concentration reaches dangerous levels the sensor alarm switches on. It has a built-in LCD display to
show level of exposure.
Applications:
· Alarm activation at detecting presence of gas in a closed room.
Technical Specifications:
· Power Supply: 230VAC, 50/60 Hz
· Output Load:4W
· Detection Ranges: propane-butane (LPG) 0.1 ~ 0.3%; natural gas 0.1 ~ 0.3%; coal gas: 0.1 ~ 0.3%
· Alarm Sound: 85dB(3m)
· Operating Temperature: - 10 oC ~ 50 oC
· Storage Temperature: - 25 oC ~ 55 oC
Water Leak Alarm ST 401
The water leak sensor is intended for installation in rooms endangered by flooding. It is powered by a 9V battery.
Whenever humidity level reaches a certain value, the sensor sends a signal for flooding danger and alarm switches on.
Applications:
· Alarm activation at detecting water in a room.
Technical Specifications:
· Power Supply: 9 V DC
· Alarm Sound: 85dB (3m)
· Operating Temperature: - 1 oC ~ 60 oC
· Response Time: 7 sec.
Catalogue number: 46DS407
G11
High power safety devices and isolating switches
Bases for high power safety devices
114
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Bases for high power safety devices
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 60269-1
The series bases for high power safety device is manufactured of permitivity alloy with mounted contact jaws of
electrolytic copper supplied with special springs for contact compression and easy fuse links taking out. All current
leading parts are connected to inlet outlet terminals with bolts; the terminals also end with bolts, to which the power
supply conductors are connected. The bases are offered in five type sizes corresponding to the five types of fuse links.
Overall dimensions
(mm)
Base type
Ød
A1
A2
A3
B1
B2
C1
SIST00
25
100
120
-
30
25
60
7.5
SIST 0
25
150
170
-
30
37
72
7.5
SIST1
25
175
200
30
58
38
84
10.5
SIST2
25
200
225
30
60
38
100
10.5
SIST3
25
210
250
30
60
40
105
10.5
C2
H1
Base type
Fuse link type
Rated
current (А)
Rated voltage
Un (V)
Weight
(gr)
Catalogue number
SIST00
NТ 00
до 160
600
193
12001
SISP00
NT 00
до 160
600
215
12001Р
Remark : Fuse bases SISP are made of porcelain
Base type
Fuse link type
Rated
current (А)
Rated voltage
Un (V)
Weight
(gr)
Catalogue number
SIST0
NТ 0
до 160
600
295
12010
SISP0
NT 0
до 160
600
319
12010P
Remark : Fuse bases SISP are made of porcelain
Base type
Fuse link type
Rated
current (А)
Rated voltage
Un (V)
Weight
(gr)
Catalogue number
SIST1
NТ 1
до 250
600
550
12100
SISP1
NT 1
до 250
600
550
12100P
Remark : Fuse bases SISP are made of porcelain
High power safety devices and isolating switches
Fuse links for high power safety devices
115
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Base type
Fuse link type
Rated current (А)
Rated voltage
Un (V)
Weight
(gr.)
Catalogue number
SIST2
NТ 2
до 400
600
770
12200
SISP2
NT 2
до 400
600
810
12200Р
Remark : Fuse bases SISP are made of porcelain
Base type
Fuse link type
Rated current (А)
Rated voltage
Un (V)
Weight
(gr.)
Catalogue number
SIST3
NТ 3
до 630
600
965
12300
SISP3
NT 3
до 630
600
987
12300P
Remark : Fuse bases SISP are made of porcelain
Fuse links for high power safety devices
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 60269-1
EN 60269-2
The series fuse links for high power safety devices is designed for short circuit protection. They are distinguished with
high speed of operation and high reliability. The element is a ceramic (porcelain) body filled with fine quartz sand for
voltaic arc lowering. In the ceramic body is mounted a fusible, specially profiled wafer connecting the current leading
terminals. These terminals are manufactured of copper alloy with special nickel coating and have the form of knives to
provide more contact surface. The fuse links correspond to “gL – gG” class which means that they are with common
function and normal response time.
NH Fuses
Two operating classes of NH Fuses are available:
· Operating class gL/gG – general purpose, line protection, slow acting
· Operating class “aM” – fast acting, suitable for motor overload and short circuit protection
Technical data:
* Rated voltage: 500V
* Rated short circuit current: 120 kAeff
* IP code: IP 00
* Ambient temperature: -5 to +55°C
* Altitude: up to 2000m
Overall dimensions
(mm)
Fuse link type
A
B
C
D
H
NT00
78
40
15
29
56.5
NT 0
125
68
15
29
56.5
NT1
135
68
21
48
62
NT 2
150
68
27
58
72
NT 3
150
68
33
67
84.5
H2
High power safety devices and isolating switches
Fuse links for high power safety devices
116
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Type
NT00
In (A)
16
Un (V)
Cat.№
class gL-gG
Cat.№
class aM
25
NT00
NT00
NT00
NT00
NT00
NT00
NT00
NT00
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
500,600
500,600
500,600
500,600
500,600
500, 600
10004
10005
10006
10008
10009
10012
10016
10004R
10005R
10006R
10008R
10009R
10012R
10016R
500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600
10001
10002
10003
10001R 10002R 10003R
NT 0
NT 0
NT 0
NT 0
NT 0
NT 0
NT 0
NT 0
NT 0
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
500,600
500,600
500,600
500,600
500,600
500, 600
10050
10063
10080
10090
10092
10096
10032R 10040R 10050R
10063R
10080R
10090R
10092R
10096R
Type
NT 1
NT 1
NT 1
NT 1
NT 1
NT 1
NT 1
In (A)
80
100
125
160
200
225
250
500,600
500,600
500,600
500,600
500, 600
10110
10112
10116
10120
10122
10125
10108R 10110R
10112R
10116R
10120R
10122R
10125R
NT 2
NT 2
NT 2
NT 2
NT 2
160
200
250
315
400
Type
NT 0
In (A)
16
Un (V)
Cat.№
class gL-gG
Cat.№
class aM
H2
NT00
Un (V)
Cat.№
class gL-gG
Cat.№
class aM
Type
In (A)
500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600
10015
10025
10015R 10025R
10032
10040
500,600 500,600
10108
Un (V)
500,600
500,600
500,600
500,600
500, 600
Cat.№
class gL-gG
10216
10220
10225
10231
10240
Cat.№
class aM
10216R
10220R
10225R
10231R
10240R
NT 3
NT 3
500
630
Type
In (A)
Un (V)
500,600
500,600
Cat.№
class gL-gG
10350
10363
Cat.№
class aM
10350R
10363R
High power safety devices and isolating switches
Isolating switches
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 60947-1;
EN 60947-3
117
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Designed in two types – horizontal and vertical. They represent a combination of low voltage isolating switch and high
power safety devices mounted in a common plastic corpus. They are used for low voltage distribution boards and
complete transformer substations (CTS) where visible circuit distribution is necessary. They provide safety and
convenience at fuse links change. The plastic corpus increases the IP code and the plastic lid provides simultaneous
circuits switching on/off. The lid allows easy removing which is additional measure at repairs. The vertical isolating
switches are mounted directly to the power supply rails which enables the exploitation and improves the safety of the
staff.
Technical data:
* Rated voltage: 500V
* Rated short circuit current: according to the mounted fuse links
* Number of poles: 3
* Impulse voltage wear resistance: 8kV
* Mechanical wear resistance: 3000 cycles
* IP code: IP 40
* Plastic: UV rays wear resistance
* Ambient temperature: -5 to +55°C
* Altitude: up to 2000m
Overall dimensions (mm)
Isolating
switch
type
A
B
C
D
E
THB -160
105
160
85
45
100
THB - 250
185
220
111
66
180
THB - 400
210
260
130
88
205
THB - 630
256
270
140
94.5
245
THB - horizontal
HG2B - vertical
Type
THB
THB
THB
THB
In
(A)
160
250
400
630
Un(V)
500, 660
500, 660
500, 660
500, 660
Fuse
link size
NT00
NT1
NT2
NT3
Cat.
№
44801
44802
44803
44804
Type
HG2B
HG2B
HG2B
HG2B
In
(A)
160
250
400
630
Un(V)
500, 660
500, 660
500, 660
500, 660
Fuse
link size
NT00
NT1
NT2
NT3
Cat.
№
44805
44806
44807
44808
H3
High power safety devices and isolating switches
Switch disconnector
118
www.elmarkgroup.eu
The series of switch disconnectors EL-D02 are developed for short-circuit protection. They have a high speed of start and
high reliability. They have a plastic body of inflammable plastics adapted for mounting on a DIN rail, where a porcelain
round plug, which is filled with fine quartz sand for extinguishing the electric arc. In this ceramic body is mounted melting,
specifically profiled plate, which connects the input power terminals. These terminals are produced from copper alloy with
especially laid nickel layer and contact with the projecting bolts from the plastic body. There is a plastic locking system for
the insertion for safety at substitution of burnt insertions. There are offered two types of insertions according to the degree
of quick operation: normally quickly operating ones – class “gG” and over quickly operating ones class “aR”
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 60947-3
VDE 0638
Technical characteristics:
* Rated voltage: 600V
* Insulation voltage: >2500V
* Rated current on short-circuit: 120 кА
* Direct mounting to the load
* Two insulated points to the load
* Protection rate: IP 44
* Cross-section of the supply conductors: up to 35mm2
* Environmental temperature: -5° до +55°С
* Altitude: up to 2000m
Type
H4
Number of poles
Rated current
(А)
Type of the fuse
Catalogue number
Box / Carton
EL - D02-32 1P
EL - D02-32 2P
EL - D02-32 3P
EL - D02-32 4P
EL - D02-63 1P
EL - D02-63 1P+N
EL - D02-63 2P
EL - D02-63 3P
EL - D02-63 3P+N
EL - D02-63 4P
1P
2P
3P
4P
1P
1P+N
2P
3P
3P+N
4P
32
32
32
32
63
63
63
63
63
63
RO 26/32
RO 26/32
RO 26/32
RO 26/32
RO 26/63
RO 26/63
RO 26/63
RO 26/63
RO 26/63
RO 26/63
10D0231
10D0232
10D0233
10D0234
10D0261
10D0262
10D0265
10D0263
10D0264
10D0266
6 / 180
3 / 180
2 / 180
1 / 180
6 / 90
3 / 90
3 / 90
2 / 90
1 / 120
1 / 120
Type of the fuse
class gG
Voltage
(V)
Rated current
(А)
Size of the fuse
Ød x h
Catalogue
number
RO 26/32
RO 26/32
RO 26/32
RO 26/32
RO 26/32
RO 26/32
RO 26/32
RO 26/32
RO 26/63
RO 26/63
RO 26/63
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
2
4
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
Ø11x 36mm
Ø11x 36mm
Ø11x 36mm
Ø11x 36mm
Ø11x 36mm
Ø15x 36mm
Ø15x 36mm
Ø15x 36mm
Ø15x 36mm
Ø15x 36mm
Ø15x 36mm
10R0232
10R0234
10R0236
10R0240
10R0246
10R0248
10R0245
10R0243
10R0640
10R0650
10R0660
Industrial plugs and sockets
Industrial plugs
119
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Industrial plugs and sockets Ht/HTN type
c
a
They are specially developed plugs and contacts designed for mounting in industrial buildings or outdoors. Made of
special high quality plastic with impurity against aging at sun light exposing and for increasing the mechanical strength.
They are designed in accordance with standard IEC 309-1 and provide reliable connection and high protection rate of the
staff from electrical current. They provide IP protection not less than IP 44/67. They are designed in types for indoors and
outdoors mounting, and with movable or static plugs and sockets.
b
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 60309-1;
EN 60309-2
Technical data:
* Rated voltage: 500V
* Rated short circuit current: according to the mounted protection in the boards
* Impulse voltage wear resistance: 8kV
* Mechanical wear resistance: 3000 cycles
* IP code: IP 44/67
* Plastic: UV rays wear resistance
* Ambient temperature: -5 to +55°C
* Altitude: up to 2000m
* Plugs and sockets: 6h
Model
Order type
number
In
(A)
HT-013
16
HT-023
32
Un
(V)
Dimensions (mm)
a /b /c
Ingress
protection
rating IP
Catalogue
number
1P+N+E
230
121 / 84 / 53
44
37013
10 / 100
1P+N+E
230
138 / 92 / 63
44
37023
10 / 100
Poles
Package /Box
I1
Model
Order type
number
In
(A)
HT-014
16
HT-024
HT-034
Un
(V)
Dimensions (mm)
a /b /c
Ingress
protection
rating IP
Catalogue
number
3P+E
400
121 / 84 / 51
44
37014
10 / 100
32
3P+E
400
138 / 92 / 63
44
37024
10 / 60
63
3P+E
400
230 / 109 / 36
44
37034
1 / 10
400
295 / 124 / 50
44
37044
1 / 10
Un
(V)
Dimensions (mm)
a /b /c
Ingress
protection
rating IP
Catalogue
number
Poles
3P+E
Package /Box
HT-044
125
Model
Order type
number
In
(A)
HT-015
16
3P+N+E
400
129 / 92 / 62
44
37015
10 / 100
HT-025
32
3P+N+E
400
149 / 97 / 70
44
37025
10 / 60
HT-035
63
3P+N+E
400
230 / 109 / 36
44
37035
1 / 10
HT-045
125
3P+N+E
400
295 / 124 / 50
44
37045
1 / 10
Model
Order type
number
In
(A)
Un
(V)
Dimensions (mm)
a /b /c
Ingress
protection
rating IP
Catalogue
number
HTN 0131
16
1P+N+E
230
120/71/12
67
37131
1 / 40
HTN 0231
32
1P+N+E
230
150/93/17
67
37231
1 / 40
Poles
Poles
Package /Box
Package /Box
Industrial plugs and sockets
Static industrial plugs
120
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Un
(V)
Dimensions (mm)
a /b /c
Ingress
protection
rating IP
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
3P+E
400
125/79/12
67
37141
10 / 60
32
3P+E
400
150/93/17
67
37241
10 / 40
63
3P+E
400
230/109/36
67
37341
1 / 10
HTN 0441
125
3P+E
400
230/109/36
67
37441
1 / 10
Model
Order type
number
In
(A)
Un
(V)
Dimensions (mm)
a /b /c
Ingress
protection
rating IP
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
HTN 0151
16
3P+N+E
400
133/87/12
67
37151
10 / 60
HTN 0251
32
3P+N+E
400
155/99.5/17
67
37251
10 / 40
HTN 0351
63
3P+N+E
400
230/109/36
67
37351
1 / 10
HTN 0451
125
3P+N+E
400
295/124/50
67
37451
1 / 10
Model
Order type
number
In
(A)
Un
(V)
Dimensions (mm)
a /b /c
Ingress
protection
rating IP
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
HT-513
16
1P+N+E
230
121/79
44
37513
10 / 60
HT-523
32
1P+N+E
230
131/83
44
37523
10 / 40
Model
Order type
number
In
(A)
Un
(V)
Dimensions (mm)
a /b /c
Ingress
protection
rating IP
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
HT 514
16
3P+E
400
121/76
44
37514
10 / 60
HT 524
32
3P+E
400
131/83
44
37524
10 / 40
HT 534
63
3P+E
400
131/83
44
37534
10 / 10
Model
Order type
number
In
(A)
Un
(V)
Dimensions (mm)
a /b /c
Ingress
protection
rating IP
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
HT 515
16
3P+N+E
400
123/79
44
37515
10 / 60
HT 525
32
3P+N+E
400
132/84
44
37525
10 / 40
HT 535
63
3P+N+E
400
132/84
44
37535
1 / 10
Model
Order type
number
In
(A)
HTN 0141
16
HTN 0241
HTN 0341
Poles
Poles
Static industrial plugs
I2
Poles
Poles
Poles
Industrial plugs and sockets
121
Static industrial contacts for exposed wiring
www.elmarkgroup.eu
20
Æ
34
5
13
32.5
a
a
b
Pg21
58
70.5
Model
Order type
number
In
(A)
HT-113
16
HT-123
32
Model
Order type
number
In
(A)
HT-114
16
Un
(V)
Dimensions (mm)
a /b
Ingress
protection
rating IP
Catalogue
number
1P+N+E
230
126 / 86
44
37113
1 / 60
1P+N+E
230
141 / 97
44
37123
1 / 60
Un
(V)
Dimensions (mm)
a /b
Ingress
protection
rating IP
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
3P+E
400
132 / 91
44
37114
10 / 60
Poles
Poles
Package/Box
HT-124
32
3P+E
400
141 / 96
44
37124
10 / 60
HT-134
63
3P+E
400
193 / 122
44
37134
1 / 10
HT-144
125
3P+E
400
220 / 140
44
37144
1 / 10
I3
Un
(V)
Dimensions (mm)
a /b
Ingress
protection
rating IP
3P+N+E
400
129 / 96
3P+N+E
400
141 / 98
63
3P+N+E
400
125
3P+N+E
400
Model
Order type
number
In
(A)
HT-115
16
HT-125
32
HT-135
HT-145
Model
Order type
number
In
(A)
HTN 1131
16
HTN 1231
32
Poles
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
44
37115
10 / 60
44
37125
10 / 60
193 / 122
44
37135
1 / 10
220 / 140
44
37145
1 / 10
Un
(V)
Dimensions (mm)
a /b/c
Ingress
protection
rating IP
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
1P+N+E
230
101/150/93.5
67
37731
10 / 40
1P+N+E
230
114/162/93.5
67
37631
10 / 40
Poles
Industrial plugs and sockets
Movable industrial contacts for exposed wiring
122
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Un
(V)
Dimensions (mm)
a /b/c
Ingress
protection
rating IP
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
3P+E
400
104/150/93.5
67
37741
10 / 60
32
3P+E
400
116/162/93.5
67
37641
10 / 40
63
3P+E
400
171/170/230
67
37842
1 / 10
HTN 1441
125
3P+E
400
171/170/230
67
37844
1 / 10
Model
Order type
number
In
(A)
Un
(V)
Dimensions (mm)
a /b/c
Ingress
protection
rating IP
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
Model
Order type
number
In
(A)
HTN 1141
16
HTN 1241
HTN 1341
Poles
Poles
HTN 1151
16
3P+N+E
400
107/150/93.5
67
37751
10 / 60
HTN 1251
32
3P+N+E
400
116/162/93.5
67
37651
10 / 40
HTN 1351
63
3P+N+E
400
171/170/230
67
37852
1 / 10
HTN 1451
125
3P+N+E
400
171/170/230
67
37854
1 / 10
a
b
Movable industrial contacts for exposed wiring
I4
H4
Dimensions (mm)
a /b
Ingress
protection
rating IP
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
230
130 / 96
44
37213
10 / 100
230
149 / 90
44
37223
10 / 60
Un
(V)
Dimensions (mm)
a /b
Ingress
protection
rating IP
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
3P+E
400
131 / 96
44
37214
10 / 100
32
3P+E
400
149 / 90
44
37224
10 / 60
HT-234
63
3P+E
400
230/109
44
37234
1 / 10
HT-244
125
3P+E
400
290/124
44
37244
1 / 10
Model
Order type
number
In
(A)
Un
(V)
Dimensions (mm)
a /b
Ingress
protection
rating IP
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
HT-215
16
3P+N+E
400
139 / 90
44
37215
10 / 60
HT-225
32
3P+N+E
400
154 / 100
44
37225
10 / 60
HT-235
63
3P+N+E
400
230/100
44
37235
1 / 10
HT-245
125
3P+N+E
400
290/124
44
37245
1 / 10
Model
Order type
number
In
(A)
HT-213
16
1P+N+E
HT-223
32
1P+N+E
Model
Order type
number
In
(A)
HT-214
16
HT-224
Poles
Poles
Poles
Un
(V)
Industrial plugs and sockets
123
Industrial built in contacts
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Un
(V)
Dimensions (mm)
a /b
Ingress
protection
rating IP
Catalogue
number
1P+N+E
230
131/90
67
37831
1 / 60
1P+N+E
230
149/90
67
37931
1 / 60
Un
(V)
Dimensions (mm)
a /b
Ingress
protection
rating IP
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
131/76
67
37841
10 / 60
149/90
67
37941
10 / 40
400
271/115
67
37942
1 / 10
400
295/137
67
37943
1 / 10
Ingress
protection
rating IP
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
139/90
67
37851
10 / 60
400
154/100
67
37951
10 / 40
400
240/112
67
37952
1 / 10
400
300/126
67
37953
1/6
Un
(V)
Dimensions (mm)
a /b
Ingress
protection
rating IP
Catalogue
number
Model
Order type
number
In
(A)
HTN 2131
16
HTN 2231
32
Model
Order type
number
In
(A)
HTN 2141
16
3P+E
400
HTN 2241
32
3P+E
400
HTN 2341
63
3P+E
HTN 2441
125
3P+E
Model
Order type
number
In
(A)
HTN 2151
16
3P+N+E
400
HTN 2251
32
3P+N+E
HTN 2351
63
3P+N+E
HTN 2451
125
3P+N+E
Poles
Poles
Poles
Un
(V)
Dimensions (mm)
a /b
Package/Box
I5
Industrial built in contacts
Model
Order type
number
In
(A)
HT-413
16
HT-423
32
Model
Order type
number
In
(A)
HT-414
16
HT-424
32
Poles
1P+N+E
Poles
3P+E
Package/Box
230
70/85
44
37413
10 / 100
230
80/97
44
37423
10 / 60
Ingress
protection
rating IP
Catalogue
number
Un
(V)
Dimensions (mm)
a /b
Package/Box
400
70/85
44
37414
10 / 100
400
80/97
44
37424
10 / 60
Industrial plugs and sockets
Distribution boxes with industrial contacts
124
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Model
Order type
number
In
(A)
HT-415
16
HT-425
32
Model
Order type
number
In
(A)
Poles
Un
(V)
16
тип шуко
230
Model
Order type
number
In
(A)
Poles
Un
(V)
213L-2P-W
16
230
HT-105SR
Un
(V)
Poles
3P+N+E
1P+N+E
Dimensions (mm)
a /b
Ingress
protection
rating IP
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
400
70/85
44
37415
10 / 60
400
80/97
44
37425
10 / 60
Ingress
protection
rating IP
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
44
37105
20 / 200
Dimensions (mm)
a /b
Ingress
protection
rating IP
Catalogue
number
Package/Box
450
44
37003
1 / 42
Dimensions (mm)
a /b
70/70
I6
Distribution boxes with mounted industrial plugs and sockets and protection devices
They are specially designed distribution boxes with mounted industrial plugs and sockets fabric cabled with possibility for
protection devices mounting (breakers, residual current devices). They are designed for building sites mounting, industrial
projects for power supply of mobile – movable consumers, exhibition centers, outdoor concerts or repair- reconstruct
operations with temporary character. The boxes are made of special high quality plastic with impurity against aging at sun
light exposing and for increasing the mechanical strength. They are designed in accordance with standard EN 60529 and
provide reliable connection and high protection rate of the staff from electrical current. They provide IP protection not less
than IP 44/67.
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 60309-1;
EN 60309-2; EN 60 529
Technical data:
* Rated voltage: 400V
* Rated short circuit current: according to the mounted safety fuses and residual current devices
* Impulse voltage wear resistance: 8kV
* Power supply cable: 5x2.5mm2
* Mechanical wear resistance: 3000 cycles
Inlet power supply
Type
Outlets
* IP code: IP 44
conductor(mm2)
* Plastic: UV rays wear resistance
* Ambient temperature: -5 to +55°C
3 contacts 16A
3х2.5
EDB 100 - 401
* Altitude: up to 2000m
1P+N+E
* Overall dimensions of the box: 136x94x425 mm
Catalogue
number
53401
EDB 100 - 402
5х2.5
1 contact 16A 3P+N+E и
2 contacts 16A 1P+N+E
53402
EDB 200 - 401
3х2.5
3 contacts 32A
1P+N+E
53421
EDB 100 - 501*
3x2.5
3 contacts 16A
1P+N+E
53501*
Note: * The distribution box is supplied with extension cable with section 3x2.5mm2
and length 1.5m
112
Plastic boxes and metal cabinets for distribution boards
Plastic distribution boards
125
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Plastic distribution boards for exposed wiring
The distribution boards are designed for mounting in newly built buildings or buildings in reconstruction. They are a
module box with mounted protective devices of the given flats electrical current circuit circles. They are supplied with
transparent door for each row opening upwards to 90°. They are made of white self-extinguishing plastic, resistant to
heat and high temperature with IP code IP 40. The mounted device in the box is protected from direct contact to the
current leading parts. They are offered with DIN-rail for device mounting and terminal strips for the neutral and earthing
conductor joining. Mounted directly on the walls with screws.
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 62 208;
EN 60439-1;EN 60 439-3
Technical data:
* Maximum insulation voltage: 690V; 50Hz
* wear resistance to heat: UL 94
* IP code: IP 40
* Class of current limiting: 2
Number of rows
Module capacity
(number of devices)
Terminal
strips
number
Openings
number
L
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
6
8
12
18
24
36
2
2
2
3
4
6
8
9
9
14
17
25
34
43
110
150
190
260
365
270
310
Dimensions (mm)
W
H
205
205
205
205
220
330
475
75
75
75
75
75
75
85
Catalogue number
60040
60060
60080
60120
60180
60240
60360
Package / Box
1 / 20
1 / 20
1 / 20
1 / 10
1 / 10
1 / 10
1/5
Plastic distribution boards for buried wiring
The distribution boards are designed for mounting in newly built buildings or buildings in reconstruction. They are a
module box with mounted protective devices of the given flats electrical current circuit circles. They are supplied with
transparent door for each row opening upwards to 90°. They are made of white self-extinguishing plastic, resistant to
heat and high temperature with IP code IP 40. The mounted device in the box is protected from indirect contact to the
current leading parts. They are offered with DIN-rail for device mounting and terminal strips for the neutral and earthing
conductor joining. Mounted through building-in in openings on the wall under plaster or in hollow-wall (through special
clasps).
Technical data:
* Maximum insulation voltage: 690V; 50Hz
* wear resistance to heat: UL 94
* IP code: IP 40
* Class of current limiting: 2
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 62 208;
EN 60439-1;EN 60 439-3
Number of rows
Module capacity
(number of devices)
Клеморед
брой
Openings
number
L
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
6
8
12
18
24
36
2
2
2
3
4
6
8
9
9
14
17
25
34
43
110
150
190
260
365
270
310
Dimensions (mm)
W
H
205
205
205
205
220
330
475
75
75
75
75
75
75
85
Catalogue number
60041
60061
60081
60121
60181
60241
60361
Package / Box
1 / 20
1 / 20
1 / 20
1 / 10
1 / 10
1 / 10
1/5
Note: At building-in in hollow-wall it is supplied with clasps for hollow-wall – 4pcs with catalogue number 60085. There are 10 sets of clasps in a package.
catalogue number 60085
J1
Plastic boxes and metal cabinets for distribution boards
Metal distribution boards
126
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Moisture-proof distribution boards for exposed wiring
The distribution boards are designed for mounting in newly built buildings or buildings in reconstruction. They are a
module box with mounted protective devices of the given flats electrical installation current circles. They are supplied with
transparent door for each row opening upwards to 90ْ. They are made of white non-self-extinguishing plastic, resistant to
heat and high temperature. The special design of the lids and gaskets provides IP code IP 55. The mounted device in the
box is protected from indirect contact to the current leading parts. They are offered with DIN-rail for device mounting and
terminal strips for the neutral and earthing conductor joining. Mounted directly on the walls with screws.
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 62 209;
EN 60439-1;EN 60 439-3
Technical data:
* Maximum insulation voltage: 690V; 50Hz
* wear resistance to heat: UL 94
* IP code: IP 55
* Class of current limiting: 2
Type
WP4
WP6
WP8
WP12
WP18
WP24
Number
of rows
1
1
1
1
1
2
Module
capacity
(number of
devices)
Terminal
strips
number
Openings
number
L
4
6
8
12
18
24
2
2
2
3
4
6
9
9
14
17
25
34
214
214
214
270
378
340
Dimensions (mm)
W
H
127
162
216
214
233
288
Catalogue number
93
93
93
93
93
93
Package / Box
60100
60101
60102
60103
60104
60105
1 / 20
1 / 20
1 / 20
1 / 10
1 / 10
1/5
Stainless metal cabinets for distribution boards
The distribution boards are designed for mounting in newly built buildings or buildings in reconstruction. They are a metal
cabinet with different dimensions. They are supplied with a special lock, plate for fixing the device, lid for the input-output
conductors, earthing stud, gaskets, etc. The door of the box can change its opening direction. They are manufactured of
whole stainless sheet steel processed with anti-corrosion and decorative coating powder style laid. They are used for low
voltage distribution boards in food, wine and tobacco industries and at special requirements regarding the corrosion wear
resistance in industrial projects. Mounted directly on the walls with screws.
J2
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 62 208;
EN 60439-1;EN 60 439-3
Technical data:
* Rated voltage: up to 1000V
* Maximum current: up to 800A
* Material: stainless steel
* IP code: IP 65
Mounting:
* vertically to a flat surface
Metal board
Type
Thickness of sheet metal
(mm)
dimensions (mm)
L (height)
W (width)
Catalogue number
H (depth)
SXF 25/25/15
1.0
250
250
150
54025
SXF 30/25/15
1.0
300
250
150
54030
SXF 40/30/20
1.0
400
300
200
54040
SXF 50/40/20
1.2
500
400
200
54050
SXF 60/40/20
1.2
600
400
200
54060
SXF 70/50/20
1.2
700
500
200
54070
SXF 80/60/25
1.5
800
600
250
54080
SXF 100/80/30
1.5
1000
800
300
54100
SXF 120/80/30
1.5
1200
800
300
54120
112
Plastic boxes and metal cabinets for distribution boards
Metal distribution boards
127
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Metal cabinets for distribution boards
The metal cabinets are designed for mounting in newly built buildings or buildings in reconstruction. They are a metal box
with different dimensions. They are supplied with a special lock, plate for fixing the device, lid for the input-output
conductors, earthing stud, gaskets, etc. The door of the box can change its opening direction. They are manufactured of
whole sheet metal processed with anti-corrosion and decorative coating powder style laid. They are used for low voltage
distribution boards in housing buildings, offices, shops and industrial projects. Mounted directly on the walls with screws.
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 62208;
EN 60439-1;EN 60 439-3
Technical data:
* Rated voltage: up to 1000V
* Maximum current: up to 1250A
* Material: steel
* Coating: powder style painting
* IP code: IP 65
Mounting:
* vertically to a flat surface
Type
Thickness of the steel metal
(mm)
Metal board
dimensions (mm)
L (height) W (widht) H (depth)
Nominal working current In
(A)
Catalogue number
JXF 25/25/15
1.0
250
250
150
80
53025
JXF 25/30/15
1.0
250
300
150
100
53026
JXF 30/25/15
1.0
300
250
150
100
53030
JXF 30/40/20
1.0
300
400
200
160
53031
JXF 40/30/20
1.0
400
300
200
160
53040
JXF 40/50/20
1.2
400
500
200
250
53041
JXF 50/40/20
1.2
500
400
200
250
53050
JXF 40/60/20
1.2
400
600
200
250
53051
JXF 60/40/20
1.2
600
400
200
250
53060
JXF 70/50/20
1.2
700
500
200
350
53070
JXF 80/60/25
1.5
800
600
250
400
53080
JXF 100/80/30
1.5
1000
800
300
630
53100
JXF 120/80/30
1.5
1200
800
300
630
53120
JXF 140/80/30
1.5
1400
800
300
800
53140
JXF 180/80/30
1.5
1800
800
300
1000
53188
JXF 180/100/30*
1.5
1800
1000
300
1250
53180
Note: *Metal board with double door
J2
Plastic boxes and metal cabinets for distribution boards
Metal distribution boards
128
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 60439-1;
EN 60 439-3
Electric Switchboards and Panels with Type-Approval Certificates
The company has produced and successfully passed the type-approval procedures for the following metal and plastic
case electric boxes, switchboards and gear:
-Tower Mounted Switchgear
- Low Voltage Meter Box
- Low Voltage Main Switchboard
- Distribution Switchboard
- Power Compensation System
Low Voltage Meter Box Type TEPO
Low Voltage Main Switchboard Type GRT
Tower Mounted Switchgear Type MTT
Power Compensation System Type CCU
J2
Distribution Switchboard Type KRSH
Plastic boxes and metal cabinets for distribution boards
Module plastic distribution boards
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 60439 -1
EN 60439 -5
DZ xxxxxxxxE*
Bottom
129
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Modular plastic distribution switchboards
Plastic distribution boards of various sizes. Intended for extension or distribution of cable lines during electrical works.
They can also be used as meter boxes. Switchboards are made of polycarbonate or thermostatic fiber glass. They are
resistant to chemical attacks, thermal and UV radiation. Separate modules can be interconnected to form power
switchboards of different sizes. Boards are mounted on the wall surface by use of screws.
Technical Specifications:
·Resistance: chemical agents, weak acids, alkali, oils, salts, etc.
·Rated Voltage: up to 690V
·Maximum Current: up to 800A
·Dielectric Strength: 1012 (Ωm)
·Flammability: 960°C
·Thermal Deformation: over 240°C
·Operating Temperature: -35°C + 40°C
·Material: SMC
·Fire Resistance Class: Fv 0
·IP Code: IP44
·Recyclable
Mounting:
* Vertically, on a flat surface or column.
NOTE: Boxes are supplied with the respective fixtures depending on the method of installation (bottom or column).
Board Type
Material Type
L (mm)
H (mm)
W (mm)
Catalogue №
ZH 24664001
ZH 32664001
ZH 24666001
ZH 32666001
ZH 24668001
ZH 32668001
ZH 2466A002
ZH 3266A002
ZH 2466A202
ZH 3266A202
SMC
SMC
SMC
SMC
SMC
SMC
SMC
SMC
SMC
SMC
400
400
600
600
800
800
1000
1000
1200
1200
660
660
660
660
660
660
660
660
660
660
240
320
240
320
240
320
240
320
240
320
53Z201
53Z301
53Z202
53Z302
53Z203
53Z303
53Z204
53Z304
53Z205
53Z305
Board Type
Material Type
L (mm)
H (mm)
W (mm)
Catalogue №
ZH 24896001
ZH 32896001
ZH 24898001
ZH 32898001
ZH 2489A002
ZH 3289A002
ZH 2489A202
ZH 3289A202
SMC
SMC
SMC
SMC
SMC
SMC
SMC
SMC
600
600
800
800
1000
1000
1200
1200
890
890
890
890
890
890
890
890
240
320
240
320
240
320
240
320
53Z206
53Z306
53Z207
53Z307
53Z208
53Z308
53Z209
53Z309
Board Type
Material Type
L (mm)
H (mm)
W (mm)
Catalogue №
ZH 241256001
ZH 321256001
ZH 241258001
ZH 321258001
ZH 24125A002
ZH 32125A002
ZH 24125A202
ZH 32125A202
SMC
SMC
SMC
SMC
SMC
SMC
SMC
SMC
600
600
800
800
1000
1000
1200
1200
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
240
320
240
320
240
320
240
320
53Z211
53Z311
53Z212
53Z312
53Z213
53Z313
53Z214
53Z314
Board Type
Material Type
L (mm)
H (mm)
W (mm)
Catalogue №
600
600
600
600
800
800
800
800
1000
1000
1000
1000
1200
1200
1200
1200
500
750
500
750
500
750
500
750
500
500
750
750
500
500
750
750
320
320
240
240
320
320
240
320
240
320
240
320
240
320
240
320
53DZ216
53DZ217
53DZ316
53DZ317
53DZ218
53DZ219
53DZ318
53DZ319
53DZ220
53DZ320
53DZ221
53DZ321
53DZ222
53DZ322
53DZ223
53DZ323
DZ 24506001
SMC
DZ 24756001E*
SMC
DZ 32506001
SMC
DZ 32756001E*
SMC
DZ 24508001
SMC
DZ 24758001E*
SMC
DZ 32508001
SMC
DZ 32758001E*
SMC
DZ 2450A001
SMC
DZ 3250A001
SMC
DZ 2475A001E*
SMC
DZ 3275A001E*
SMC
DZ 2450A201
SMC
DZ 3250A201
SMC
DZ 2475A201E*
SMC
DZ 3275A201E
SMC
DZ xxxxxxxxE* Column mounting
Board Type
Material Type
L (mm)
W(mm)
Catalogue №
SZH 040024
SZH 060024
SZH 080024
SZH 100024
SZH 120024
SZH 060032
SMC
SMC
SMC
SMC
SMC
SMC
400
600
800
1000
1200
600
240
240
240
240
240
320
53SZ211
53SZ212
53SZ213
53SZ214
53SZ215
53SZ312
J3
Boxes and cable cabinets for electric panels
130
Cable support systems
www.elmarkgroup.eu
The universal cable support systems are used for construction of cable link in closed production premises for direct
mounting on even vertical surfaces. They are perforated metal grates and accessories with standard lengths and sizes,
which are assembled on the basis of a “click” system. They allow quick construction of cable systems with many angles
and derivations. The offered choice is from tin with thickness up to 1.0 mm. and standard length of 3 m.
Type
Symbol
Type
Channel perforated
Channel perforated
Channel perforated
Channel perforated
Channel perforated
Cable Tray width/height/
sheet thickness
(mm)
Cable Tray
Length
(m)
Cable Tray
Weight
(kg)
60
60
60
60
60
3
3
3
3
3
3.40
4.40
5.30
9.20
12.0
Cable Tray
Length
(m)
Weight
kg
Catalogue
number
-
1.00
1.30
1.95
3.15
5.05
56ТS05030
56TS10060
56TS20060
56TS30060
56TS40060
Cable Tray
Length
(m)
Weight
kg
Catalogue
number
-
0.55
0.78
1.64
2.51
3.95
56KS05030
56KS10060
56KS20060
56KS30060
56KS40060
Cable Tray width/height/
sheet thickness
(mm)
Lid
Length
(m)
Weight
kg
Catalogue
number
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
2
2
2
2
2
-
1.16
1.16
1.96
3.62
4.70
0.39
0.59
1.33
1.86
0.41
0.82
1.67
2.38
50
100
200
300
400
PK -50/30*
РК - 100/60
PK - 200/60
PK - 300/60
PK - 400/60
0.55
0.75
0.75
0.90
0.90
Cable Maximum Number of 4х2.5
Weight
Cables per Tray
(kg/m)
4.6
10.8
21.6
43.2
54.0
12
24
43
65
86
Catalogue
number
56PK5030
56РК10060
56PK20060
56PK30060
56PK40060
Note: PK50/30 is a punched tray, not a click system
Type
Type
Symbol
Т-derivation
Т-derivation
Т-derivation
Т-derivation
Т-derivation
TS - 50/30
TS - 100/60
TS - 200/60
TS - 300/60
TS - 400/60
Type
Type
Symbol
Angle
Angle
Angle
Angle
Angle
J4
Cable Tray width/height/
sheet thickness
(mm)
50
100
200
300
400
Type
Symbol
Upright lid
Upright lid
Upright lid
Upright lid
Upright lid
Angle lid
Angle lid
Angle lid
Angle lid
Т-lid
Т-lid
Т-lid
Т-lid
PPK - 50
РРK - 100
PPK - 200
PPK - 300
PPK - 400
PKS - 100
PKS - 200
PKS - 300
PKS - 400
PTS - 100
PTS - 200
PTS - 300
PTS - 400
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
Cable Tray width/height/
sheet thickness
(mm)
50
100
200
300
400
KS -50/30
KS - 100/60
KS - 200/60
KS - 300/60
KS - 400/60
Type
60
60
60
60
60
50
100
200
300
400
100
200
300
400
100
200
300
400
60
60
60
60
60
0.55
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.55
0.55
0.55
0.7
0.7
0.55
0.55
0.7
0.7
0.55
0.55
0.7
0.7
Type
Load
kg/m 450
56PPK0530
56PPK10060
56PPK20060
56PPK30060
56PPK40060
56PKS10060
56PKS20060
56PKS30060
56PKS40060
56PTS10060
56PTS20060
56PTS30060
56PTS40060
Type
Symbol
Needed pcs.
for 3 m
Catalogue
number
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
1set
56KLS6000
56RS50
56NSC100
56NSC200
56NSC300
56NSC400
56NLK 50
56NLK 100
56NLK 200
56NLK 300
56NLK 400
56VE0300
56RE2010
56RE3010
56RE3020
56RE4010
56RE4020
400
350
300
250
225
200
150
canal 300/60 & 400/60
canal 100/60 & 200/60
100
90
80
70
65
60
55
50
45
40
35
30
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9 2.0
Distance between carriers
m
Universal click
Binding member
Ceiling carrier
Ceiling carrier
Ceiling carrier
Ceiling carrier
Wall carrier
Wall carrier
Wall carrier
Wall carrier
Wall carrier
Bolt set
Reduction 200/100
Reduction 300/100
Reduction 300/200
Reduction 400/100
Reduction 400/200
KLS 60
RS 50
NSC100
NSC200
NSC300
NSC400
NLK 50
NLK 100
NLK 200
NLK 300
NLK 400
VE -03
Plastic boxes and metal cabinets for distribution boards
Moisture-proof junction boxes
131
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Moisture-proof junction boxes
Plastic junction boxes with different shapes and dimensions. Designed for cable lines extension or tapping at cable
installations laying. Manufactured of ABS material with openings for inlet-outlet conductors, firmed with rubber stoppers to
provide the corresponding IP code. Chemical, thermal and UV rays wear resistance. Mounted directly on the walls with
screws.
Documentation corresponding to the product:
Standard: EN 60670-1
IP44
Technical data:
* Rated voltage: up to 1000V
* Material: ABS
* IP code: IP 44/66
Mounting:
* vertically to a flat surface
IP44
Ingress protection
rating IP
Catalogue number
17
44
8070
17
44
8071
22.5
18.5
44
8072
100 100 70
30
23
54
8073
150 110 70
28
23
54
8076
-
150 150 70
35
29
54
8074
-
200 100 70
35
29
54
8075
WB200/155/80
-
200 155 80
35
29
54
8077
WB255/200/80
-
255 200 80
35
29
54
8078
WB300/250/120
-
300 250 120
35
29
54
8079
WB400/350/120
-
400 350 120
35
29
54
8080
Box type
IP54
IP54
Box dimensions (mm)
Gaskets dimensions (mm)
D
L
W
H
d
C
WB50/50
50
-
-
50
22.5
WB80/50
80
-
-
50
22.5
WB85/85/50
-
85
85
50
WB100/100/70
-
WB150/110/70
-
WB150/150/70
WB200/100/70
J5
Uninterruptible power supply and generators
132
Uninterruptible power supply systems UPS
www.elmarkgroup.eu
The UPS power supply systems are developed for provision of uninterruptible power supply to computer rooms, financial
and communication centers, medical equipment, schools, or consumers with special requirement to power supply
parameters. UPS power supplies are available in various combinations for different input/output voltages, low or high
output frequency, and different output signal curves. They have microprocessor parameter control and LCD display. The
UPS are supplied with maintenance-free rechargeable batteries, the charging level of which is controlled by the
microprocessor monitoring system. UPS power supply systems are suitable for installation in different premises. They
have a “Cold Start” function and high protection level. The can provide power supply for a different period of time
depending on the model.
Technical Specifications:
·Input Voltage: 230/400 V AC
·Output Voltage: 230/400 V AC
·Overload Capacity: 125% for 60 sec.
·Transfer Time: O ms
·Output Frequency: 50 Hz
·Power Capacity: see the tables below
·Display: LCD
·Communication Interface: RS485/232 communication port or relay contactor
·Battery Power Indicator
·Input/Output Voltage Indicator
·Sine Wave Output: THD ≤ 3%
Battery
Number
Catalogue
number
7Аh / 12V
24Аh / 12V
38Аh / 12V
65Аh / 12V
100 Аh / 12V
1
1
1
1
1
46UPS7B
46UPS24B
46UPS38B
46UPS65B
46UPS100B
Low Frequency Inverters with sigle-phase output – for medical and telecommunications equipment, etc.
Type
Input
Voltage
(V AC)
Output
Voltage
(V AC)
Battery
Voltage
(V CD)
Capacity
(KVA)
Number of
Battery
Battery
FR - UK 60
FR - UK 80L
FR - UK 1110
FR - UK 3115
FR - UK 3120T
FR - UK 3130T
FR - UK 3140T
230
230
230
400
400
400
400
230
230
230
230
230
230
230
192
192
192
192
348
348
348
6
8
10
15
20
30
40
16
16
16
16
29
29
29
7Аh / 12V
no
no
no
no
no
no
Overall Size
(W/L/H)
(mm)
230 / 635 / 690
230 / 635 / 690
300 / 740 / 700
300 / 740 / 700
400 / 800 / 1180
400 / 800 / 1180
400 / 800 / 1180
Weight
(kg)
61
80
92
135
203
225
273
Catalogue
number
46UPS206
46UPS208
46UPS210
46UPS415
46UPS420
46UPS430
46UPS440
Low Frequency Inverters with three-phase output
K1
Type
Input
Voltage
(V AC)
Output
Voltage
(V AC)
Battery
Voltage
(V CD)
Capacity
(KVA)
Number of
Battery
Battery
FR - UK 3320
FR - UK 3330
FR - UK 3340
FR - UK 3350
400
400
400
400
400±1%
400±1%
400±1%
400±1%
348
348
348
348
20
30
40
50
29
29
29
29
no
no
no
no
Overall Size
(W/L/H)
(mm)
500 / 800 / 1180
500 / 800 / 1180
500 / 800 / 1180
500 / 800 / 1180
Weight
(kg)
Catalogue
number
236
296
300
355
46UPS442
46UPS443
46UPS444
46UPS445
High Frequency Inverters – for computer rooms, bank servers, etc.
Type
KR - 6000
KR - 1110S
KR - 3110
KR - 3115
KR - 3120
KR - 3320L
KR - 3330L
Input
Voltage
(V AC)
Output
Voltage
(V AC)
Battery
Voltage
(V CD)
Capacity
(KVA)
Number of
Battery
Battery
Overall Size
(W/L/H)
(mm)
Weight
(kg)
Catalogue
number
230
230
400
400
400
400
400
230±2%
230±2%
230±2%
230±2%
230±2%
400±1%
400±1%
120
240
240
240
240
348
348
6
10
10
15
20
20
30
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
7Аh / 12V
7Аh / 12V
no
no
no
no
no
253 / 637 / 700
253 / 637 / 500
253 / 637 / 700
253 / 637 / 700
253 / 637 / 700
400 / 800 / 1180
400 / 800 / 1180
95
100
35
52
55
120
150
46UPS406
46UPS410
46UPS411
46UPS415
46UPS420
46UPS412
46UPS413
Computer Inverters – for computer rooms, bank servers, etc.
Type
UPS 500
UPS 700
UPS 1000
UPS 1600
UPS 2000
Input
Voltage
(V AC)
Output
Voltage
(V AC)
Battery
Voltage
(V CD)
Capacity
(KVA)
Number of
Battery
Battery
Overall Size
(W/L/H)
(mm)
Weight
(kg)
Catalogue
number
230
230
230
230
230
230±10%
230±10%
230±10%
230±10%
230±10%
90
90
140
140
140
500
700
1000
1600
2000
1
1
2
3
3
7Аh / 12V
7Аh / 12V
7Аh / 12V
7Аh / 12V
7Аh / 12V
90 / 325 / 165
90 / 325 / 165
120 / 380 / 210
156 / 450 / 215
156 / 450 / 215
5
5.5
11
20
23
46UPS500
46UPS700
46UPS800
46UPS900
46UPS909
Uninterruptible power supply and generators
133
Generators
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Power Generators are particularly designed to provide electricity to consumers in case of main power supply shut off, or
in desolated areas, or in places without existing power distribution networks. They are available in various combinations
of input and output voltages, engine power outputs, fuel types and noise protection levels. Power generators are supplied
with modern controller with a LCD display. Parameters setting are easy to enter through the touch buttons. Generators
are supplied with input power supply monitoring system and automatically start at input voltage drop. They have built-in
batteries to power the controller and aid the generator starting. Battery charging level is controlled by the microprocessor
monitoring system. Power Generators can be easily placed indoor or outdoor and boast a high level of protection.
Technical Specifications:
* Control Method: Manual or Automatic
* Output Voltage: 230/400 V AC; 50 Hz
* Electrical starter
* Noise Level: up to 51 dB
* Emergency Stop Button
* Stop at preliminary set overvoltage or undervoltage
* Stop/Indication at current overload
* Stop/Indication at frequency deviation
* Indicator for engine oil level too low
* Stop/Indication at coolant overheating
* Stop/Indication at engine fuel level too low
* Stop/Indication at engine speed too high/low
* Battery Status Indicator
* Input/Output Voltage Indicator
* History of Faults
NOTE: Price include chargable batteries.
Input Voltage
(V AC)
Generated
Power
(kVA)
230
230
400
230
230
400
3.2
5
10.5
3.3
5.5
10.5
Input Voltage
(V AC)
Generated
Power
(kVA)
KDE16SS
KDE25SS
KDE35SS
KDE20SS3
KDE35SS3
KDE60SS3
KDE75SS3
KDE100SS3
KDE120SS3
230
230
230
400
400
400
400
400
400
14
20
33
18.5
31
54
66
85
100
Type
Input Voltage
(V AC)
Generated
Power
(kVA)
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
100
130
150
188
200
250
325
375
410
462
500
570
630
Type
KDE3500E
KDE6500E
KDE12EA3
KGE4000X
KGE6500E
KGE12E3
Type
BF-V109
BF-V142
BF-V165
BF-V206
BF-V220
BF-V275
BF-V358
BF-V412
BF-V450
BF-V500
BF-V550
BF-V625
BF-V688
Fuel
Fuel Type Consumption
(g/kWh)
diesel
diesel
diesel
gasoline
gasoline
gasoline
276
275
385
374
374
370
Fuel
Fuel Type Consumption
(g/kWh)
320
320
300
320
300
290
290
290
290
Overall Size
(W/L/H)
(mm)
air cooling
655 / 480 / 530
air cooling
720 / 492 / 655
water cooling 1030 / 600 / 650
air cooling
675 / 520 / 540
air cooling
855 / 510 / 540
air cooling
910 / 785 / 710
Cooling
Type
Overall Size
(W/L/H)
(mm)
Cooling
Type
Overall Size
(W/L/H)
(mm)
23.8
29.5
35.3
41.8
46.5
53.4
70.9
78.3
86.0
95.5
104.5
118.7
131.0
water cooling
water cooling
water cooling
water cooling
water cooling
water cooling
water cooling
water cooling
water cooling
water cooling
water cooling
water cooling
water cooling
2080/750/1450
2280/750/1450
2400/870/1450
2550/1050/1500
2550/1050/1500
2650/1120/1595
2950/1120/1595
3100/1100/1630
3100/1100/1630
3300/1160/2000
3300/1160/2000
3300/1160/2000
3400/1380/2050
Note: For BF serie - Engine: VOLVO, Alternator: Stamford
Continuous
Work
Time (h)
Catalogue
number
11
6
7.5
20
12
5.5
46GD2030
46GD2060
46GD3010
46GB2030
46GB2060
46GB3010
Continuous
Work
Time (h)
Catalogue
number
water cooling 1570 / 780 / 1050
12
water cooling 1900 / 950 / 1200 10.5
water cooling 2250 / 950 / 1300
7
water cooling 1570 / 780 / 1050
10
water cooling 1900 / 950 / 1200 9.5
water cooling 2250 / 950 / 1300 5.5
water cooling 2700 / 1140 / 1500
6
water cooling 2700 / 1150 / 1500
5
water cooling 2700 / 1160 / 1500
4
(l/h)
Fuel
Fuel Type Consumption
diesel
diesel
diesel
diesel
diesel
diesel
diesel
diesel
diesel
diesel
diesel
diesel
diesel
Cooling
Type
Continuous
Work
Time (h)
46GD2014
46GD2025
46GD2035
46GD3020
46GD3035
46GD3060
46GD3075
46GD3100
46GD3120
Catalogue
number
46V109
46V142
46V165
46V206
46V220
46V275
46V358
46V412
46V450
46V500
46V550
46V625
46V688
K2
134
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Cat. №
5195510
Cat. №
519420
L1
Cat. №
5193055
Instruments
Manual meters
Digital multimeter ЕМ5510
This is a digital device for measuring of humidity, illumination, temperature and all electric values. It features automatic
range adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in digits with the size of 3
¾ . It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic
interferences. It has an automatic switch off.
Technical features:
* DC voltage: 0.4 / 4 / 40 / 400 / 600 V
* AC voltage : 4 / 40 / 400 / 600V
* DC current: 400μ / 4000μ / 40m / 400m / 10A
* AC current: 400μ / 4000μ / 40m / 400m / 10A
* Resistance: 400 / 4K / 40K / 400K / 4M / 40MΩ
* Capacitors: 4η / 40η / 400η / 4μ / 40μ / 100μF
* Frequency: 10 / 100 / 1k / 10k / 100k / 200kHz
* Loading cycles: from 0.1% to 99.9%
* Temperature: -20° up to 1000°С
* Humidity: 30% to 95%
* Illumination: 4000 Lux / 40000 Lux
* Noise level: 35 to 100dB
* Circuit control: yes
* Diodes control: yes
* Weight: 310 g (including battery)
* Battery: 1x9V
* Dimensions: 83 х 162 х 47mm
Digital multimeter ЕМ420C
This is a digital device for measuring of humidity, illumination, temperature and all electric values. It features automatic
range adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in 4 digits with the size of
16 mm. It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic
interferences. It has an automatic switch off.
Technical features:
* DC voltage: 200m/ 2 / 20 / 200 / 600 V
* AC voltage : 2 / 20 / 200 / 600V
* DC current: 200μ / 2000μ / 20m / 200m / 2 / 10A
* AC current: 00μ / 2000μ / 20m / 200m / 2 / 10A
* Resistance: 200 / 2K / 20K / 200K / 2M / 20MΩ
* Temperature: -20° up to 1000°С
* Battery test: 1.5 / 3 / 9 / 12 V
* Circuit control: yes
* Diodes control: yes
* Weight: 200 g (including battery)
* battery: 3x1.5 V
* dimensions: 75 х 158 х 35mm
Digital multimeter ЕМ3055
This is a digital device for measuring of all electric values. It features manual range adjustment. It has an LCD display
showing the measured value in 4 digits with the size of 3 ½ . It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion,
precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences.
Technical features:
* DC voltage: 200m/ 2 / 20 / 200 / 1000 V
* AC voltage: 2 / 20 / 200 / 750V
* DC current: 2m / 20m / 200m / 10A
* AC current: 200m / 10A
* Resistance: 200 / 2K / 20K / 200K / 2M / 20M / 200MΩ
* Capacity: 2000p / 20η / 200η / 20μF
* Temperature: 0° up to 1000°С
* Battery test: 1.5 / 3 / 9 / 12 V
* Transistor test: Vce≈3V , Ib≈10μF
* Circuit control: yes
* Diodes control: yes
* Weight: 495 g (including battery)
* battery: 1x9V
* dimensions: 97 х 200 х 48mm
Instruments
Manual meters
135
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Digital multimeter EM3058
This is a digital device for measuring of temperature and all electric values. It features manual range adjustment, manual
value selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in digits with the size of 3 ¾ . It is of high accuracy of
analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic
switch off.
Cat. №
5193058
Technical features:
* DC voltage: 200m/ 2 / 20 / 200 / 1000 V
* AC voltage: 200 m / 2 / 20 / 200 / 750V
* DC current: 20μ / 200 μ / 2m / 200m / 10A
* AC current: 20μ / 200μ / 2m / 200m / 2 / 10A
* Resistance: 200 / 2K / 20K / 200K / 2M / 20M / 200MΩ
* Capacitors: 2η / 20η / 200η / 2μ / 20μF
* Frequency: 20kHz to 2000kHz
* Loading cycles: 0.1% to 99.9%
* Temperature: 0° up to 1000°С
* Logical level: High > 2.0 V; Low < 0.8 V
* Circuit control: yes
* Diodes control: yes
* Weight: 495 g (including battery)
* battery: 1x9V
* dimensions: 97 х 200 х 47 mm
Digital multimeter ЕМ31
This is a digital device for measuring of electric values. It features automatic range adjustment, manual value selection. It
has an LCD display showing the measured value in 4 digits with the size of 16 mm. It is of high accuracy of analoguedigital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off
and low battery indication.
Cat. №
519031
Technical features:
* DC voltage: 240m/ 2400m / 24 / 240 / 600 V
* AC voltage: 240m/ 2400m / 24 / 240 / 600 V
* DC current: 240μ / 2400μ / 24m / 240m / 10A
* AC current: 240μ / 2400μ / 24m / 240m / 10A
* Resistance: 240 / 2400 / 24K / 240K / 2400K / 24MΩ
* Capacity: 25η to 252μF
* Frequency: 50 / 500 / 5000 / 50k / 0.5 MHz
* Circuit control: yes
* Diodes control: yes
* Weight: 137 g (including battery)
* battery: 2x1.5 V
* dimensions: 70 х 126 х 28mm
Digital multimeter / pen ЕМ3215
This is a digital device for measuring of electric values in the form of a pen. It features automatic range adjustment,
manual value selection. It has an LCD display, data retain function, automatic reset, polarity selection, range overload
indication. It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic
interferences. It has an automatic switch off and low battery indication and a torch.
Cat. №
5193215
Technical features:
* DC voltage: 200m/ 2 / 20 / 200 / 600 V
* AC voltage: 2 / 20 / 200 / 600V
* DC current: 20m to 200mA
* AC current: 20m to 200mA
* Resistance: 200 / 2K / 20K / 200K / 2M / 20MΩ
* Logical level: High > 2.3V; Low < 0.8 V
* Circuit control: yes
* Diodes control: yes
* Weight: 182 g (including battery)
* battery: 1x9V
* dimensions: 57 х 230 х 30mm
L1
136
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Cat. №
519202
Cat. №
519204
L1
Cat. №
519266
Cat. №
519520
Instruments
Manual meters
Digital clamp meter EM202
This is a digital clamp meter for measuring of electric values. It features manual range adjustment, manual value
selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in digits with the size of 3½ mm. It is of high accuracy of
analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic
switch off.
Technical features:
* DC voltage: 1000 V
* AC voltage: 750V
* AC current: 20 / 200 / 1000A
* Resistance: 200 kΩ
* Temperature: -40° up to 1400°С
* Circuit control: yes
* Diodes control: yes
* Weight: 400 g (including battery)
* battery: 1x9V
* dimensions: 99 х 250 х 43mm
Digital clamp meter EM204
This is a digital clamp meter for measuring of electric values. It features automatic range adjustment, manual value
selection. It has an LCD display, low battery indication, overload protection. It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital
conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off.
Technical features:
* DC voltage: 1000 V
* AC voltage: 750V
* DC current: 200 / 1000A
* AC current: 200 / 1000A
* Resistance: 200 kΩ
* Frequency: 2 kHz
* Temperature: -40° up to 1400°С
* Circuit control: yes
* Diodes control: yes
* Weight: 400 g (including battery)
* battery: 1x9V
* dimensions: 99 х 250 х 43mm
Digital clamp meter EM266
This is a digital clamp meter for measuring of electric values. It features manual range adjustment. It has an LCD display
and retain function option, low battery indication and overload protection.
Technical features:
* DC voltage: 1000 V
* AC voltage: 750V
* AC current: 200 / 1000A
* Resistance: 200 / 20 kΩ
* Circuit control: yes
* Diodes control: yes
* Weight: 310 g (including battery)
* battery: 1x9V
* dimensions: 69 х 229 х 38mm
Infrared temperature meter EM520A
This is a digital device for measuring of temperature.The temperature is measured with no contact. It has a laser counter
for precision measuring, suitable large LCD display, battery low indication and overload protection.
Technical features:
* Temperature: -20° up to 320°С / -4° to 608 °F
* Distance to point size: 6:1
* Precision: ±2° C or 2% in reading
* battery: 1x9V
* dimensions: 90 х 155 х 45mm
Instruments
Manual meters
137
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Phase meter Gk7
A device indicating phase availability in the system. No contact phase indicator featuring sound and light indication of
phase availability.
Technical features:
* Voltage range: from 50 to 1000V
* Frequency range: from 50 Hz to 500 Hz
* dimensions: length – 62mm
Cat. №
519GK7
Digital detector 4 in 1 series TS530
This is a device for detecting metals, voltage and live conductors, wooden struts, or piping sections. The device has a 2meter measuring tape. It features light and sound indication. When an object is located, the display light blinks and marks
with increasing position. Once the exact position is located, a light point is marked on the wall through a button.
Cat. №
519530
Technical features:
* 2-meter measuring tape
* Pen: marking the located detail
* Piping section: metal pipe up to 25mm
* Wooden struts: 30x30mm
* Live conductors detection: 50mm for 90 ~ 250V; 50/60Hz
* Weight: 213 g (including battery)
* battery: 1x9 V
* dimensions: 73 x 180 x 32mm
L1
Industrial repair kit ETK06A
A finely packaged repair kit containing four elements in a metal briefcase, sealed with special plastic foam and struts for
each instrument.
The kit includes:
Cat. № 51906A
* Digital multimeter EM420
* Digital clamp-on ammeter EM465
* Phase meter GK7
* Infrared temperature meter EM520A
Instruments
Hydraulic crimping instruments
138
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Hydraulic crimping pliers HT - 300 type
Catalogue number: 59300
Functions:
* Crimping of aluminum or copper conductors with cable terminals or bush in the corresponding size
Technical data:
* Crimping head turning at 360° which facilitates the crimping of static conductors
* Device for automatic following of the effort at crimping completion
* Form of the crimping element: hexahedral
* Size of the crimping element: 16, 25, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120, 150, 185, 240, 300 mm 2
* Section of the crimping conductors:
- AI conductors - from 16 to 300 mm 2
- Cu conductors – from 16 to 240 mm 2
* Element pressing power: 60kN
* Width of the element: 17mm
* Weight of the instrument: 3.3 kg
* Length: 460mm
* Used hydraulic oil: Shell Tellus T15
* Metal box for the instrument
* A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder
Hydraulic crimping pliers KYQ-300B type
Catalogue number: 59302
L2
Functions:
* Crimping of aluminum or copper conductors with cable terminals or bush in the corresponding size
Technical data:
* Device for automatic following of the effort at crimping completion
* Form of the crimping element: hexahedral
* Size of the crimping element: 16, 25, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120, 150, 185, 240, 300 mm 2
* Section of the crimping conductors:
- AI conductors - from 16 to 300 mm 2
- Cu conductors – from 16 to 240 mm 2
* Element pressing power: 16T
* Width of the element: 22mm
* Weight of the instrument: 6.8 kg
* Length: 500mm
* Used hydraulic oil: #23 (hydraulic oil with viscosity 23)
* Metal box for the instrument
* A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder
Hydraulic crimping pliers YQK-300 type
Catalogue number: 59301
Functions:
* Crimping of aluminum or copper conductors with cable terminals or bush in the corresponding size
Technical data:
* Form of the crimping element: hexahedral
* Size of the crimping element: 16, 25, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120, 150, 185, 240, 300 mm 2
* Section of the crimping conductors:
- AI conductors - from 16 to 300 mm 2
- Cu conductors – from 16 to 240 mm 2
* Element pressing power: 16T
* Width of the element: 22mm
* Weight of the instrument: 6.3 kg
* Length: 500mm
* Used hydraulic oil: Shell Tellus T15
* Metal box for the instrument
* A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder
Instruments
Hydraulic piercing instruments
139
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Hydraulic crimping pliers YQK – 70 type
Catalogue number: 59303
Functions:
* Crimping of aluminum or copper conductors with cable terminals or bush in the corresponding size
Technical data:
* Form of the crimping element: hexahedral
* Size of the crimping element: 4, 6, 10, 16, 25, 35, 50, 70mm 2
* Section of the crimping conductors:
- AI conductors - from 4 to 70mm 2
- Cu conductors – from 4 to 70 mm 2
* Element pressing power: 8T
* Width of the element: 10mm
* Weight of the instrument: 2.8 kg
* Length: 310mm
* Used hydraulic oil: Shell Tellus T15
* Metal box for the instrument
* A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder
HYDRAULIC PIERCING INSTRUMENTS
Hydraulic piercing pliers TPA - 8 type
Catalogue number: 54000
Functions:
* Cutting through openings in sheet metal with gauge up to 3mm without rotary motion
Technical data:
* Piercing head turning at 360°
* Form of the cutting element: round
* Size of the cutting element: Ø 22, 27.5, 34.3, 40, 49, 60.8mm
* Piercing capacity:
- sheet metal 3mm – openings up to Ø 30mm
- sheet metal 2mm – openings up to Ø 60mm
* Element pressing power: 80kN
* Thickness of the element: 25mm
* Weight of the instrument: 3.5 kg
* Used hydraulic oil: #15 (hydraulic oil with viscosity 15)
* Metal box for the instrument
* A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder
* Additional set of cutting elements for cable glands – Ø16, 20, 26.2, 32.5, 39, 51, 63 and a square for display devices
46.5x46.5, 68x68 (ordered additionally); Catalogue number 54002
L3
Hydraulic piercing press SYK – 15 type
Catalogue number: 54001
Functions:
* Cutting through openings in sheet metal with gauge up to 3mm without rotary motion
Technical data:
* Protracting piercing head supplied with a hose for the hydraulic oil that gives possibility for piercing openings
everywhere on the metal surface
* Form of the cutting element:
- round
- square
* Size of the cutting element:
- square: 32x32mm
- round openings: Ø 22, 27.5, 34.3, 40, 49, 60.8mm
* Piercing capacity:
- sheet metal 3mm – openings up to Ø 60.8mm
- sheet metal 2mm – openings up to Ø 115.5mm
- square opening up to 110x110mm
* Element pressing power: 15T
* Thickness of the element: 25mm
* Weight of the instrument: 11.5 kg
* Used hydraulic oil: #15 (hydraulic oil with viscosity 15)
* Metal box for the instrument
* A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder
* Additional set of cutting elements for cable glands – Ø16, 20, 26.2, 32.5, 39, 51, 63 and a square for display devices
46.5x46.5, 68x68 (ordered additionally); Catalogue number 54002
Instruments
Mechanical cutting instruments
140
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Mechanical cable cutting pliers CC – 325 type
Catalogue number: 59305
Functions:
* Cutting of aluminum or copper cable conductors
* Cutting of conductors with metal bearing core
Technical data:
* Maximum section of the cable:
- for aluminum conductors up to 150mm 2
- for copper conductors up to 150mm 2
* Cutting power: 15T
* Presence of cutting mechanism type ratchet
* Presence of brake of the cutting mechanism
* Weight of the instrument: 0.58kg
* Length of the instrument: 260mm
* Package: blister
Mechanical cable cutting pliers CC – 400 type
Catalogue number: 59304
Functions:
* Cutting of aluminum or copper cable conductors
* Cutting of conductors with metal bearing core
Technical data:
* Maximum section of the cable:
- for aluminum conductors up to 400mm 2
- for copper conductors up to 350mm 2
* Cutting power: 15T
* Presence of cutting mechanism type ratchet
* Presence of brake of the cutting mechanism
* Weight of the instrument: 1.25kg
* Length of the instrument: 360mm
* Package: blister
Mechanical cable cutting pliers HS – 250 type
L4
Catalogue number: 59306
Functions:
* Cutting of aluminum or copper cable conductors
* Cutting of conductors with metal bearing core
Technical data:
* Maximum section of the cable:
- for aluminum conductors up to 240mm 2
- for copper conductors up to 185mm 2
* Weight of the instrument: 1.43kg
* Length of the instrument: 540mm
* Package: blister
MANUAL INSTRUMENTS
Instrument for conductor stripping HS – 2103 type
Catalogue number: 59310
Functions:
* Cleaning of the plastic insulation of conductors and conductors
* Cutting of aluminum or copper cable conductors up to 6mm 2
* Cutting of bearing steel plated wires up to 2mm 2
* Crimping of cable terminals
Technical data:
* Possibility for crimping of automobile high voltage conductors
* Possibility for crimping of cable conductors up to 6mm 2
* Maximum section of the cable: up to 6mm 2
* Weight of the instrument: 0.21kg
* Length of the instrument: 213mm
* Package: blister
Instruments
Hand instruments
141
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Instrument for conductor stripping HS – 2603 type
Catalogue number: 59311
Functions:
* Cleaning of the plastic insulation of conductors and conductors
* Cutting of aluminum or copper cable conductors up to 6mm2
* Cutting of bearing steel plated wires up to 2mm2
* Crimping of cable terminals
Technical data:
* Possibility for crimping of cable conductors up to 6mm2
* Maximum section of the cable:
- cleaning of a rigid conductor: from 0.5 to 6mm2
- cleaning of a flexible conductor: from 0.75 to 6mm2
* Presence of openings for cutting of bolts: from M2.5 to M5
* Weight of the instrument: 0.32kg
* Length of the instrument: 240mm
* Package: blister
Hand Crimping Tool Type LAS-005
Catalogue number: 59313
Features:
· Crimping of non-insulated and insulated cable end sleeves and terminals
· Allows changing of crimping dies: three different combinations possible
· Safe and reliable gear-ratchet deign
Technical Specifications:
· Crimping range for insulated cable end sleeves and terminals – 10 mm2
· Crimping range for non-insulated cable end sleeves and terminals – 10 mm2
· Crimping die shape: hex shaped
· Tool weight: 0.55 kg
· Tool length: 220 mm
Instrument for manual crimping of conductors SN – 003 type
Functions:
* Crimping of naked cable terminals and joining bushes
Technical data:
* Possibility for crimping of cable conductors from 6 to 16mm2
* Form of the crimping head: hexahedral
* Weight of the instrument: 0.39kg
* Length of the instrument: 190mm
* Package: blister
Catalogue number: 59309
Instrument for manual crimping of conductors HY –200R type
Functions:
* Used for cleaning and crimping of 4, 6, and 8 core telephone or grid conductors
* Crimping of terminals/couplings for telephone or computer grids
Technical data:
* Possibility for crimping of cable conductors for 4, 6 or 8 cores
* Weight of the instrument: 0.55kg
* Length of the instrument: 200mm
* Package: blister
Catalogue number: 59312
L5
Consumatives
Accessories
142
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Exhaust Fan APB10 – 1/232
Cat.№
5017
The exhaust fan APB10 – 1/232 can evacuate bad smells and exhaust gases, decrease the excessive humidity and
adjust indoor temperature. It is intended for use in hotel rooms, bathrooms, kitchens and other premises having special
requirements to the quality of indoor atmosphere. It is made of fireproof plastic and has a decorative safety grill that
widens the scope of possible applications. The exhaust fan is a wall mounted type.
·Rated voltage: 230 V
·Rated motor power: 230W
·Fan air delivery: 320 m3/h
·Mounting diameter: ø100 mm
Bell - SIGMA design
Used for sound signalization in housing and industrial buildings.
* Sound level: 70 dB
Consumption:
-3.6VA for power supply 8 -12V
-5VA for power supply 230V
* Mounting on DIN-rail
Type
Un (V)
Catalogue number
bell
8-12
230
5012
5220
Plug for mounting on DIN rail
Plug German type type for Din rail mounting. It provides plug presence in electric boards and easy cabling.
* Supply voltage: 230V
* Computing option: up to 16А
* Operation temperature: from -10 up to +40°С
* Humidity: up to 85%RH
Mounting method:
* DIN rail
М1
Cat.№
37004
Bell transformer
Modified for power supply of bells and other signal devices with alternating voltage 8V, 12V, 24V and capacity up to 3.8A.
* The voltage of the primary winding voltage is 230V
* Mounting on DIN-rail
Cat.№
5001
Consumatives
Voltage transformers
www.elmarkgroup.eu
EVT5 - xxx main transformer
Functions:
It reduces main voltage within standard range
* separates the galvanic power supply circuit from the operation circuit
Technical features:
* Input voltage: 400 or 230 V
* Output voltage: See the table below
* Frequency : 50/60Hz
* Short circuit resistance: unstable
* Temperature class: В (130ºC)
* Construction: open (to be installed in other products)
* Magnetic circuit: cold rolled electric furnace steel
* Coils: pure electric copper
* Protection degree: IP00
Connection:
* flexible or hard conductors of relevant section to terminals
Mounting:
* Mounting in distribution boards or products
* fastening: by means of screws/bolts to the surface
* position: vertical
* ambient temperature: -20 ÷+40ºС
E
G
Documents corresponding to
the product:
Standard EN 60051-1
143
d
F
C
тип
D
Initial
voltage
(V)
Secondary
voltage
(V)
Power
VA
Dimensions
C
D
E
F
G
d
Catalogue number
EVT5 - 160VA
230
48-36
160
100
80
100
50
110
20
45248
EVT5 - 160VA
400
48-36
160
100
80
100
50
110
20
45448
EVT5 - 160VA
230
24-12
160
100
80
100
50
110
20
45243
EVT5 - 160VA
400
24-12
160
100
80
100
50
110
20
45443
EVT5 - 250VA
230
48-36
250
130
100
120
53
130
20
45242
EVT5 - 250VA
400
48-36
250
130
100
120
53
130
20
45442
EVT5 - 250VA
230
24-12
250
130
100
120
53
130
20
45244
EVT5 - 250VA
400
24-12
250
130
100
120
53
130
20
45444
EVT5 - 500VA
230
48-36
500
150
113
133
53
140
20
45245
EVT5 - 500VA
400
48-36
500
150
113
133
53
140
20
45445
EVT5 - 500VA
230
24-12
500
150
125
133
53
140
20
45246
EVT5 - 500VA
400
24-12
500
150
125
133
53
140
20
45446
EVT5 - 500VA
230
110-48-24
500
150
125
133
53
140
20
45215
EVT5 - 500VA
400
110-48-24
500
150
125
133
53
140
20
45415
EVT5 -1000VA
230
48-36
1000
170
125
150
65
155
20
45241
EVT5 - 1000VA
400
48-36
1000
170
125
150
65
155
20
45441
EVT5 - 1000VA
230
24-12
1000
170
125
150
65
155
20
45247
EVT5 - 1000VA
400
24-12
1000
170
125
150
65
155
20
45447
EVT5 - 1600VA
230
48-36
1600
190
125
150
65
170
20
452416
EVT5 - 1600VA
400
48-36
1600
190
125
150
65
170
20
454416
EVT5 - 1600VA
230
24-12
1600
190
125
150
65
170
20
452417
EVT5 - 1600VA
400
24-12
1600
190
125
150
65
170
20
454417
М2
Consumatives
89
Auxiliary devices for circuit breakers
144
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Power supply busbar
Functions:
-enables the supply of a group of conductors
-provides simultaneous supply
-conducting section – electrotechnical copper
-insulation of the conducting section
Technical data:
* Rated operating voltage: 230/400V
* Isolating voltage: 500V
* Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960°С/3sec.
* Rated current (phase): 63/100A
Connecting:
* to the joining terminal of the breaker
Type
(copper busbar)
М3
Length
(m)
Poles
(number)
In with one point
of power supply
In with two points
of power supply
Catalogue
number
Package / Box
(pcs)
1P 63
1
54
63А
90А
14163
10 / 100
1P 100
1
54
100A
120A
14190
10 / 100
2P 63
1
28
63A
90A
14263
8 / 50
3P 63
1
18
63А
90А
14363
6 / 30
3P 100
1
18
100A
120A
14390
5 / 20
56
DP 1N
1
C100 1P
1
63A
90A
14463
8 / 48
125A
150A
14190T
5 / 20
C100 2P
1
125A
150A
14290T
5 / 20
C100 3P
1
125A
159A
14390T
5 / 20
10 / 100
U 1P 63
1
54
63A
90A
14163U
U 2P 63
1
28
63A
90A
14263U
8 / 50
U 3P 63
1
18
63A
90A
14263U
6 / 30
U 4P 63
1
13
63A
90A
14463U
5 / 20
Mounting (DIN) rail
Functions:
-serves for mounting breakers, residual current devices, contactors and other elements
-provides a firm clamp of the elements
Technical data:
* brass alloy with galvanic cover
* factory drilled mounting openings
* length up to 1m
Connecting:
- with bolts or other fixing elements to the mounting surface
Length
(m)
Catalogue
number
Package / Box
(pcs)
1m
14001
20 / 100
Isolated mounting terminal for circuit breakers
Functions:
- provides a firm joining of rigid or flexible conductors up to 35mm2 to power supply busbar
- provides a firm joining of the power supply conductor to the breaker
- provides enough contact surface of the conductor
Technical data:
* Brass alloy with galvanic cover
* Fabric isolated with plastic cover
* Appropriate for joining to copper or aluminum cables
* Rated voltage: 230V
* Rated current: up to 63A
* Isolating voltage: ≥500V
* IP code: IP>20
* Section of power supply conductor: up to 35mm2
Connecting:
* to the joining terminal of the breaker
Type
Section of the conductor
(mm2)
Rated current
In (A)
Catalogue
number
Package / Box
(pcs)
TB 25
2.5 to 35
63
31025
20/500
Consumatives
Non-insulated butt terminals
145
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Terminal Extensions
Straight copper electro-tinned extensions enabling cable connection outside the switch terminals and providing excellent
contact with the switch terminal base. Terminal extensions with different cross section are available depending on the
switch rated power.
Mounting:
Extensions are directly bolt mounted to the switch terminal base.
Type
Rated current (А)
Catalogue number
Package (pcs.)
ТP 125
TP 160
TP 250
TP 400
TP 630
125
160
250
400
630
31125
31160
31250
31400
31630
6
6
6
6
6
Non-insulated butt terminals – with coating for crimping
They are copper pipe with galvanic tin coating. They are used for joining of copper conductors – rigid or multiple
conductors with different section. The connection is accomplished through crimping pliers, through mechanical pressing
of the butt terminals and the conductor.
Technical data:
* Material: copper alloy
* Coating: tin
* Application: general
Standard: EN 61 238-1
Type
Length
L (mm)
Outer diameter
D (mm)
Inner diameter
d (mm)
Cable
(mm2)
Catalogue
number
GTY-4
GTY-6
1P 63
GTY-10
1P 100
GTY-16
2P 63
GTY-25
GTY-35
3P 63
GTY-50
3P 100
GTY-70
DP 1N
GTY-95
GTY-120
GTY-150
GTY-185
GTY-240
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
5
5.3
6.3
7.5
9
10.8
12.5
14.5
17
19
21
23
26
3
3.7
4.5
5.7
7.2
8.5
9.8
11.5
13.7
15
16.7
18.5
21
4
6
10
16
25
35
50
70
95
120
150
185
240
59213
59201
59202
59203
59204
59205
59206
59207
59208
59209
59210
59211
59212
Bimetal non-insulated butt terminals – with coating for crimping
М4
They are pipe made of two metals – copper and aluminum without galvanic coating. They are designed for joining copper
and aluminum conductors – rigid or multiple conductors with different section. The connection is accomplished through
crimping pliers, through mechanical pressing of the butt terminals and the conductor. They are used for protection against
electrochemical corrosion got at two metals contact with different chemical properties and conductivity at electrical current
feed. They are manufactured under modern technology and have high quality and long exploitation period.
Standard: EN 61 238-1
Technical data:
* Material: copper aluminum alloy
* Coating: none
* Application: general for joining of two types of conductors
Butt terminal
type
d1
D1
d2
D2
l1
l2
L
Catalogue
number
GTL - 1- 16
GTL - 1- 25
GTL - 1- 35
GTL - 1- 50
GTL - 1- 70
GTL - 1- 95
GTL - 1- 120
GTL - 1- 150
GTL - 1- 185
GTL - 1- 240
5
6
7
8.5
9.5
11.5
13.5
15
17
19
9
10
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
26
6
7
8.5
9.8
11.5
13.5
15
17
18.5
21
10
12
14
16
18
21
23
25
27
30
30
30
30
32
38
40
42
44
46
54
30
33
40
42
50
50
55
55
60
60
75
82
90
95
105
110
112
118
125
130
59214
59215
59216
59217
59218
59219
59220
59221
59222
59223
Consumatives
Non-insulated terminals
146
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Non-insulated cable terminals with coating for crimping SC & JM
They are used for joining copper conductors - multiple conductors with different section to electrical devices or
connections to combine all cores of the conductor, to provide safe connection at tightening in terminals and safe
connection at the base of the terminal. Thus the connection stability against vibrations is increased and the possibility for
short circuit is decreased. They are made of copper alloy with galvanic tin coating. The connection is realized through
crimping pliers, through mechanic pressing of the terminal and conductor. Two types are offered with standard length SC
and extended base JM. They are manufactured under modern technology and have high quality and long exploitation
period.
JM
Standard: EN 61 238-1
Technical data:
* Material: copper alloy
* Coating: tin
* Application: general for joining conductors to electrical devices.
Bimetal non-insulated cable terminals for crimping DTL
They are used for joining aluminum conductors - multiple conductors with different section to electrical devices or
connections to combine all cores of the conductor, to provide safe connection at tightening in terminals and safe
connection at the base of the terminal. Thus the connection stability against vibrations is increased and the possibility for
short circuit is decreased. They are made of copper and aluminum alloys as in the aluminum billet is made under special
technology the copper terminal formed like an ear. The connection is realized through crimping pliers, through mechanic
pressing of the terminal and conductor. They are manufactured under modern technology and have high quality and long
exploitation period.
Standard: EN 61 238-1
Technical data:
* Material: copper aluminum
* Application: general for joining conductors to electrical devices.
Dimensions:
Non-insulated cable terminals for crimping
М5
Dimensions:
Bimetal non-insulated cable terminals for crimping
Shoe
type
d1
(mm)
D
(mm)
d2
(mm)
L
(mm)
Catalogue
number
Shoe
type
d1
(mm)
D
(mm)
d2
(mm)
L
(mm)
l
(mm)
B
(mm)
Catalogue
number
JM - 2.5/6
JM - 4/6
JM - 6/6
JM - 6/8
JМ - 10/6
JM - 10/8
JM - 16/6
JM - 16/8
JM - 16/10
JM - 25/8
JM - 25/10
JM - 35/8
SC - 35/8
JM - 35/10
SC - 35/10
JM - 35/12
SC - 35/12
JM - 50/8
SC- 50/8
JM - 50/10
SC - 50/10
JM - 50/12
SC - 50/12
JM - 70/10
SC - 70/10
JM - 70/12
JM - 95/10
JM - 95/12
SC - 95/12
JM - 120/10
JM - 120/12
JM - 150/12
SC - 150/12
JM - 185/12
JM - 185/16
JM - 240/16
SC - 240/16
2.2
3.0
3.8
3.8
4.8
4.8
5.5
5.5
5.5
7
7
8.2
8.1
8.2
8.1
8.2
8.1
9.8
9.8
9.8
9.8
9.8
9.8
11.5
11.5
11.5
13.8
13.8
13.8
15.5
15.5
16.5
16.5
18.8
18.8
21.3
21.3
4.5
4.8
5.5
5.5
6.8
6.8
7.5
7.5
7.5
9
9
10.5
10.3
10.5
10.5
10.5
10.3
12.5
12.3
12.5
12.3
12.5
12.3
14.5
14.3
14.5
17.5
17.5
16.7
19.5
19.5
21
21
23.5
23.5
26.5
26.1
6
6
6
8
6
8
6
8
10
8
10
8
8
10
10
12
12
8
8
10
10
12
12
10
10
12
10
12
12
10
12
12
12
12
16
16
16
24
24
24
24
25.5
25.5
30.5
30.5
30.5
34
34
38
36
38
36
38
37
45
43
45
43
45
43
50
48
50
55.5
55.5
55
63
63
71
67
78
78
92
85
59240
59241
59035
59059
59036
59037
59038
59039
59040
59041
59042
59043
59043S
59044
59044S
59045
59045S
59046
59046S
59047
59047S
59048
59048S
59049
59049S
59050
59051
59052
59052S
59053
59054
59055
59055S
59056
59057
59058
59058S
DTL - 16
DTL - 25
DTL - 35
DTL - 50
DTL - 70
DTL - 95
DTL - 120
DTL - 150
DTL - 185
DTL - 240
6
7
8.5
9.8
11.5
13.5
15
16.5
18.5
21
11
12
14
16
18
21
23
25
27
30
8
8
10
10
12
12
14
14
16
16
70
75
85
90
102
112
120
126
133
140
30
34
38
40
48
50
53
56
58
60
16
18
20.5
23
26
28
30
34
37
40
59224
59225
59226
59227
59228
59229
59230
59231
59232
59233
Consumatives
Insulated terminals
147
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Insulated butt connectors
They are cable butt terminal with cross section up to 6mm2 with polyvinylchloride insulation. They are used for
joining/extending multiple conductors with section up to 6mm2. It increases the connection stability against vibrations and
decreases the possibility for short circuit. The connection is realized through crimping pliers, through mechanic pressing
of the terminal and conductor. The different insulation colour corresponds to different conductor sections. They are
manufactured under modern technology and have high quality and long exploitation period.
Technical data:
* Material: copper alloy
* Coating: polyvinylchloride
* Application: general for joining copper conductors
Standard: EN 61 238-1
Color
Red
Blue
Yellow
Length (mm)
16
25
16
25
20
25
Package
(pcs.)
100
100
100
100
100
100
Type number
PVT 1.25
BV 1.25
PVT 2
BV 2
PVT 5.5
BV 5.5
Conductor
(mm2)
1
1
1.5-2.5
1.5-2.5
4-6
4-6
Catalogue
number
59015
59001
59034
59002
59014
59003
Insulated cable terminals
They represent a cable terminal made of brass alloy with galvanic tin coating and insulated with polyvinylchloride. They
are used as non-insulated terminals, as the insulated part protects the cores from bending and breaking in the joining
point and at the same time it protects the staff from direct contact to the current leading elements. They are used for
connectors with section up to 6mm. The connection is realized through crimping pliers, through mechanic pressing of the
terminal and cable. The different insulation colour corresponds to different conductor sections. They are manufactured
under modern technology and have high quality and long exploitation period.
All insulated cable terminals are being offered in 100 pcs. packing
Technical data:
* Material: copper alloy
* Coating: polyvinylchloride
* Application: general for joining copper conductors
* Ambient temperature: -10 to +75°C
MALE
MDD - red
1.25 - 187
MDD - red
1.25 - 250
MDD - blue
2 - 187
MDD - blue
2 - 250
MDD - yellow
5.5 - 250
Catalogue
number
59012
59009
59013
59011
59010
FEMALE
FDD - red
1.25 - 187
FDD - red
1.25 - 250
FDD - blue
2 - 187
FDD - blue
2 - 250
FDD - yellow
5.5 - 250
Shoe
width
187
250
187
250
250
Conductor
(mm2)
1
1
1.5-2.5
1.5-2.5
4-6
Catalogue
number
59008
59006
59007
59004
59005
М6
Colour
white
blue
red
black
grey
orange
green
dark
green
milky
yellow
black
greyyellow
Type
Е0508
Е7508
Е1008
Е1510
Е2512
Е4012
Е6018
Е10-18
Е16-18
Е25-16
Е35-25
12
12
18
18
18
4.0
6.0
10
16
59029
59030
59031
Terminal
length
(mm)
8
8
Conductor
(mm2)
0.5
0.75
1.0
1.5
2.5
Catalogue
number
59023
59024
59025
59026
59027
Colour
8
10
59028
25
25
59032
35
59033
yellow
blue
red
16
Type
RVL 1.25-4
RVL 1.25-5
RVL 2-4
RVL 2-5
RVL 5.5-4
RV 5.5-5
RV 5.5-6
Package
(pcs.)
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Size of the
opening (mm)
4
5
4
5
4
5
6
Conductor
(mm2)
1
1
1.5-2.5
1.5-2.5
4-6
4-6
4-6
Catalogue
number
59021
59022
59018
59019
59020
59016
59017
Consumatives
Insulated terminals
148
www.elmarkgroup.eu
М6
MALE
PTV - red
1.25 - 10
PTV - red1.25 - 12
PTV - blue
2 - 10
PTV - blue
2 - 12
PTV - yellow
5.5 - 13
Shoe
width
1.9
1.9
1.9
1.9
2.9
Conductor
(mm2)
0.25-1.5
0.25-2.5
1.5-2.5
1.5-2.5
4-6
Catalogue
number
59101
59102
59103
59104
59105
MALE
PBDD - red
1.25 - 250
PBDD - blue
2 - 250
PBDD - yellow
5.5 - 250
Shoe
width
6.3
6.3
6.3
Conductor
(mm2)
0.25-1.5
1.5-2.5
4-6
Catalogue
number
59106
59107
59108
MALE
MPD - red
1.25 - 156
MPD - blue
2 - 195
MPD - yellow
5.5 - 195
Shoe
width
6.3
6.3
6.3
Conductor
(mm2)
0.25-1.5
1.5-2.5
4-6
Catalogue
number
59109
59110
59111
MALE
MDFN - red
1.25 - 250
MDFN - blue
2 - 250
MDFN - yellow
5 - 250
Shoe
width
4
4
5
Conductor
(mm2)
0.25-1.5
1.5-2.5
4-6
Catalogue
number
59112
59113
59114
Length (mm)
18.1
20.1
25.5
27.3
Package
(pcs.)
100
100
100
100
Type number
CHS3
CHS4
CHS5
CHS6
Conductor
(mm2)
0.25-1.5
1.5-2.5
4-6
8
Catalogue
number
59115
59116
59117
59118
Consumatives
Consumatives
149
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Cable glands PG type
They are designed to provide the IP code IP at conductors passing through the walls of the electrical distribution boxes.
They represent a plastic pipe supplied with the corresponding gaskets and nuts. All cable gland elements are made of
high quality plastic (PE) or rubber.
Standard: EN 60 423; 4858-81
Technical data:
* Material: polyethylene (PE)
* Colour: gray
* Application: general
* Ambient temperature: -40 to +85°C
* IP code: IP 55
Cable gland
type
PG-7
PG-9
PG-11
PG-13.5
PG-16
PG-19
PG-21
PG-24
PG-29
PG-36
PG-42
PG-48
Overlapping
field
Т
(mm)
B
(mm)
d
(mm)
D
(mm)
L1
(mm)
L2
(mm)
Catalogue
number
3.5-6.8
5-8
6-10
7-12
8-14
9-17
10-18
15-22
16-24
18-28
26-362
32-39
16.3
18.9
21.7
23.6
26.5
29
32.3
32.6
41.1
52
57.4
65.2
18
21.7
23.5
26.5
29.3
32
35.6
32.6
45.4
58
61.9
70.7
12
15.5
18.5
20
21.5
23
28
29.8
36
46
51
58
6.6
8.5
10.4
13
14
17
19
24
26
31.5
37.6
43
10
10
8.5
10
9
12
12
13
12.5
12.5
17.5
21
22
25
29
29
29
29
35
31
40
45
47
50
500070
500090
500110
500135
500160
500190
500210
500240
500290
500360
500420
500480
Zero rails
They represent a brass rail with rectangular section with fabric made openings for the conductors and bolts for clamping
of the conductor. They are offered in types with insulated and non-insulated rail. They are used in the electrical
distribution boxes for zeroing and earthing.
Technical data:
* Material: brass for the current leading elements
* Insulation material: plastic
* Colour: gray/blue
* Application: general
* Ambient temperature: -40 to +85°C
М7
Zero rails
Rail
type
Lenght
L (mm)
Height
H (mm)
Widht
W (mm)
Ø D (mm)
Bolt
Number of
terminals
Catalogue
number
BRASS
1000
7.8
6
5
М4
54
14002
ZERO
insulated
250
5
М4
16
14012
M
Catalogue
number
5x10
5x10
5x10
5x10
5x10
5x10
5x10
5x10
5x10
5x10
14204
14206
14208
14210
14212
14304
14306
14308
14310
14312
Zero terminals
SP 031
SP 029
Rail
type
SP 029-4
SP 029-6
SP 029-8
SP 029-10
SP 029-12
SP 031-4
SP 031-6
SP 031-8
SP 031-10
SP 031-12
L
82.9.4
100.9
118.9
136.9
182.4
59.5
76.5
93
111
128
A
B
C
21.5
21.5
21.5
21.5
21.5
31.5
31.5
31.5
31.5
31.5
12
12
12
12
12
12.4
12.4
12.4
12.4
12.4
70.5
88.5
106.5
124.5
170
48.5
65.5
82
100
117
ØD
6.5
6.5
6.5
6.5
6.5
6.5
6.5
6.5
6.5
6.5
Consumatives
Consumatives
150
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Plastic corrugated conduit
The plastic corrugated conduits are designed for protection of wires and Conduits are made of thin-wall plastic and are
available in different sizes.
Type
Internal Diameter Ø (mm)
Catalogue number
IMG 9
IMG 13
IMG 16
IMG 19
IMG 23
IMG 29
9.0
13.5
16.0
19.0
23.0
29.0
500G09
500G13
500G16
500G19
500G23
500G29
Insulating PVC tape with dimensions 0.15mm / 19mm / 20y
Colour
black
white
Опаковка
(бр.)
10
10
Каталожен
номер
51001
51005
red
blue
yellow/green
10
10
10
51002
51006
51004
Clips for cable fixing
Type
М7
CHR-4
Ф
Catalogue
number
CHR-5
4
500004
CHR-6
CHR-7
5
6
7
500005
500006
500007
CHR-8
8
CHR-9
9
500008
500009
CHR-10
CHR-12
10
500010
CHR-14
CHR-16
12
14
16
500012
500014
500016
Cable ties
Length
(mm)
100
150
160
200
250
280
300
300
370
380
450
500
Width
(mm)
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
4.8
3.5
4.8
4.8
7.9
Catalogue №
500100
white
Catalogue №
black
500152 500162 500202 500253 500283 500303 500304 500373 500384 500454 500507
500151 500161
-
500251 500281 500301
-
-
-
-
500501
Consumatives
Thermal shrinkable tubes
151
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Thermal shrinkable tubes ZDG type
The thin wall thermal shrinkable tubes are used for cable connections insulation, at conductors repair to protect the cable
head from corrosion, for protection of the cable insulation from water and moisture, for restoring the cable insulation
integrity, etc. It is a plastic thin wall pipe which at temperature higher than 120°C shrinks its initial diameter to a certain
degree. The material has high temperature and UV rays wear resistance. The material represents the so called
permanently netted plastic. This material is obtained as the plastic billet is processed with the help of high energy electron
rays so that inner molecular bonds between adjacent molecules are formed. After that the pipe is heated to the boiling
point, the pipe inflates, so do the inner molecular bonds. Then the pipe is sharply refrigerated and the molecules stay in
the condition of inflated bonds for indefinite long time. Heating the pipe repeatedly (after being mounted to the given
cable) the crystals melt again but due to the net structure, they resume the initial pipe diameter and take the form of the
cable, pressing it and not allowing the moisture to get under the pipe.
Standard: EN 60 684
Technical data:
* Material: threefold netted polyene
* Colours: blue, black, red, yellow, yellow-green, green, white
* Contraction degree: min 2 : 1
* Ambient temperature: -40 to + 100°C
* Contraction temperature: min 120°C
* Flame wear resistance: burns faintly
* It does not liberate harmful substances
* Insulation resistance: 1х 10 1 2 Ω/cm
* Application: general
* Insulating voltage 1000 V
D1
(mm)
D2
(mm)
S
(mm)
Quantity
(m)
Catalogue number *
blue, red, black, green, yellow, yellow-green
1
1.5
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
20
22
25
28
30
35
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
120
150
0.5
0.75
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
7.5
8.0
9.0
10
11
12.5
14
15
16.5
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
60
75
0.04
0.04
0.05
0.05
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
200
200
200
200
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
50
50
50
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
301001x
301115x
301002x
301003x
301004x
301005x
301006x
301007x
301008x
301009x
301010x
301011x
301012x
301013x
301014x
301015x
301016x
301018x
301020x
301022x
301025x
301028x
301030x
301035x
301040x
301050x
301060x
301070x
301080x
301090x
301100x
301120x
301150x
Note: * At orders after the catalogue number of the corresponding diameter a letter showing the colour must be added: B – blue; R – red;
K - black; G - green; Y – yellow; V – yellow-green
М8
Consumatives
Terminal blocks
152
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Fixed terminal blocks
LTU2 UK series
Series fixed terminal blocks with universal application in
electrical distribution boxes. For DIN-rail mounting.
Variety of sizes for optimum using of the space in the
distribution boxes through selection of appropriate
terminals for the corresponding conductors. Made of
non-flammable insulating polymeric material.
H
W
Standard: IEC - 60947-7-1
L
Section of the
conductor (mm2)
H
W
0.2-2.5 42.5 47
5.2
single-core multiple-core
0.2-4
Size of the
terminal (mm)
L
".. 6"
Section of the
conductor (mm2)
single-core multiple-core
0.2-6
0.2-4
Size of the
terminal (mm)
L
H
42.5
47
М9
0.2-10
6.2
Size of the
terminal (mm)
H
W
47
8.2
".. 8"
single-core multiple-core
0.5-16 0.5-10
Catalogue
number
32
800
grey
red
black
blue
LTU2UK 3N
LTU2UK 3N
LTU2UK 3N
LTU2UK 3N
31033
31032
31031
31035
In (А)
Un (V)
Color
Type number
Catalogue
number
41
800
grey
red
black
blue
LTU2UK 5N
LTU2UK 5N
LTU2UK 5N
LTU2UK 5N
31053
31052
31051
31055
In (А)
Un (V)
Color
Type number
Catalogue
number
57
800
grey
red
black
blue
LTU2UK 6N
LTU2UK 6N
LTU2UK 6N
LTU2UK 6N
31063
31062
31061
31065
In (А)
Un (V)
Color
Type number
Catalogue
number
76
800
LTU2UK 10N
LTU2UK 10N
LTU2UK 10N
LTU2UK 10N
31103
31102
31101
31105
Type number
Catalogue
number
10mm
Size of the
terminal (mm)
L
H
W
42.5
47
10.2
".. 10"
Section of the
conductor (mm2)
Type number
8mm
L
Section of the
conductor (mm2)
Color
W
0.2-6 42.5
single-core multiple-core
Un (V)
8mm
".. 6"
Section of the
conductor (mm2)
In (А)
grey
red
black
blue
12mm
Size of the
terminal (mm)
Un (V)
Color
H
W
2.5-25
4-16
42.5
47
12.2
101
800
grey
LTU2UIK 16
31163
10-35
10-35
55
62
15.2
125
800
grey
LTU2UIK 35
31353
single-core multiple-core
".. 10"
L
In (А)
12mm
".. 10"
16mm
Consumatives
Terminal blocks
153
www.elmarkgroup.eu
JD series
Series double-sided insulated fixed terminal blocks designed to connect earthing conductors.
Two-colour insulation (yellow and green).
Made of non-flammable insulating polymeric material.
Type
number
Section of the
conductor (mm2)
Size of the
terminal (mm)
L
едножилен многожилен
Standard: IEC - 60947-7-1
H
In (А)
Un (V)
Colour
Catalogue
number
W
5JD
0.2-4
0.2-4
42.5
47
6.2
34
800
yellow-green
31054
6JD
0.2-10
0.2-6
42.5
47
8.2
37
800
yellow-green
31064
10JD
0.5-10
0.5-6
42.5
47
8.2
61
800
yellow-green
31104
16JD
2.5-25
2.5-16 42.5
47
12.2
108
800
yellow-green
31164
35JD
2.5-35
2.5-35 42.5
47
15
135
800
yellow-green
31354
".. 10"
16mm
Accessories for fixed terminal blocks – marking tags ZB type
Accessories for marking and separation of different electrical circuits,
voltage and fixing of elements for DIN-rail mounting.
Type
number
Number of tags
in a strip
ZB6
20
ZB8
10
Color
Size
(mm)
Catalogue
number
white
6
31906
white
8
31908
Catalogue
number
End cover
Type number
Color
Thickness
(mm)
EC
grey
1.5
Type number
Number of
terminals
31901
Гребени
Catalogue
number
FBI
2
FBI
3
FBI - 3
FBI
10
FBI - 10
FBI - 2
М9
Fixing terminal E/UK type
Type number
Color
Thickness
(mm)
Catalogue
number
Е/UK
grey
5
31902
Terminal blocks TBH type
Type number
Number of tags
in a strip
In (А)
Un (V)
Colour
Section of the
conductor (mm2)
Catalogue
number
TBH 3A
10
3
660
femi - transparen
tо 1.5
31003
TBH 6A
10
6
660
femi - transparen
tо 4
31006
TBH 10A
10
10
660
femi - transparen
tо 6
31010
TBH 15A
10
15
660
white
tо 6
31015
TBH 20A
10
20
660
white
tо 10
31020
Consumatives
Multiplugs and cable reels
154
www.elmarkgroup.eu
MAK-2A with thermal protection
Model
Package
(pcs)
Cable
specification
Cable
length
Catalogue
number
H05VV-F
10
3 x 1.5mm2
10m
47911
A1
MAK-3 with thermal protection
Package
(pcs)
Cable
specification
H05VV-F
4
H05VV-F
Model
Cable
length
Catalogue
number
3 x 1.5mm2
20m
47921
4
3 x 1.5mm2
25m
47925
Model
Package
(pcs)
Cable
specification
Cable
length
Catalogue
number
H05VV-F
2
3 x 1.5mm2
25m
47927
H05VV-F
2
3 x 1.5mm2
40m
47940
H05VV-F
2
2
50m
47950
Cable
specification
Cable
length
Catalogue
number
MAK-4 with thermal protection
3 x 1.5mm
М10
Cable reel with damp-proof sockets type MAK-10A
Model
Package
(pcs)
HJR - 10AP
2
3 x 1.5mm2
25m
47970
HJR - 10P
2
3 x 1.5mm2
50m
47971
Cable
length
Catalogue
number
A1
Cable reel with industrial plug and socket type MAK-10
Model
Package
(pcs)
Cable
specification
HJR - 102A
2
3 x 1.5mm2
25m
47972
HJR - 103A
2
3 x 1.5mm2
30m
47973
Consumatives
Multiplugs and cable reels
155
www.elmarkgroup.eu
DG - D03B / DG - D04B
Model
Package
(pcs)
H05VV-F (DG-D03B)
H05VV-F (DG-D03B)
H05VV-F (DG-D03B)
H05VV-F (DG-D04B)
H05VV-F (DG-D04B)
H05VV-F (DG-D04B)
Max.3500W,16/250~
50
40
40
50
40
40
Cable
specification
3 x 1.0mm2
3 x 1.5mm2
3 x 1.5mm2
3 x 1.0mm2
3 x 1.5mm2
3 x 1.5mm2
Cable
length
Catalogue
number
1.5m
3.0m
5.0m
1.5m
3.0m
5.0m
47031
47080
47081
47041
47082
47083
Cable
length
Catalogue
number
1.5m
3.0m
5.0m
1.5m
3.0m
5.0m
47051
47053
47055
47061
47063
47065
Cable
length
Catalogue
number
1.5m
3.0m
5.0m
1.5m
3.0m
5.0m
47974
47975
47976
47977
47978
47979
DG - D05B / DG - D06B
Model
Package
(pcs)
H05VV-F (DG-D05B)
H05VV-F (DG-D05B)
H05VV-F (DG-D05B)
H05VV-F (DG-D06B)
H05VV-F (DG-D06B)
H05VV-F (DG-D06B)
Max.3500W,16/250~
50
40
40
50
40
40
Cable
specification
3 x 1.5mm2
3 x 1.5mm2
3 x 1.5mm2
3 x 1.5mm2
3 x 1.5mm2
3 x 1.5mm2
Child-safety extension sockets with LED switch types HKX-3 / HKX 4
Model
Package
(pcs)
HKX - 3N
HKX - 3N
HKX - 3N
HKX - 4N
HKX - 4N
HKX - 4N
Max.3500W,16/250~
50
40
40
50
40
40
Cable
specification
3 x 1.0mm2
3 x 1.5mm2
3 x 1.5mm2
3 x 1.0mm2
3 x 1.5mm2
3 x 1.5mm2
М10
DG - D03B / DG - D04B
Model
Package
(pcs)
Cable
specification
HKX - 5N
HKX - 5N
HKX - 5N
HKX - 6N
HKX - 6N
HKX - 6N
Max.3500W,16/250~
50
40
40
50
40
40
3 x 1.0mm2
3 x 1.5mm2
3 x 1.5mm2
3 x 1.0mm2
3 x 1.5mm2
3 x 1.5mm2
Package
(pcs)
Cable
specification
Cable
length
1.5m
3.0m
5.0m
1.5m
3.0m
5.0m
Catalogue
number
47980
47981
47982
47983
47984
47985
ODL - PYX
Model
ODL - PY - 05
50
ODL - PYX - 2E
40
GES - 008
40
3 x 1.5mm
3 x 1.5mm
-
Cable
length
Catalogue
number
2
1.5m
47986
2
1.5m
47987
-
47988
Electrical switches and sockets
"RHYME”
156
10A
Scheme
1 button
1 way
switch
1 button
2 way
switch
White
metallic
10A
Package Scheme Champagne Package Scheme
metallic
(pcs)
(pcs)
11011
10
11021
10
1 button
1 way
switch
1 button
2 way
switch
11012
10
11022
10
10A
Scheme
2 buttons
1 way
switch
White
metallic
11041
Scheme
White
metallic
dimmer
11191
10
2 buttons
1 way
switch
11042
White
metallic
door bell
11181
door bell 11181В
with sign
push
11181C
button
10
2 buttons
1 way
switch
dimmer
11192
10
10
door bell
with sign
push
11182C
button
10
11182
10
10
1 button
1 way
switch
1 button
2 way
switch
11016
10
11026
10
11023
10
Gold
metallic
11043
Package Scheme
(pcs)
10
dimmer
Gold
metallic
11193
2 buttons
1 way
switch
door bell
11183
door bell
with sign
push
11183C
button
dimmer
Grey
metallic
10
11024
10
11046
2 buttons
1 way
switch
Coffee
metallic
11196
10
door bell
10
door bell
with sign
push
button
Coffee
metallic
11186
dimmer
11186C
10
11015
10
11025
10
10A
Grey
metallic
Package Scheme
(pcs)
11044
2 buttons
1 way
switch
10
Graphite
metallic
Package
(pcs)
11045
10
Grey
metallic
11194
600W
Package Scheme
(pcs)
10
dimmer
Graphite
metallic
Package
(pcs)
11195
10
10A
Package Scheme
(pcs)
10
Package
(pcs)
600W
Package Scheme
(pcs)
10
1 button
1 way
switch
1 button
2 way
switch
Graphite
metallic
10A
Package Scheme
(pcs)
10
10A
Package Scheme
(pcs)
11014
10A
Package Scheme
(pcs)
10
1 button
1 way
switch
1 button
2 way
switch
Coffee
metallic
10A
Gold
metallic
Package Scheme
(pcs)
600W
Package Scheme
(pcs)
10
10A
10A
600W
Package Scheme Champagne Package Scheme
(pcs)
(pcs)
metallic
door bell
Coffee
metallic
10
10A
10
Package Scheme
(pcs)
11013
600W
Package Scheme Champagne Package Scheme
(pcs)
(pcs)
metallic
10
10A
10A
Package Scheme Champagne Package Scheme
(pcs)
(pcs)
metallic
10A
Scheme
1 button
1 way
switch
1 button
2 way
switch
Gold
metallic
10A
600W
N1
10A
door bell
Grey
metallic
11184
door bell 11184В
with sign
push
11184C
button
10A
Package Scheme
(pcs)
10
10
door bell
Graphite
metallic
Package
(pcs)
11185
10
door bell
with sign
push
11185C
button
10
Electrical switches and sockets
"RHYME”
16A
Scheme
German
type
socket
French
type
socket
16A
16A
Package Scheme Champagne Package Scheme
(pcs)
(pcs)
metallic
11211
10
11212
10
11211F
10
11212F
10
White
metallic
Phone
socket
11261
German
type
socket
French
type
socket
German
type
socket
French
type
socket
Package Scheme Champagne Package Scheme
(pcs)
(pcs)
metallic
10
Phone
socket
11281
10
Computer
socket
TV
11251
10
TV
Scheme
White
metallic
Insert key
power
switch
www.elmarkgroup.eu
White
metallic
Scheme
Computer
socket
157
10
Phone
socket
11282
10
Computer
socket
11252
10
TV
11262
Package Scheme Champagne Package Scheme
(pcs)
(pcs)
metallic
Insert key
power
switch
11331
10
Panel
White
metallic
Package
(pcs)
Double
11551
10
Double
11552
Triple
11661
10
Triple
11662
11332
10
Panel Champagne Package
(pcs)
metallic
Insert key
power
switch
Gold
metallic
Package Scheme
(pcs)
11213
10
11213F
10
Gold
metallic
16A
German
type
socket
French
type
socket
Package Scheme
(pcs)
10
Phone
socket
11283
10
Computer
socket
11253
10
TV
11263
Gold
metallic
11333
Package Scheme
(pcs)
10
Insert key
power
switch
Package Panel
(pcs)
Coffee
metallic
Package Scheme
(pcs)
11216
10
11216F
10
Coffee
metallic
German
type
socket
French
type
socket
Package Scheme
(pcs)
10
Phone
socket
11286
10
Computer
socket
11256
10
TV
11266
Coffee
metallic
Package Scheme
(pcs)
11336
Insert key
power
switch
10
16A
16A
Package Scheme
(pcs)
11214
10
11214F
10
Grey
metallic
German
type
socket
French
type
socket
Package Scheme
(pcs)
Graphite
metallic
Package
(pcs)
11215
10
11215F
10
Graphite
metallic
Package
(pcs)
10
Phone
socket
11265
10
11284
10
Computer
socket
11285
10
11254
10
TV
11255
10
Graphite
metallic
Package
(pcs)
11335
10
11264
Grey
metallic
Package Scheme
(pcs)
Insert key
power
switch
11334
10
Grey
metallic
Package
(pcs)
Panel
Graphite
metallic
Package
(pcs)
Panel
Gold
metallic
10
Double
11553
10
Double
11556
10
Double
11554
10
Double
11555
10
10
Triple
11663
10
Triple
11666
10
Triple
11664
10
Triple
11665
10
Coffee
metallic
Package Panel
(pcs)
Grey
metallic
N1
Електрически ключове и контакти
Панели "SPLENDOR"
158
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Colour
WHITE
Type
single
single with cover
double
triple
Catalogue №
06301
0629
06311
06321
Package(pcs)
40
20
40
40
Colour
CHROME
single
double
triple
Catalogue №
063010
063110
063210
Package(pcs)
40
40
40
Type
Colour
SILVER GRAY
Type
single
double
triple
Catalogue №
06302
06312
06322
Package(pcs)
40
40
40
Colour
YELLOW
Type
single
double
triple
Catalogue №
06304
06314
06324
Package(pcs)
40
40
40
PEAR-TREE
Colour
Type
single
double
triple
Catalogue №
06305
06315
06325
Package(pcs)
40
40
40
Colour
GOLDEN
single
double
triple
Catalogue №
063011
063111
063211
Package(pcs)
40
40
40
Type
Colour
BORDO
Type
single
double
triple
Catalogue №
06307
06317
06327
Package(pcs)
40
40
40
CHERRY-TREE
Colour
N2
Type
single
double
triple
Catalogue №
06306
06316
06326
Package(pcs)
40
40
40
BLACK
Colour
Type
single
single with cover
double
triple
Catalogue №
06303
1629
06313
06323
Package(pcs)
40
20
40
40
ORANGE
Colour
single
double
triple
Catalogue №
063012
063112
063212
Package(pcs)
40
40
40
Type
Colour
LIGHT BLUE
Type
single
double
triple
Catalogue №
06308
06318
06328
Package(pcs)
40
40
40
DARK BLUE
Colour
Type
single
double
triple
Catalogue №
06309
06319
06329
Package(pcs)
40
40
40
Electrical switches and sockets
Functional part “SPLENDOR”
159
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Type
Rated current
In (A)
Colour
Catalogue
number
Package
(pcs)
one button
one way switch
10
10
cross switch
10
0601
1601
0602
1602
0603
1603
10
one button two
way switch
white
dark gray
white
dark gray
white
dark gray
Catalogue
number
Package
(pcs)
Type
two buttons
one way switch
two buttons one way
switch with light / two
buttons two way switch
Rated current
In (A)
10
10
Type
Rated current
In (A)
German type
socket
16
French type
socket
16
German type
socket (double)
16
Type
Rated current
In (A)
one button one
way switch with light
10
one button two
way switch with light
10
Type
Rated current
In (A)
Push light button
10
Door bell switch
10
Type
Power
(W)
Dimmer switch
350
Fan speed switch
500
Type
ТV
Colour
white
dark gray
white
dark gray
Colour
white
dark gray
white
dark gray
white
dark gray
Colour
white
dark gray
white
dark gray
Colour
white
dark gray
white
dark gray
Colour
white
dark gray
white
dark gray
Colour
RG 11
white
dark gray
Colour
Type
Phone socket
Phone socket double
Computer socket
RG 45
Type
Rated current
In (A)
Insert key
power switch
10
white
dark gray
white
dark gray
white
dark gray
Colour
white
dark gray
0610
1610
0612 / 0611
1612 / 1611
Catalogue
number
0616
1616
0616F
1616F
0616D
1616D
Catalogue
number
0606
1606
0607
1607
10
10
10
10
Package
(pcs)
10
10
10
Package
(pcs)
10
10
Catalogue
number
Package
(pcs)
0605
1605
0609
1609
10
Catalogue
number
Package
(pcs)
0618
1618
0619
1619
10
10
10
Catalogue
number
Package
(pcs)
0621
1621
10
Catalogue
number
Package
(pcs)
0623
1623
06232
16232
0624
1624
10
Catalogue
number
Package
(pcs)
0633
1633
10
10
10
N2
Electrical switches and sockets
"BASIC"
160
www.elmarkgroup.eu
10A
Scheme
White
10A
Package Scheme
(pcs)
Beige
(crème)
Package Scheme
(pcs)
1 button
1 way switch
Tg101
1 button
2 way switch
TG102
38001
10
38002
10
38011
10
1 button
1 way switch
Tg101
1 button
2 way switch
TG102
38012
10
10
cross switch
TG115
38071
10
cross switch
TG115
38072
10
1 button
1 way switch
with light
TG114
38701
10
1 button
1 way switch
with light
TG114
38702
1 button
1 way switch
Tg101
1 button
2 way switch
TG102
38000
10
38010
10
cross switch
TG115
38070
1 button
1 way switch
with light
TG114
38700
10A
Scheme
2 button
1 way switch
Tg103
White
38050
Package Scheme
(pcs)
10
Scheme
White
dimmer
38800
TG111
2 button
1 way switch
Tg103
Package Scheme
(pcs)
38051
2 button
1 way switch
Tg103
White
push button
38100
TG112A
door bell
TG112
38120
10
Silver
gray
38052
400W
Package Scheme
(pcs)
dimmer
10
TG111
Beige
(crème)
38801
Beige
(crème)
10
push button
38101
10
door bell
TG112A
TG112
38121
Package Scheme Graphite
(pcs)
dark gray
38003
10
38013
10
10
cross switch
TG115
38073
10
1 button
1 way switch
with light
TG114
38703
Package Scheme
(pcs)
dimmer
10
TG111
Silver
gray
38802
2 button
1 way switch
Tg103
38053
Package Scheme Graphite
(pcs)
dark gray
dimmer 38803
10
TG111
10
push button
10
door bell
TG112A
TG112
Silver
gray
38102
38122
10
push button
10
door bell
TG112A
TG112
38103
38123
Package
(pcs)
38005
10
38015
10
10
cross switch
TG115
38075
10
10
1 button
1 way switch
with light
TG114
38705
10
10
10
10
cross switch
TG115
38074
10
1 button
1 way switch
with light
TG114
38704
10A
Package Scheme
(pcs)
2 button
1 way switch
Tg103
Blue
38054
10A
Package Scheme
(pcs)
Tree
(Pear)
Package
(pcs)
2 button
1 way switch
Tg103
38055
10
10
400W
Package Scheme
(pcs)
dimmer
10
TG111
Blue
38804
10A
Package Scheme Graphite
(pcs)
dark gray
Tree
(Pear)
1 button
1 way switch
Tg101
1 button
2 way switch
TG102
38014
10
10A
Package Scheme
(pcs)
38004
400W
10A
Package Scheme
(pcs)
Blue
1 button
1 way switch
Tg101
1 button
2 way switch
TG102
10A
Package Scheme Graphite
(pcs)
dark gray
10
10A
Package Scheme
(pcs)
1 button
1 way switch
Tg101
1 button
2 way switch
TG102
400W
10A
Package Scheme
(pcs)
10A
10A
Beige
(crème)
10A
Scheme
Silver
gray
10A
400W
N3
10A
400W
Package Scheme
(pcs)
dimmer
10
TG111
Tree
(Pear)
Package
(pcs)
38805
10
10A
Package Scheme
(pcs)
10
push button
10
door bell
TG112A
TG112
Blue
38104
38124
10A
Package Scheme
(pcs)
Tree
(Pear)
Package
(pcs)
10
push button
38105
10
10
door bell
38125
10
TG112A
TG112
Electrical switches and sockets
"BASIC"
16A
Scheme
Ger.type
White
10
38250
TZ107C
with cover
10
French type
10
Ger.type
TZ101
Ger.type
double
TZ115
Scheme
tel.
TZ106
comp.
TZ112
Scheme
TV
38200F
38200D
White
38350
38300
White
Ger.type
TZ107
Ger.type
TZ107C
Beige
(crème)
10
French type
TZ101
Ger.type
double
TZ115
Package Scheme
(pcs)
10
10
tel.
Tz106
comp.
TZ112
Package Scheme
(pcs)
10
Panel
White
Package
(pcs)
Double
38900
Triple
38910
TV
16A
Package Scheme
(pcs)
38201
10
38251
10
with cover
38360
TZ111
www.elmarkgroup.eu
16A
Package Scheme
(pcs)
38200
TZ107
161
Ger.type
TZ107
Ger.type
TZ107C
Silver
gray
38201D
Beige
(crème)
38351
38301
Beige
(crème)
10
10
French type
TZ101
Ger.type
double
TZ115
Package Scheme
(pcs)
10
10
tel.
TZ106
comp.
TZ112
Package Scheme
(pcs)
TV
Ger.type
Blue
Package Scheme
(pcs)
Ger.type
Tree
(Pear)
Package
(pcs)
10
38203
10
38204
10
38205
10
10
38253
TZ107C
with cover
10
38254
TZ107C
with cover
10
38255
TZ107C
with cover
10
38202F
10
French type
10
French type
10
French type
38205F
10
38205D
10
Tree
(Pear)
Package
(pcs)
38355
10
38305
10
Tree
(Pear)
Package
(pcs)
38365
10
Tree
(Pear)
Package
(pcs)
38202D
Silver
gray
38352
38302
10
TZ107
Ger.type
TZ101
Ger.type
double
TZ115
38203F
38203D
Package Scheme Graphite
dark gray
(pcs)
10
10
tel.
TZ106
comp.
TZ112
38353
38303
Silver
gray
Package Scheme Graphite
(pcs)
dark gray
38362
10
TV
Silver
gray
Package
(pcs)
Panel
Beige
(crème)
Package
(pcs)
10
Double
38901
10
Double
38902
10
Triple
38911
10
Triple
38912
Panel
Package Scheme
(pcs)
16A
38252
10
TZ111
Ger.type
16A
38202
38361
TZ111
Package Scheme Graphite
(pcs)
dark gray
with cover
38201F
16A
10
TZ107
Ger.type
TZ101
Ger.type
double
TZ115
Package Scheme
(pcs)
10
10
tel.
TZ106
comp.
TZ112
Package Scheme
(pcs)
TV
38204F
38204D
Blue
38354
38304
Blue
10
TZ107
Ger.type
TZ101
Ger.type
double
TZ115
Package Scheme
(pcs)
10
10
tel.
TZ106
comp.
TZ112
Package Scheme
(pcs)
38363
10
Panel
Graphite
dark gray
Package
(pcs)
Panel
Blue
10
Double
38903
10
Double
38904
10
Double
38905
10
10
Triple
38913
10
Triple
38914
10
Triple
38915
10
TZ111
TZ111
38364
10
TV
TZ111
Package Panel
(pcs)
N3
Electrical switches and sockets
Panels and frames "LIFE STYLE”
162
www.elmarkgroup.eu
PANELS
Colour
Type
single
WHITE
double
triple
quadruple
sixfold
Catalogue №
34601
34613
34625
34637
34660
Package(pcs)
40
40
40
35
35
CHROME
Colour
Type
single
double
triple
quadruple
sixfold
Catalogue №
34609
34621
34633
34645
-
Package(pcs)
40
40
40
35
-
SILVER GRAY
Colour
Type
single
double
triple
quadruple
sixfold
Catalogue №
34610
34622
34634
34646
34662
Package(pcs)
40
40
40
35
35
YELLOW
Colour
Catalogue №
24262
24201
24202
Package (pcs)
10
10
10
Type
single
double
triple
quadruple
sixfold
Catalogue №
34602
34614
34626
34638
-
Package(pcs)
40
40
40
35
-
Type
single
double
triple
quadruple
sixfold
Catalogue №
34611
34623
34635
34647
-
Package(pcs)
40
40
40
35
-
Type
single
double
GOLDEN
triple
quadruple
sixfold
Catalogue №
34608
34620
34632
34644
-
Package(pcs)
40
40
40
35
-
Type
single
double
triple
quadruple
sixfold
Catalogue №
34606
34618
34630
34642
-
Console
Package(pcs)
40
40
40
35
-
Catalogue №
Colour
Colour
10
* Single switch or socket use triple frame
BORDO
Package (pcs)
Type
single
CHERRY-TREE
double
triple
quadruple
Catalogue №
34162
34624
34636
34648
-
Package(pcs)
40
40
40
35
-
Type
single
double
Catalogue №
34607
34619
34631
34643
34661
Package(pcs)
40
40
40
35
35
Type
single
double
GREEN
triple
quadruple
sixfold
Catalogue №
34603
34615
34627
34639
-
Package(pcs)
40
40
40
35
-
Type
single
double
triple
quadruple
sixfold-
Catalogue №
34605
34617
34629
34641
-
Colour
Colour
Colour
DARK GRAY
triple
quadruple
sixfold
Console box for bricks
and concrete
triple quadruple sixfold
24203 71304 68206
10
10
Console box for hollow-wall
triple quadruple
24205 24206
10
10
10
* Single, double or triple swich or socket use triple console
sixfold
LIGHT BLUE
Colour
Package(pcs)
24206F
PEAR-TREE
Colour
N4
double triple quadruple sixfold
Frame
40
40
40
triple
quadruple
Catalogue №
2702
2703
2704
Package (pcs)
10
10
10
Box
35
DARK BLUE
Colour
Surface mounting box
double
Type
single
double
triple
quadruple
sixfold
Catalogue №
34604
34616
34628
34640
-
Package(pcs)
40
40
40
35
-
Watertight box
triple
quadruple sixfold
22451А 22461А
10
10
22471А
10
Electrical switches and sockets
Functional part “LIFE STYLE”
163
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Type
Rated current
In (A)
one button
one way switch
16
cross switch
16
Type
Rated current
In (A)
one button two
way switch
one button two
way switch with light
Type
door bell switch
with light
push button
with light
16
16
Rated current
In (A)
10
10
Type
Rated current
In (A)
curtain switch
10
Type
Power
(W)
dimmer switch
500
fan speed switch
500
Type
Power
(VA)
bell 230V
8
Type
Rated current
In (A)
German type
socket
French type
socket
16
16
Type
Rated current
In (A)
Italian standard
multi socket
16
RG 11
Satellite socet
Colour
white
dark gray
white
dark gray
Colour
white
dark gray
white
dark gray
Colour
white
dark gray
Colour
white
dark gray
white
dark gray
Colour
white
dark gray
Colour
white
dark gray
white
dark gray
Colour
white
dark gray
white
dark gray
white
dark gray
Colour
Type
phone socket
computer socket
RG 45
Type
Rated current
In (A)
decorative switch
white
dark gray
white
dark gray
Colour
Type
TV antenna socket
Colour
white
dark gray
white
dark gray
Colour
white
dark gray
Catalogue
number
20501
21501
20579
21579
Catalogue
number
20506
21506
20507
21507
Catalogue
number
20510A
21510A
20510B
21510B
Package
(pcs)
4
4
Package
(pcs)
4
4
Package
(pcs)
4
4
Catalogue
number
Package
(pcs)
20521
21521
4
Catalogue
number
Package
(pcs)
20803
21803
20803A
21803A
8
8
Catalogue
number
Package
(pcs)
20616
21616
8
Catalogue
number
Package
(pcs)
20265
21265
20265F
21265F
4
4
Catalogue
number
Package
(pcs)
20203
21203
4
Catalogue
number
Package
(pcs)
20228
21228
30301
31301
Catalogue
number
20251
21251
20266
21266
4
4
Package
(pcs)
4
4
Catalogue
number
Package
(pcs)
20056
21056
10
N4
Electrical switches and sockets
"HAKAN”
164
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Type
one button
one way switch
SR - 2503
Rated current
In (A)
10
10
Type
Rated current
In (A)
10
white
380601
380602
380603
380604
380605
380606
380607
380608
silver gray
creme
wenge
silver gray
creme
wenge
Color
Catalogue
number
white
380701
380702
380703
380704
380705
380706
380707
380708
silver gray
creme
wenge
white
two button
one way switch
with light
SR - 2502
10
Type
Rated current
In (A)
one button two
way switch
SR - 2510
10
Type
Rated current
In (A)
German type
socket
SR - 2506
Catalogue
number
white
one button
one way switch
with light
SR - 2501
two button
one way switch
SR - 2504
Color
10
silver gray
creme
wenge
10
N5
10
Type
Rated current
In (A)
dimer
SR - 2513
Type
TV
SR - 2508
10
Rated current
In (A)
10
Type
Push light button
SR - 2514
10
Rated current
In (A)
10
10
10
10
white
380711
380712
380713
380714
10
Color
Catalogue
number
Package
(pcs)
white
380801
380802
380803
380804
380805
380806
380807
380808
380809
380810
380811
380812
10
Color
Catalogue
number
Package
(pcs)
white
380830
380831
380832
380833
10
Color
Catalogue
number
Package
(pcs)
white
380813
380814
380815
380816
380817
380818
380819
380820
silver gray
creme
wenge
silver gray
creme
wenge
silver gray
creme
wenge
silver gray
creme
wenge
silver gray
creme
wenge
silver gray
creme
wenge
silver gray
creme
wenge
Color
Catalogue
number
white
380821
380822
380823
380824
380825
380826
380827
380828
silver gray
creme
wenge
white
Door bell switch
SR - 2509
Package
(pcs)
Package
(pcs)
white
phone
SR - 2516
10
Catalogue
number
white
German type
socket double
SR - 2512
10
Color
white
German type
socketс with cover
SR - 2516
Package
(pcs)
silver gray
creme
wenge
10
10
10
10
Package
(pcs)
10
10
Consumatives
Consumatives
167
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Cable tags – sets
TYPE
Section (mm)
EC-0-0
EC-0-1
EC-0-2
EC-0-3
EC-0-4
EC-0-5
EC-0-6
EC-0-7
EC-0-8
EC-0-9
1.5 - 3.2
1.5 - 3.2
1.5 - 3.2
1.5 - 3.2
1.5 - 3.2
1.5 - 3.2
1.5 - 3.2
1.5 - 3.2
1.5 - 3.2
1.5 - 3.2
TYPE
Section (mm)
EC-1-0
EC-1-1
EC-1-2
EC-1-3
EC-1-4
EC-1-5
EC-1-6
EC-1-7
EC-1-8
EC-1-9
2.6 - 4.2
2.6 - 4.2
2.6 - 4.2
2.6 - 4.2
2.6 - 4.2
2.6 - 4.2
2.6 - 4.2
2.6 - 4.2
2.6 - 4.2
2.6 - 4.2
TYPE
Section (mm)
EC-2-0
EC-2-1
EC-2-2
EC-2-3
EC-2-4
EC-2-5
EC-2-6
EC-2-7
EC-2-8
EC-2-9
3.6 - 5.2
3.6 - 5.2
3.6 - 5.2
3.6 - 5.2
3.6 - 5.2
3.6 - 5.2
3.6 - 5.2
3.6 - 5.2
3.6 - 5.2
3.6 - 5.2
TYPE
Section (mm)
EC-3-0
EC-3-1
EC-3-2
EC-3-3
EC-3-4
EC-3-5
EC-3-6
EC-3-7
EC-3-8
EC-3-9
5 - 7.2
5 - 7.2
5 - 7.2
5 - 7.2
5 - 7.2
5 - 7.2
5 - 7.2
5 - 7.2
5 - 7.2
5 - 7.2
Number in a roller Catalogue number
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
318000
318001
318002
318003
318004
318005
318006
318007
318008
318009
Number in a roller Catalogue number
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
318010
318011
318012
318013
318014
318015
318016
318017
318018
318019
Number in a roller Catalogue number
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
318020
318021
318022
318023
318024
318025
318026
318027
318028
318029
Number in a roller Catalogue number
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
318030
318031
318032
318033
318034
318035
318036
318037
318038
318039
TYPE
Section (mm)
EC-0-a
EC-0-b
EC-0-R
EC-0-S
EC-0-T
EC-0-N
EC-0-P
EC-0-Е
EC-0-А
EC-0-B
EC-0-C
EC-0-Q
1.5 - 3.2
1.5 - 3.2
1.5 - 3.2
1.5 - 3.2
1.5 - 3.2
1.5 - 3.2
1.5 - 3.2
1.5 - 3.2
1.5 - 3.2
1.5 - 3.2
1.5 - 3.2
1.5 - 3.2
TYPE
Section (mm)
EC-1-a
EC-1-b
EC-1-R
EC-1-S
EC-1-T
EC-1-N
EC-1-P
EC-1-Е
EC-1-А
EC-1-B
EC-1-C
EC-1-Q
2.6 - 4.2
2.6 - 4.2
2.6 - 4.2
2.6 - 4.2
2.6 - 4.2
2.6 - 4.2
2.6 - 4.2
2.6 - 4.2
2.6 - 4.2
2.6 - 4.2
2.6 - 4.2
2.6 - 4.2
TYPE
Section (mm)
EC-2-a
EC-2-b
EC-2-R
EC-2-S
EC-2-T
EC-2-N
EC-2-P
EC-2-Е
EC-2-А
EC-2-B
EC-2-C
EC-2-C
3.6 - 5.2
3.6 - 5.2
3.6 - 5.2
3.6 - 5.2
3.6 - 5.2
3.6 - 5.2
3.6 - 5.2
3.6 - 5.2
3.6 - 5.2
3.6 - 5.2
3.6 - 5.2
3.6 - 5.2
TYPE
Section (mm)
EC-3-a
EC-3-b
EC-3-R
EC-3-S
EC-3-T
EC-3-N
EC-3-P
EC-3-Е
EC-3-А
EC-3-B
EC-3-C
EC-3-Q
5 - 7.2
5 - 7.2
5 - 7.2
5 - 7.2
5 - 7.2
5 - 7.2
5 - 7.2
5 - 7.2
5 - 7.2
5 - 7.2
5 - 7.2
5 - 7.2
Number in a roller Catalogue number
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
31800a
31800b
31800R
31800S
31800T
31800N
31800P
31800E
31800A
31800B
31800C
31800Q
Number in a roller Catalogue number
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
31801a
31801b
31801R
31801S
31801T
31801N
31801P
31801E
31801A
31801B
31801C
31801Q
Number in a roller Catalogue number
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
31802a
31802b
31802R
31802S
31802T
31802N
31802P
31802E
31802A
31802B
31802C
31802Q
Number in a roller Catalogue number
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
31803a
31803b
31803R
31803S
31803T
31803N
31803P
31803E
31803A
31803B
31803C
31803Q
М8
ELMARK sample boards in business centers
166
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Board 1
Board 3
Board 2
Board switches
ELMARK’s participation in technical exhibitions
Hannover Messe 2008, Germany
Paris 2008, France
167
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Service and maintenance
168
www.elmarkgroup.eu
ELMARK HOLDING SC offers wide range of services to answer the client’s requirements
completely and thoroughly.
In order to improve the service quality ELMARK HOLDING has opened:
E-mail: support@elmarkholding.eu; tel. +359 52 575 500; fax +359 52 575 501
to receive claims, advice, questions and orders for services.
* ELMARK HOLDING SC provides guarantee and post-guarantee maintenance to all
products.
* Repair or replacement of damaged devices in guarantee or post-guarantee period.
* Each letter could be sent in the language preferred by the client.
* The guarantee of the products is valid at adherence to the specifications for mounting
and exploitation.
ELMARK HOLDING SC has started engineering services as well.
* Making of boards at client’s documentation projects.
* Appurtenances mounting in industrial projects.
* Recommendation for modernization and reconstruction of outdated devices.
* Choice of suitable current leakage protection in order to improve the safety of the staff.
* Defining the power supply voltage quality and the consumed capacity.
* Harmonic analysis of the power supply voltage and studying the possibilities for failure
lessening. Calculating smoothing filters.
* Capacity factor measuring and calculating the necessary capacitor batteries. Cutting
down the energy losses and improving the quality of the supplied electrical energy.
To connect the engineering department you can refer to:
e-mail: engineering@elmarkholding.eu
or phone +359 89 666 88 01, fax +359 58 66 25 25
ELMARK HOLDING SC
BULGARIA, VARNA
ZPZ, 10 Perla Str.
Tel.
+359 52 57 55 00
Fax
+359 52 57 55 01
E-mail: offce@elmarkholding.eu
ELMARK FACTORY IN EUROPE
GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR BULGARIA
ELMARK GROUP - BULGARIA LTD
BULGARIA, VARNA
ZPZ, 10 Perla Str.
Tel.
+359 52 57 55 55
Fax
+359 52 57 55 80
E-mail: offcevarna@elmarkgroup.eu
BULGARIA, SOFIA
160 Geo Milev Blvd.
Tel./Fax +359 2 971 15 60 / 61
E-mail: offcesofa@elmarkgroup.eu
ELMARK INDUSTRIES SC
BULGARIA, DOBRICH
2 Dobrudja Blvd.
Tel./Fax +359 58 66 25 25
E-mail: elmarkfactory@elmarkholding.eu
BULGARIA, PLOVDIV
180 Brezovsko Shose, warehouse No. 25
Tel./Fax +359 32 968 210
E-mail: offceplovdiv@elmarkgroup.eu
GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR ROMANIA
GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR GREECE
ELMARK GRUP SRL
ROMANIA, BUCHAREST
8 Bucuresti Urziceni Str.
Tel.
+40 21 351 54 81 / 82
Fax
+40 21 351 54 83
E-mail: offcebucharest@elmarkgroup.eu
ANASTASIADI S.A.
GREECE, THESSALONIKI
4, G. Drossini Str., Kordelio
Tel.
+30 2310 700250
Fax
+30 2310 707577
E-mail: central@anastasiadi.gr
GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR SERBIA
GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR CYPRUS
ELMARK GROUP DOO
SERBIA, KRAGUJEVAC
4 Drage Todorovich Str.
Tel.
+381 34 311 777
Fax
+381 34 311 778
E-mail: offcekragujevac@elmarkgroup.eu
SERBIA, BELGRADE
Zemun - Altina
45 Ugrinovachki put Str.
Mobile +381 63 401 426
Tel./Fax +381 11 316 39 50
E-mail: offcebelgrade@elmarkgroup.eu
GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR CROATIA
ELMARK GROUP DOO
CROATIA, Zagreb
Mobile: ++385 95 924 29 93
Fax:
++385 1 557 19 23
E-mail: offcezagreb@elmarkgroup.eu
GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR HUNGARY
ELEKTRO PROFI COMMERCIAL LTD.
HUNGARY, BUDAPEST
3 Albertirsai Str.
Tel.
+36 1 460 61 40
Fax
+36 1 460 61 41
E-mail: kereskedelem@elektroprof.hu
GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR JORDAN
SOFIA IMPORT&EXPORT EST.
JORDAN, AMMAN
SHAFA BARDAN - ASP UNIVERSITY CIRCLE
PRINCE TATAL BIN MOHAMMAD STR.
Tel.
+962 7 77 749649
Fax
+962 6 53 38589
E-mail: waleed_qudah@yahoo.com
GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR SRI LANKA
ATTOTECH SYSTEMS ENGINEERING (PVT) LTD.
SRI LANKA, BALLUMMAHARA,
Mudungoda, No: 72, Kandy Road
Tel.
+943 34 674 803
Fax
+943 34 674 802
E-mail: general.inquiries@attotech.lk
HLEKTRAPOTHIKI L.T.D.
CYPRUS, PAFOS
3, Kalamatas Str.
Tel.
+357 26 937 726
GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR BOSNA I HERCEGOVINA
STANEX DOO
BOSNA I HERCEGOVINA, ZENICA
17 KRALJA TVRTKA I Str.
Tel.
+387 32 444 040 / 050 / 060
E-mail: stanex@telekabel.ba
ELIM DOO
BOSNA I HERCEGOVINA, LAKTAŠI
Shushniaari Str.
Tel.
+387 51 586 000
Fax
+387 51 586 060
E-mail: elimdoo@blic.net
GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR MONTENEGRO
TRGOTEHNA DOO
MONTENEGRO, NIKSHICH
10 Zarka Zrenjanina Str.
Tel./Fax +381 83 246 056
E-mail: trgotehna@cg.yu
GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR MACEDONIA
PIT KOM DOOEL
MACEDONIA, NEGOTINO
120 Dame Gruev Str.
Tel.
+389 43 370 287
Fax
+389 43 370 282
E-mail: pitcom@mt.net.mk
GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR ISRAEL
TAMHASH LTD
ISRAEL, RISHON LE ZION
21 Moshe Sharet St., P.O.B 5038 75151
Tel.
+972 3 9611288
Fax
+972 3 9616270 / 5747
E-mail: offce@tamhash.co.il
GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR ITALY
GPTECNO Italy,Torino
10134, VIA ALBENGA, 20 ,
Tel:
+39 011-3173202
Fax
+39 011-3172149
E-mail: info@gptecno.it